A Complete Analysis of the German Language, Or A Philological and Grammatical View of Its ...

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http: //books .google .com/I

COMPLETE ANALYSIS

OF THE

GERMAN LANGUAGE:

OB. A

PHILOLOGICAL

AND

GRAMMATICAL FIEW

OF IT>

CONSTRUCTION, ANALOGIES, AND VARIOUS

PROPERTIES.

TT7' — ■

■i » Jb"

By Dr. render.

A — * ■■ ■

W f* <

' ' s ' - ' - .

- . . ...

< • I • • •

HonHon :

PRINTED BY COX^ SON> AND BATLIS, NO. 75> GREAT QUEEN STREET^

LlNCOLN*h-lNN-PlEI DS,

FX)R THE AUTHOR, AND PUBLISHED BY H. D. SYMONDS,

PATERNObTER-ROW.

1804,

■l-.. -

* • • •

« • « •

• . * • • • »

• • • r • ■

• • • ■ • • * ■ «

• ••■ •;••"•- •

• a •»■ • • €••«■•■ V

•fo

HISvIMPERIAL MAJESTY

^LEX^JVBER L

EMPEROR AND AUTOCRAT

OP

ALL THE RUSSLA.S,

THE FOLLOWING WORK IS,

WITH ALL DUE RESPECT AND SUBMISSION INSCRIBED,

BY

HIS IMPERIAL majesty's

MOST DByOT£Dt AHD
MOST OBEDIENT SERVANT,

WILUAM RENDER.

»^J— — M ■■■■■ * » fc ■ II ■ I I ' ' * I * ■ a^— «— J^

PREFACE.

The author of the present work has beeii
induced to offer a few prefatory remarks, in
order to elucidate his design, and thus enable
the reader to form his own opinion of the
utility of his. performance. — -

It will. not, perhaps, be thought too harsh,
if I assert, that the greater part of German
grammars hitherto published, .have been not
unfrequently the offspring of necessity \ a cir-
cumstance which, while it accounts for their
defects, certainly offers no extenuation for thera ;
nor can the warmest philanthropy even wishf
that mankind should be misled, merely to give
subsistence to the propagators of error. No
ingenuous mind, I trust, either can or. will
impute this, remark to illiberality of sentiment,
or to the influence of personal or private pique;
it does, in fact, proceed from neither, but
gipiply from a rooted love jof truth, and a

cease-

VI

ceaseless anxiety fpr the enlargement of human
knowlecjge.

None, but such as have made the trial,
can duly appreciate the labour, research, and
exactitude which are indispensably requisite,
in order thoroughly to analyse a language.
It is not merely noticing a few obvious va-
riations, or tracing a faint outline of an ex-
tensive picture ; but it is surmounting innu-
merable dijfficulties, by the aid of patient in-
vestigation ; detecting, amid an abundance
of irrelevant matter, jsome general topic of en-
quiry; and penetrating with the scrutinizing
eye of reason, the cuncaienation of inveterate
prejudices, which obscure, and sometimes con-^
found the primeval sources, and radical stamina
4)f a language.

Little labour is required to describe the
general rules of syntax, or to trace the in-
flections of nouns, pronouns, verbs, &c. This
is a task which may be performed by any
novice ; but, at the same time, however well
performed, it must necessarily be deficient, in
what a student naturally expects from the
thorough analysis of a language.

To display with perspicuity the primary
organization of a language, and to detail its
characteristic idioms> its^ peculiar rules, kc. re«

quire

vn

quire such a previous knowledge of them, as
can result only from long and minute expe-
rience.

In order to acquire any modern language,
it is almost indispensably necessary to have a
previous acquaintance with the Greek and La-
tin ; but the German alone exacts no such
previous acquisition : for I may venture to
assert, that it is in every point of view ori-
ginal ! The English is peculiarly derived from
it ; for it is a fact, that the style of the an*
cient writers is absolutely more intelligible to
a German, moderately acquainted wilh the
former, than to an Engliahman himself: and
this arises from the prevalence of the German
orthography, a circumstance which renders a
glossary indispensably necessary in the read-
ing of Chaucer, and other cotemporary au-
thors.

It was this conviction th^t jfirst induced
me to compose the present work, added like-
wise ta the uncommon popularity of German
literature in England, which has increased to
such a degree, as to render even the tram'-
lation of a tran$lation acceptable.

^* A mere mere mimic's mimic.'*

Churchill.

lam

• » •

Vlll

I am not without hope, that the present
work may tend to render German literature
henceforth read in their native dress ; for surely
none can be found who would not prefer to
enjoy their excellencies, uncontaminated either
by the wilful or the careless misrepresentation
of translators, or by their unavoidable ignorance.

The plan adhered to in the subsequent
work, is strictly conformable to the operation
of nature ; a progress which ought to be in-
variably observed in a grammar of every Ian*
guage whatsoever. It is in vain to perplex the
mind of the student with a crude mass of ex-^
trancous matter, unless he: be first grounded
in tlie radical principles of the language he^ is
about to learn. It is, in fact, the same as
with extensive reading ; where a quantity of
information and of know^Iedge is accumulated
and stored up in the mind, without the power
of arranging the various parts, so as to be
adapted for those occasions in which it is re-
quisite to be called into action. -
■- In the present work, the learner will be
gradually led from the most obscure (or what
may be termed animal articulations J to abso-
lute, distinct, and clear ideas of rational signs
or representations. In the first dawning of
the mind, its ideas are necessarily obscure and

con-

,.1X

Confused ; hence, to obviate this, a guide is
indispensably requisite. It may undoubtedly
be said, that a new-born infant possesses the
power of expressing external sensations of joy,
fear, or sorrow ; his next progression is to
articulate words ; afterwards, in proportion
as the powers of perception and combination
expand, he next learns to unite those simple
ejaculations into certain sentences or phrases,
and thus regularly proceeds, till he becomes en-
able to embrace a larger sphere of ideal exer-
tion, and communicates his thoughts in ap-
propriate language. Such is the progress of
nature ; and shall we, her children, in teach-
ing her own method, presume to deviate, and
build, by the shalli^w aid of metaphysical rea-
soning, a fanciful structure without any solid
foundation?

Thus far I have thought it necessary to
premise, and now dismiss my work, to stand
or fall by its own merit. But I am willing
to hope, that after eight years of unremitted
labour, research, and progressive improvement,
it will not be found altogether unworthy of
public patronage. I have endeavoured to give
it every excellence of which it is capable,
not, however, without a strong conviction of

b the

the ardnoitsncss of the (ask, and the fallibility of
human exertion.

I invite criticism. All improvement is
gradual, and in every work of multifarious
divisions, various emendations may be struck
out by the collision of various minds. I
neither possess the vanity to suppose my work
faultless, nor the obstinacy or pride to reject
manly and disinterested criticism.

London^
JamtavT/ \stf 1804*^

THE AUTHOR

> 'a. ■ "

CONTENTS.

Page
A Dissertation on Language in general, aud principally

on the Study of the modem German - - - xv
Prefatory Observations on the German Alphabet - i

PART I.

THE ART OF SPEAKING WITH CORRECTNESS.

SECTION THE FIRST.
On Etymoio^f or the Formatign of W^'ds.

Chapter I.

Of Letters and their Sound . . - - 4
X. A. View of the German Alphabet and its pronun-
ciation, together with the Anglo-Saxon, and Old
English Characters ----- 5

2. Classification of the German Alphabet - - 6

3. Use of the Letters • •• - - . . 8
Analysis of the Letters - - - - - ^ 9
A Table, exhibiting, in one View, the whole Orga*

nisation of the Alphabet - - • • * 36

Chapter \h

Of the Formation of Speech.

1. Of Syllables - -40

2. Words^ and their Derivation - - - ibid.

3. Their Composition, or Junction - - • 4*

b 2 Chap-

xli

Chapter III. ^ P^g^

Of the Accent or Tone of Words. - -r - 4^

1. General Standard for the German Accent - "43

2. Marks of Lpngth and ^revjty - t - '44
3» Special Rules - . . - ^ - ibid.
Practice, elucidating the preceding third Chapter ^ 48

SECTION THE SECOND.

0/ Wordsy as Parif of Speech and their flexions.

Chapter L
A general View of them r - -f - ^ S^

Chapter II.

Of the Substantives.
!• Their various Kinds - - - - "S3

2* —— ? Formation - - - - - "54

3. ■ ' Genders - if - - , - - 61
^.. — — Piural Forn^ation ----- 68

5. — — Declension - - - • - "7'

6. Of proper and foreign Names - - r - 85
PractiiTCi^ elucidating the preceding Chapter r r 8$

Chapter. Ill,

Of the Adverbs?

If Their various Kinds - - - ■ •, • * 93

jt. .... • , , . Formation - - - - f. - 94

.3. ' ' ■ Degrees ^ ----- 96

4. ■ " ■ .1 . . ■ Inflection - - - - v . r 98

s

Chapter IV,

Of Words defining the Qualities of Substantives 99
1, The Articles - - .- - - - - iqo
j:, ^iK^puM Numen^ls - •* ^^ - « r 105

3, The

Xlll

Fags

3. The Pronouns • - • - - •'^7

4. Adjectives - - - - " " ^3S
Practice, elucidating the preceding Sections -. - 143

Chapter V.

Of the Verb 154

1. The Auxiliary - - . - ^ - iHd,

2. — — Regular - - - - * • - - igy

3. Irregular - - - ^ - - /. 174

4. — — Neuter - - - - . <^ • - 189

5. Compound - - • - - - 19X

6. Reflective - - - - - -197

7. — — Impersonal ------ 200

Chapter VI.
Of the Participle ------ 201

Chapter VIL '

Of Prepositions - - - ^ . /J/^

Chapter VIIL
Of Conjunctions - • '^ - - -219

Chapter IX.
Of Interjections --.---• 232
Practice, elucitjating the preceding Farts of Speech - 234

SECTION THE THIRD.
Of the Syntax.

Of the Combination of Words - - - 245

I. The Article with the Noun - - - - 246

II. Of Nouns joined together • ^ - - 248
JII. Of Nunierals - - -- - -251

JV. Of. Pronouns - =- - - . - - 2^

Vf Of Adjectives - - - * - - 259

VI. Of

XIV

Page
VI. Of the Verb -260

Vir. The Participles 262

VIII. Of Adverbs - - . - - -265

IX. Of Prepositions - - - - - -266

X. Of Conjunctions -. - - - - ibid.

XL Of Interjections ------ 268

XII. The Arrangement or Construction of Words - 269
Practice on all the Parts of Speech, occurring in the

Syntax -------- 270

fX Gernun Idioms . - - - - - - 303

PART II.

CF GERMAN ORTHOGRAPHY, OR THE METHOD OF
- WRITING WITH CORRECTNESS.

General Principles ------ 309

% Orthography of single Characters - - -311

II. Division of Syllables - - - - - 323

III. Orthography of coiE\pound Words - •* - 324

IV. Of Perspicuity apd Ac^curicy in writing * - 325

V. Of Signs, common in writing, or the Punctuation 327

■•

ON GERMAN PROSODY.

Some Specimens of modjcm and ancient German Poetry 331
A complete catalogue of German Authors, including
likewise learned Mtn, Artists, and scientific Writiers 349

A DISSERTATION on Language in genera^
and principally on the study of the modern
German.

In tracing the origin and progress of human in^
ventions, we endeavour to display to the world
an analysis of the human mind, and at the same
time shew the obvious pre-eminence of the ratio-
cinative powers of man.

In the intervals of domestic retirement^
when all the cares attendant on senatorial and pub*
lie concerns are freed from the mind, how de-
lightful is it for man to reflect upon himself, to con-
template the energies of his nature, to think se-
liously and estimate the blessings he enjoys, and
to examine the various causes which have given rise
to those blessings.

It has, I believe, ever been acknowledged, that,
the most important and distinguished attribute df
the mind, are reason and memory ; hence it may
justly be imagined that they are those which at
the same time constitute the difference between
matxand the bnrte. Enquiry, aided by the ardour
of curiosity, would be naturally excited to trace
and ascertain the mysterious working of that won-
derful process, by which languages have been
formed, and propagated amongst mankind in all
quarters of the globe. We behold the most exten-
sive and ingenious performance, which the powers
of reason could suggest and devise, apparently exe-
cuted without thought,^ and completed, as It

were.

XVI

were, without contrivance. The exertions of 4
<:ontrolling principle, conducting to the same end,
are for ever visible ; though the artist is uncon-
scious of his design. It is by these efforts of
ujimeditating skill, that the system of language
has been generated, and preserved uniform m all
its relations. To discover the strong connexions
and the nice dependencies of the various links
which compose this great chain of causes and
effects, has been hitherto a fruitless search.

With respect to the English language, it h
well known that it is a compound of the Anglo-
Saxon and modern German. The Dutch ^ Danish^
and Swedish languages, are, together with the J?n-
glishy nothing more than different dialects from
those of the former. (Vide Diversions of Parley y
last edition, page 100.)

Every etymologist must admit, that a consi-
derable number of English words are derived fion^
the Anglo-Saxon and modern German. At the
same time, I own it is a difficult matter to have
any very intimate acquaintance with those lan-
.guages. ^ITie modem German has not been taught
m English seminaries, and consequently seldom
spoken in English companies : the English scholar
is, therefore, in that point, deficient ; deficient in
a principal (nay the most material point) namely;,
the derivation of words. Still there exists an alter-
native — the study of the modern German,, which
will furnish him with the means of unravelling
the difficulty ; it will familiarize him with that,
of which otherwise he can have but a very im-
perfect acquaintance, an introduction (which is^
indispensible) to the attainment of a knowledge of
those ancient languages, which form the basis o£
his Qwn.

The

XVll

The advantages which the English scholar
win gain by the study of the modern German lan-
guage, are indeed very considerable, and at the
same time will remove many of the unfounded
prejudices against the study of that language.

Long phraseology, the sentences too much
swelled out by particles, its harshness, &c. have
been hitherto the leading objections to the study
of German literature ; but it should be observed,
that within the last half century, the German, like
every other European language, has been greatly
improved. Philosophy has ruled its phrases, in
proportion as morals have been discussed in it, and
the arts encouraged in the country.

The length of a German period depends, in
a great degree, perhaps wholly, on the purity of
the author*s diction. It is true, some evidence
does exist, that partly justifies the charge of long
phfaseology. Sec. but the cause of this ought, long
since, to have been explained to the English ; and
the cause once explained, the effect will be instantly
manifested.

No sooner docs a good work make its appear-
ance at Leipzick, Gottingen, Berlin, Halle, &;c.
however correctly written and elegantly printed,
than the provincial booksellers in the smaller towns,
and in the dominions of inferior princes, cause
cheaper editions to be printed, which instead of
containing the classical language of the original,
are by country schoolmasters metamorphosed into
barbarism. From this cause proceeds the great body
of particles, the long phrases, and that confusion
of sentences, which either deters, or perhaps wholly
disgusts the learned foreigner.

c Not-

Notwithstanding what has been observed, I
could wish an Englishman not to discontinue his
pursuits, because of the many superior advantages
which he has, to natives of other countries;
for one of liberal education will much sooner
pronounce the German language, and with
more neatness and perspicuity than any other fo-*
reigner.

The end that I have principally in view, by
publishing this w^ork, is, that of facilitating the
study of mQiieni German, which I am the more
desirous of doing, because I know it to be the only
effectual naethoa of acquiring an accurate know-
ledge of the ancient^ that is of the Maso-Gothic and
Anglo Saxon, the sources from whence the present
EngUsh language is derived ; and because these an-
cient languages are not now spoken, much less are
they taught in English seminaries,

Any man who wishes to become a complete
master of my native language, and who has, per-
haps, not had the opportunity of obtaining it by
means of a learned teacher^ will, after an attentive
study and careful perusal of the present work, ob*
tain his purpose.

*^ Too much time," observes Mr.Tooke, Diver^
sions. of Pur ley ^ page 99, " fs spent in the study of
Latin and Greek : though far be it from me, to
wish to incur the charge of a desire to proscribe
the study of those ancient languages. But that the
knowledge of them is carried too much into useless
detail, and much time spent upon them, which
inight be more usefully employed, cannot be at all
denied, by any one vyho wishes to treat the question
in a sober andrational way."

#it

XIX

But to return to the question of the modern
German'; I think enough has been said to prove,
that it would be more studied by the English scho*
Jar, if the method of acquiring a knowledge of it
were rendered more easy, and the best method
pointed out, of enabling any one to read with fa-
cility our excellent authors in their original, and
converse with the natives of Germany upon equal
terms. Not to overlook two principal advantages ;
first, that which is derived from the extensive trade
carried on by this country with Germany ; and
secondly, the great utility this language would be
of, to officers of the army and navy, other very ob-
vious ones would result to persons studying the
German, particularly in a literary point of view.

Having conversed on various subjects with my
learned scholars (especially with those who have,
at times, commented on the great dramatic Bard), I
found they all sincerely lamented the neglect of
the modern German language at our public semi-
naries; for they maintained, with the greatest con-
fidence, that it was utterly impossible for an Eng-
lish writer to be quite pure in his native language,
without having previously some comparative know-
ledge of the Anglo'Saxon, or modern German. How
far those gentlemen are ri^ht, it is not for me pe-
remptorily to decide ; I shall therefore leave this
matter to the better judgment of more learned men.

Even persons whose learning otherwise is
highly respectable, by making oTVr small mistake,
have sometimes perverted the sense of a whole trans-
lation. This' ever will be the case with respect to
English scholars (many of whom have published
different translations^ from the German) in' conse-
quence of their not thoroughly understanding ei-
ther the idiom or phraseology ; and by that means

c 2 have

XX

;
\ /

have introda.ced into their performances so much
additional matter from their fertile imaginations,
as to give them an unnecessary prolixity, without
increasing either the interest. or beauty of the pro-
duction.

From these, and all former observations, it will
be evident,, that from a mere general acquaintance
with the German idiom, it is impossible for any one
to become an accurate translator of the literature of
that country. This remark is more particularly
true in regard to dramatic compositions, especially
those of Schiller y where not only a critical know-
ledge of the language, but also of the customs
and manners of the country, is indispensably neces-
sary, to qualify a person to become a successful
translator of this species of composition.

I have now before me several translations of
Schiller, Kotzebue, Biirgery Gothe^ and JVieland,
which I have compared with the originals. I
could produce numerous passages, nay whole scenes
where the translators have misunderstood the
meaning, and given them quite an opposite one.
Many a simple honest character, without disguise,
and plain in his expressions (see a striking instance
in the first scene of Schiller's original Caia/ and Love,
with that of the translation called the Minister ^ es-
pecially the character of Miller and his Wife) \\2iS
been represented as a man of polished manners, and
his wife as a lady of elegant accomplishments ; and
many vulgar expressions, adapted to the lower
classes of society, been changed by translators into
those of polite gentlemen.

Among numerous passages, where I have
compared the translations of the former, I w^ill only
exhibit a few, which are not only diametrically

oppo-

XXI

opposite to the real intention and design of SchilJer,
but positively have no existence in the orijjinal
work. There will likewise be seen, in the scene
which I am about to exhibit, that the subsequent
ones are entirely useless^ because the translator
made ojie gross mistake in the pronoun /Ar, signi-
fying either your or her in Gennan.

The passage alluded to is in \hc fourth Act oi
Schiller's Cabale tuid Liebe^ translated under the Eng-
lish title of the MiJiiSter, where Ferdinand so suc-
cessfully works upon the cowardly feelings of the
Marschal Kalb, as to compel him at once to divulge
the whole collusion, which Ferdinand is conscious
has been carried on for the purpose of disconcert-
ing his plans, either by the intrigues of his father,
the president, or by the proceedings of the crafty
musician. To prevent any mistakes, I shall insert
the full scene.

TAe German is thus

HoFMARSCHALL.

Lassen Sie mich lo&z. Ich
will ja alles verrathcn.

Ferdinand.
O ! es musz reitzender seyn
niit andernnoch so himmlisch
zu schwarmen. — Wollte sie
ausschweifciii wollte sie, sie
konnte den Werih der Seele
herunter bringen, unddieTu-
gcnd mit der WoUust verfal-
jchen. (demMarschall die Pi^
stole aufsHerz druckend.) Wie
weit kainst du mit ihr 1 Ich
driicke ab, oder bekenne.

H.

The English translatlouy al^
luded tOy is thus :

Marshal.
Let ine go ! 1 will coo&ss
every thing.

Casimir.
Oh ! it must seem more
rapturous even to be her licen-
tious paramour, than to burn
with the purest, fondest, en-
thusiasm, for any other niaid I
She has charms that can re-
duce the valueof the soul, an4
equalize the transports of vir-
tue and voluptuousness ! (put^^
ting his pistol to tJu marshal's
breast.) How far is your con-
nexion advanced ? answer m«
or I fire this moment !

M.

XXII

H. Es ist nichts — ist ja alles
nichts. Haben Sie nur einc
Minute Geduld. Sic i^ind ja
bctrogen.

F, Und daran mahnst du
mich Bosewlcht } — Wie weit
kamst du niit ihr ? Du bist
dies Todes oder bekennc !

H. MonDieu! MelnGott!
Ich sprcche ja — so horen Sic
doch nur — Ihr Vater..,. Ihr
cigcner leiblicher Vatcr....

F.- fgr'nnmiger,) Hat

seine "I'ochter an dich ver-
kuppelt f Und wie weit kamst
du mil Ihr ? Ich ermorde dich
oder bekennc !

H. Sic rascn. Sie horen
nicht. Ich sah sie nie. Ich
kcnne sic nicht. Ich weisz
gar nichts von ihr.

F. (zurucktrettend,) Du
sahst sie nie ? fccnnest sie
nicht ? — Weist gar nichts
von ihr ? - — Die MilUrin ist
verloren um deinetwillen, du
ran<incst sie dreimal in einem
Athemhinweg? Fortschlech-
fer KcrL (er gibt ihm mtt der
PhUtiee'tnen Stretch undstoszt
ihnausdem Zimmer.J fiirdei-
»es gkichen istkein Pulvcr cr-
funden ! —

M. There is nothing in the
affair ' there is riot a word of
truth in the whole business.
Wc have deceived you from
the very beginning and the mi-
nister himself.

C. You have deceived me,
wretch ! 1 know it well, and
must I be remembered of it ?
Answer my question without
delay. How far is your con-
nexion with the girl advanced?
You are dead unless you con-
fess the truth.

M. You mistake my words.
To break off her connexioa,
with you, /i^r father.,.*

C Threw his daughter

into your arms ? Why what
care 1 ? Answer me directly to
my question, or I'll murder
you. How far is your con-
nexion advanced ? Tell me !
tell me ! tell me ! f shaking him
violently,)

M. You rave ! you will
not hear me ! I never spoke to
her ! 1 never saw her ! I know
her not.

C. f drawing back, J Thou
hast never spoken to her ?
Thou hast never seen her?
Thou knowest her not ? Julia
is lost for ever for thy sake,
and thrice in one breath hast
thou denied her ? (opening the
door with disdain,) Go,
wretch, go, powder were
thrown away on miscreants
like thee.

With

XXlll

With regard to the great additional matter,
which the translator has inserted, and which on a
nice comparison with the original will be demon-
strable, I shall say nothing. The reader, however,
will hen-Q observe, that Ferdinand is working the
cowardly marshal ; and with a pistol to his breast
demands that confession from him, which he knew
he had a right to obtain, being himself so strongly
suspected. The Marshal, in his pusillanimous con-
fusion, when he was developing to Ferdinand the
plot tha't had been laid, uses the following expres-
sion : So horensie dock nnr Ihr Faler.... Ihr eigcner
kibllcher Vater,... Now the English translator, who
did not understand the idiom of the phrase, has not
only substituted something of his own fancy, but
being unacquainted with the meaning of the pro-
noun /Ar, translated heVy has given to the English
reader orily the single^ when it is evidently intended
by, Schiller to convey a double one ; namely, that
Ferdinand in his rage should understand her father;
although the marshal meant A/^ (Ferdinand's) father,
the president. Now .the double entendre, could no
way be so happily introduced, as through the me-
diurti of this equivpcation. For which reason, with-
out an annotation, the English reader can have no
clear conception of the meaning of the German
author.

Indeed upon the pronoun 7Ar*, the whole me-
rit of the scene dppends. ITie truth of this will be
sufficiently evident from the following remark : if

the

■"'^"

* The pronoun Ihr, may signify your, or her, in German.
There is, however, for thig idiom no equivalent word in the£n|^-
lish language by which it can be translated. This circumstance
ought to have been explained in a note by the tranfilator^ which
would have at oikc cleared up tho laatter.

XXIV

the Marshal had expressed himself by the word which
the translator has done,he would then have entirely
prevented the subsequent catastrophe of the drama,
which he has now accomplished by inserting some
additional matter of his own invention. A true
knowledge of the German idiom, and as I have said
before, a note, explaining its singularity to the Eng-
lish reader, would have saved the translator much
trouble and perplexity, and consequently the sub-
seijuent plot would not have been spoiled; for under
this very conception follows the poisoning of Ferdi-
nand and Louisa. Whereas, according to the Eng-
lish translation, the poisoning of both was unneces-
sary, and out of all question.

I shall only point out one other great mistake,
in the same play, less pardonable than the former.
(Page 1 J 2, English translation). This beautiful scene
is thus translated :

LuisA. Und der Fluch I Julia. Pursued by yourfa-

Seines Vaters uns nach ! — Ehi
Flueh Unbesennenery den auch
M order nle ohne Erhoningaus-
sprechen^ den die Rachc dcs
Jlimmcls auch dem Dicb auf
dem Rade hdlt^ l^c.

ther's curse ! a curse^ unthink^
ing youth, never mentioned
without horror — even by the as-
sassins \ which the mercy of
heaven with-holds from the
very robber upon the racky ^c.

The original is quite the reverse :

A curse never mentioned by a murderer en the wheel, never
Wtkeard by heaven ; and which heavenly revenge^ never with-
held from the robber broken on the wheeL

Compare this meaning with the above*.

The

* I shall have numerous opportunities in tb6 sequel of this
\rork, to make the student acquaioted with niany more such er«

XXV

The student will iindj that the most beautifu)
productions of my learned countrpien have too oftea
been degraded by bad translations of the German
language, and which might have been prevented if
the natives of this country had shewn tneir transla*
tions to any learned German, before they sent then)
to the pressy in which case the public might have
relied upon the preservation of the originality.

It is now twelve years since I first had the hap*
piness of treading the soil of Great- Britain, In which
«>ace of time I have had many opportunities of stu^
dying the English languagCf and have obtained some
knowledge of the manners and customs of the in^
habitants; and were I to continue twelve years longer
here, I should never venture to issue a publicatioq
until I had first submitted it (I mean toe English
part) to one or more of the literati of this country.

Before I proceed further in this treatise cm Ian*
guage, I shall make some observations on our mo«
dem German authors. It is an indisputable fact»
that Schiller's writings are more difficult to be under*
stood than any other, owing to the numerous obscu-
rities with which they abound. His tragedies are the
most unintelligible of 'his performances, inconse*
quence of the peculiarities of the German idiomt
and the energetic mode of expression for which he
was not only remarkable, but inimitable. Ther^
are even many of the natives of Germany who mis-
(QOCeive him. The chefd^osuvres of Schiller are his

Tra«

iprs^ Slid vith the peculiar phnueologjr and idiomt of my n4t]v«
language \ and for that porpoie I shall alwajra take the most stril^-
iDg passages from Wt best anthors, accompanied with wj owi|
transtatioa*

d

^(V^gedi«s of Cabal and Loye ; -r- Fiesco ;-^Doq
^§rlQ$; — 9pd the Robbers; together with two other
^KHl^a^i whicl) have lately appeared in Germany^
O^Ued^ the Death of Walienstein, and jpiccolon^inii
which works undoubtedly entitle him (and justly)
$0 thp appellation of the German Shakespeare.

The chief scenes in all his dramatic writ^n^i
Mpeai forcibly to the heart ; and his readers will
always feel the alternate working of horrarj, anxiety^
t€rri^rj combassion^ and admiration. The Rev, W.
Whiter, or Cambridge, (who I am proud to calj
XDy pupil). in his learned and profound wo^k qx\
languages, Et^pnohgicum Magnum^ says :

^* Mr Schiller has acquired Iiis £une by the sivAj of an-,
ciept ^nd modern languages, and by comparing one with
Ac other, he learned the affinity of the whole. By that
means we ought to urge and repeat, that as w® advance
forward in these studies of languages, in speculations of the
beauties smd affinities^ the nature of the humanmind will be-
iUMne iporQ fully unfolded, at>d ipore faittifully exhibited^.
As we ascend by ^Ibw but persevering steps to tho^e higher
seats aiid more coiDmanding stations in the regions of know-
ledge, from which the mind delights to look abroad on the
prc^d, the clouds vanishi the scene opens, and the pro-
spect brightens to our view. Our conceptions ^Hl enlarge, as
piox ideas are expanded ; and, while the understanding giows
enlightened by the contemplation of its own faculties, wo
fibalT be still more enabled to appreciate — to feel and to
4^)joy the energies of io^dlect-r- the. powers oCkopv^led^Q
and^he blessings pf U(4h*"

This learned gentlemar^ pro^eda in his com-
iaentary on Schiller's tragedy of the Robbers^ th\js :

* %t The dream of Francis exhibits tlie most solemn nar-
ratives tha.t can well be presented to the feelings of ^n audi-
^ce. }t is the Day of Judgment in all its tejrrors, fr,om the
mouth of guiU in the moment of delirium, tl^'be j^ure is
tpo bo^utmil and natural to omit it here,^*

Th^

* ^W dreanier, Franc?^, exchinis (Set ikt trageJy of
iht Robbers^ Jet. F. Sc. I . Page t66J : Hark \ methought I
held a princely banquet, and all beat bliss about mj hean !—
'And I laid me down in my garden otpleasarc, deep drunken
with ddighti ; and suddenly ! — suddenly !-^-a monstrous thun-
der' struck on my astonished ear.-~l stdgf^red trembling up :
and behold ! methought 1 saw the whole horizon out-flaminr
in a fiery blaze : and mountains, and cities, and forests, all
inelnne as wax before a furnace : and a howling wind-storm
fwefi before it the seas, the heavens and the earth.'

'* There is one passsge in Virgil^ which well dtfserv^i
Co be remembered, where the word verro has been used to
innply the most violent part «if its figurative meaning. Thift
mibltme passage appears to have been present to the thoughts
bf Sckilltr^ when he made choice ,of the same metaphor oA
a still more awful and tremendous occasion.

Firgiiy in his poem, ^n. I. 6o« Uys :

• Ciisa sidtt Molui nrti^

Scepira tetansi miUit^g animos^ et iimperat iras.

til fOciut^ maria^ ac terras^ cctlumque profundum^
(luippe FERAMT rdpiJi secum, vLKKAjfTqtuper auras J^

< XTnless th^ power of iBloJu^ had been appointed to
^Ini the fury of the winds, they would have s we I^T before
tbem tiie seas^ the 6inb, and the heavens/

That Air. Schiller has studied thd writings df
jShake'spearej lean (from my own intimate acquaint-
ance with him) prove beyond dispute, and many
instances of the similarity df their writings rnight be
produced— 4)ut one, I trust, Will be deenled sutncient
here. The passage alluded to, is in tlie third part
of Henry the Sixth, wheiie Gloster addresses the
dying king (Act V. Sc. 6.)

«• I that haire neither pitj^, Idvc; ilor fear, ftc. &c/*

d 2 ■ Schiller

.) • «

zxvJfT

Scbiller expresses himself in a timilar mannef
ifthis Robbers^ ActL Sc. 1. Page 12.

^^ I haves great right to quarrel with Nature, and by my
honour I will nuke her my debtor. Why burden me with
this masji of deformity ? why so rigidly bestow it upon me
alone? (stamping upon the ground) Death and destruction !
Wliy on me alone ? No otiierwise than if she bad put a stop
to the formation of men at my birth !— She conspired against
me in the yerv hour of my conception. Well, then ! tluis do
1 now conspire against her for ever. — I will destroy her most
beautiful works, as I cannot claim any relationship to them. —
J will tear asunder the union of souls, since I am excluded
^bm it. She has denied to me the delightful plav of the hean»
die all persuasive eloauence of love. — Thus toen will I ex-
port my wihhes with despotic violence : thus will I extirpate
all those who seta restraint upon me, since I am not Lord***

The competitors of Schiller, in dramatic com-
MBition are,Bardn.Gdthe and Kotzebue. The trans*-
lations of the latter are too well known in this coun-
try to need any comment. His tragi-comedy of
•Count Benjcwsky is, by far, superior to all others
which have been translated. His Pizarro, is won-
derfully adapted to the English stage, and from the
Senius and judicious arrangement of Mr. Sheridant
as received such additional beauty as precludes the
possibility of considering it as a mere translation.

Any student, moderately acquainted with the
German language, will easily perceive, that the
greatest part of Baron Kotzebue's writings have
been imperfectly executed, and many of them ex-
hibited in such a mutilated state as scarcely to leave
u shadow of resemblancie between the translation and
the original. This defect is easily accounted for,
when the public is acquainted that some of the trans-
lators liave studied, not from the genuine original
copvy bjut from a spurious one s and above all, for

want

/

XXIX

want of a knowledge of the German idioms^ customs^
and manners of that nation.

before I conclude my statement on language,
I consider it as necessary to establish two points, of
the utmost consequence for the student to be ac«
quainted with, namely : who was thejirst promoter
oftlie high German language ^ and who brought it to
its purity ? — Secondly, w/iere is the best German
spoken .^—

The first man who introduced and brought to
perfection the German language, was the illustrious
author of the reformation, Martin Luther, to whom
German literature is indebted for its polish. His
translation of the Bible is indeed a master-piece. It
was he too who adopted the true idiom of that lan-
guage. This great and learned man eradicated all
tormer prevailing bad customs, and corrected also
the reigning harsh and bad dialect; which, although
not supported by the authority of antecedent wrilters,
was free from many disadvantages under which his
predecessors evidently laboured. It was a man of
his spirit and genius who alone was calculated to at'-
tempt such a revolution ; and the situation in which
he stood, rendered the success complete. The tran*
sition from one to the other custom, was not abrupt
and sudden. The ancient dialect remained the basb;
and the changes introduced by him were regular and
progressive. In his publications, prior to the Bible,
(which was his last work) the deviations from the
former bad idiom and customs, were comparatively
few i however, they increased in proportion as he
seenis to have been more convinced of the justice
of that measure, and as the public becan^e more
reconciled to the innovation.

The

stm

. ' llie uithorfty fltid example (AXjSkiti vtmt soea

followed by his friends and adherents ; and his )bml*
guage was received by all those whd embraced his
doctrines. The protestant pteachers eame firom Wit^
imberg (the pdace where Luthe* was professor) td
all parts of the German empire, and delirercd theiif
tenets in the dialect of their master. Ilius it was iti^
tyoduced into all comers of Germany, to which the!
reformation has penetrated. It even served as a
mark of distinction between the reformed and pa*
pists. The latter persevered in the old style, and
id)honred the new one, as an abominable invention
<if heresy. But it was the more cherished by theii*
opponents, and, rh process of time, not only thcr
discourses* from the pulpit, but the institutions of
youth were carried on in the same language ; till at
lafit it gained' such ascendency, that superseding all
tfee provincial dialects^ it was alone regarded as th6
proper language both for devotion. and instruction <

It was the reformation that had been the fruif
of progressive civilization and improvment in th^
German language : it was that too, which not only
enlightened mankind, but proiftoted the advance^
ment of knowledge and learning. It was as a giiidingf
star to all who were inimical to superstition, and
favourable to truth. It gave to the human mind *
more extensive scope, by counteracting igiloranccf
and delusion. The provinces, in which the reforma-'
tion was firrf received, by this advantage soon be*»
came pre-eminent to the rest of the popish countries
Iti Germany. They became the source of refinement,
and the seat of arts : and served as an example (ot
imitation to their neighbours. The language in the?
protestatit countries in Germany is aUowed to be
more pure and elegant, mofe correct and harmo^
iii#usj than other idioms in the Roman catholic pfo-

vinces i

vinces i fbr it rose in the former to that superiority,
in which we behold it at this moment, and is ra*«
pidly advancing to the zenith of its gloiy.

This is the language which, in contradiction, to
the other idioms, is termed Hochdcutsch i. e. High
German. As it has ceased to be a provincial dialect,
and is become the general language of the country,
it may justly be called the German, by way of pre-
eminence j for it has been cultivated in all quarters.
In its present state, it can no longer be called the
language of the electorate of Saxony, spoken by the
Inhabitants at large ; but there, as elsewhere, it is
confined to the higher orders. It is possessed of a
superior degree oicorrectnessy having been weeded
of aU local and provincial peculiarities.

Iq confhmation of what I have advanced. It
will perhaps be of some advantage to quote the
testimony and audiority of Professor Adelung, con-
cerpixigtucQerman language, who is beycmdall doubt
the most excellent and the most perfect authority
we can refer to. His evidence alone, in this particu-
l^Tf OH^t to be deemed peremptorily decisive and
impartial ; for he is known not to favour any dialect
111 partipularii not even the Saxon (some few in*
stances) excepted) but admires and approves tlvD
purity of the true Q^nnan pronunciation alone.
Thi^re is perhaps no dictbnaiy extant whidi is pro-
|lmbIe|tobis, as the dictionary of a native language.
This competent critic expresses himself, in the rot-
Ipwin^ tennst in his adnurable work, Lchrgcbmdc
der deutscha$Sprachey a system of the German laiv
giiage, vol. 1. page 85.

*^ The high Gerioaa». sltbguflb mare freiyijentljr spoken
|b Ae electorate of Saxony than in other province^ whidi
fiave not quite attained to that degree by which the principal

t0\fQS

• •

lownt in Aat coimtry are dittinguidied, is by no meant the
language of trade apd common people ; and therefore cannot
any longer be considered at a provincial dialect. That Ian-
cna^e, which, in oar time it adopted for writing, is no longer
umited to one oarticular proyince, as Saxony, bm b iiegene^
r^Htmptagif^iasUsuJpiliti education tkroughouiOermany***

ADVICE TO THE STUDENT.

The intention of this work will be more easily nnder^
stood by the following simple sutement :

This Analysis was ietendedtohave been published about
•ix years ago» but I was then advised bv my friends and pupils
at the universities of Oxford and Cambridge, to with-hold it
till a future period, being apprehensive tnat } qught not at
that time be sufficiently conversant withthe$lnglish idiom. But
being now fully confident, after a tedious comparison of Ian*

Eiages, that such a treatise would be fit^Iy valuable to the
gher classes of students, capable of making their own
observations, I resolved to lay it before the Public.

The n(iode which I have pursued, in selecting passages
from our best modern classical writers, is, to give as cl^raQ
idea of the peculiar manner of composition, phraseology, &c«
as possible. Until all the rules in the Analysis arq care«
fully perused, it would be impossible for the student to pro-
fit oy the latter part of the work, u €. to translate widi pro-
priety ; therefore these rules are strondy recommended to hia
attention before be commences the study of the extracts, After
having gone through the practice careniUv, he may then tal^e
up any German work, and, by the help of a good pictior
nary*, be enabled to foel the ^ense (^ the author with litd$
difficulty.

* Profassor £ber*s Dictionary in $ foLGerman and Englii^
is the best.

^STS

PREFATORY OBSERVATIONS

OH THE

GERMAN ALPHABET.

To spedt (sprcchen) is to communicate our
thoiights to others by distinct toncs.^^Language
(Sprache) possesses not only that power, but like-
Tdse the whole collection of perceptible distinct,
sounds, by which men communicate their, ideas
to each o^ther. The rules, by which this is exe-
cuted, is called Grammar (Grammatik), or the.
JPoctrine of Languages.

There are various modes of communicating
distinct sounds, not only amongst different nations,
but, at the same time, among different provinces
of one and the same nation, and even among

different ranks of society. ,

B The

2 ANALYSIS OF THE

The doctrine of language is occupied merely
with that maimer of fipeakiag, which is pradoml*
nant amongst the more civilized part of a nation,
and which is in German called tlie high German
Z)/a/^rf (dieHochdeutsche Mundart) which com-
poses the union between that of the north end
south, and which is equally intelligible tp both.

In order to communicate our thoughts to
others, we should speak in as distinct a vmanner
as possible, that we may be understood by them ;
this is the fundamental law of language.

In the higher circles throughout Germany,
flieir speech consists according to the rules esta-
blished by the best authors, and sanctioned by
the most correct taste.

Next to this, the Analogy (die Anale^le), or
the Similar Uy of Languages (die Sprachahnliehkeit),
coght to decide ; and, in conjunction with it,produce
a 'peculiar Harmony (Wholfeiut), which is ^ the
gireafest consequence in a written language; be*
cMse 'the analogy is not always without e3ic«p-
. tions, and to obtain the highest possible distinction,
we ought to attend, especially in composition, to'
tlie Etymology (Abstammung).

The rules of language must not, on the con-
tfwy, be arbitratry, biit should be extracted from
the language itself..

Lan-

O 'O Oe v^ , Uu Ue u*
O o CE oe y u Uc UQt-

OF DIPHTRONGS.

- They are produced, when the mouthy in ut-

a ■ ■

terance, passes on ifnperceptibly, and without in-
terruptioa, from one opening to another, which
are the following:

^^ (^) (W* ^^ ^ (^) .^^ oi' (oy) ui
ai (ay) au aeu ei (ey) eu oi (oy) tii

OF consona;^ts,

Tbdy are divided into different classes, ac«
Gording to the various pressures of the mouth by
which they are generally produced. One^ viz. h^
is produced by me^s of the lungs ; four^ which arc
gutturals, by means of the throat, cA, g^ y, k, (used
frequently instead of ^ or c) ; ./Si^ labials, by means of
the lips, Wy by /, (v) p, m ; five by means of the
tongue, dy /, (th) /, w, r ; and /{?Mr dentals, by
nieans of the teeth, Sy sZy Zy scL

Amongst these consonants there are som^j
which have a very similar sound, and can only
be distinguished from each other by the softnes$

or

I ■■•

f Whb respect to the three yewels^ marked with atite^
rims, it is usuaU in German fikmiCtM9»^ to fi«t inttoad of
ahc^fioal e, t&e diaHresii over each of A^m, viz. H, o, u,
Wbea either of tfaein.is proeeded hjr a oaptit ktter, tho #
if at the aide, ithna t At, Qe, Vk.

8 ANALYSIS OF fnE ■'

or harshness of their tone, and therefore are di-
vided into the following classes >

Soft.

Acute.*

Hard.

d . ,

h . .

< . it ff , . ,

• • »» » • • •
• »^ J> • • •

P
t (th)

■ f(v)
, ch

g '

' • » >» • • '

, k

s . ,

. . SZ S . .

. z

OF COMPOUND CONSONANTS.

When two of the before-mentioned conso-
nants are produced by one and the same pressure
of the mouth, and without any apparent openingf*
of it, they form compound consonants, and are
of one or of different kinds ; as

chy chSy ck — dt — jff -^ gn — kn —
j^ phj ps — schy ss, sty sz — thy tz — wrA,

3. THE USE OF LETTERS.

Before I proceed further, it will be highly
necessary to acquaint the student, how the prece-
ding (Characters are used.

- Cap^

* The acute is an intermediate sound.

f For the various articulation and pronunciation of all the
preceding classified lettprs> I refer the student to the subse-
quent analysis, or tl)e anejLed table of pronunciation*

GERMAN LANGITAOE. 9

Capitak are made use of,

1. At the beginning of each discourse;

2. -^fter a full stop;

3. .At the head of every substantive ; and

4. At the beginning of each line in poetry. '
Small letters are indiscriminately made use of,

as in all other languages.

ANALYSIS OF THE LETTERS.

$OUllD AND PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS.

A a, Ae a, E e, I i, o, Oe o, ,

Uu, Ue u, (Y y).

A a.

The sound of this vowel is exactly the same^
when longy as that of the English a in bar s
the French a in bas s the second a of the * Italian
in amare. In Spanish,* it answers, when long, to
amar / as Vater, father ; Abends evening j Adel^
nobility, &c.

When it is short, it corresponds with the
English a in glass ; the French a in bat; the a
of the Italian in ardere^ to bum ; and the Spanish
in mddir^ to add : as Mann, a man ; machen, to
make, &c. The sound of the Dutch a, in both the
above-mentioned cases, is exactly the same ; it is
long in DagCy days, and short in Kat^ a cat.

c Ae

10 ANAiYSlS OF THE

Ac a

Is pronounced like a in the English word
air s e in the Frgpch word honte ; the Italisin e in
sedia i the Spanish e in escapar^ to runaway ; and
the Dutch ae in Woerld. the world. But like the
French ^, it becomes open before an r (see e) as
trage^ idle ; urgerlichy scandalous.

E ^.

This voweU in German, is never mute ; ox-
cept, when it is joined to /, it lengthens the latter,
but loses its own sound ; and also when ^ contrac-
tion takes place, as er leht^ he lives, for er lebet.
It has four different sounds, viz. the close j the open,
or broad ; the slender 5 and the guttural, or obscure.

I. The close e possesses the primary sound by
\rhich it is known in the G^erman and other modern
alphabets. It answers to the English a in fate ;
to the sound of i in the French word veritCy truth ;
to the ^ in the Italian word diviiy I might siy ; to
tjie Spa^nish in leery- read. . The sound of the Dutch
Cy when single, is the same as in German. It
answers to the English words spelU ^elly when,
ice. ^nd when double, merely lengthens the same
sound. It is founds

1st. At the end of the concluding syllable of
a word, and in monosyllables 5 as in die Waiscy the
orphan ; der AJfb^ the monkey 9 he! ha ! or holla !
jCi ever, &c,

I. 2d.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 11

2d. Before an A 5 as die Ehre, the honor ; die
Ehcy matrimony ; stehef^^ to stand,. &c.

Exceptions. Stehleriy to steal 5 det Sef^M, ^the
command ; befehlen^ to eomtrtartd }■ ^mpfffhten,
to recommend i enfbehren^ to want ; die Kekte,
the throat ; das Mehl, tfce floWQi^. In all the
above words the e is ^pen. •

dd. £ is close before and after ih ; as in die
Betlwy the name of a plant ; das Itaiheder^ the pro-
fessor's chair.

4th. When it i? doubled, as die See, the sea;
die SeeUy the soul ^ die Arviee^ the army. It pre-
serves the same sound v^hen one of the ee^s is sup-
pressed, by the addition of a syllable containing
another e, as in See-eriy Armee-en.*

Lastly. In opposition tp the rule laid doWn for
the open e, the close e is heard in die Ceder (pron.
n.ii?r;the cedar \ j£den, Eden , dk Ege, the ha^-
row 'y die DemiUby humility ; EpheUy ivy ; ewi^y
eternal ; jedevy each ; jemahlsy eV^r ; jemandy some-
bo^jr y.jeiwry nCy nesy he, she, it or that;. Irene, Ire-
he ; die MefCy the seagull ; die Miiskeley the musket ;
die PastetCy the pasty ; Peter^ Peter ; die Regely the
(ule ; regiereriy to govern ; die Scency the scene ;
Schwede?iy Sweden ; Schlcsien^ Silesia ; die Sirene,

■ : . the

..i-.. : . ■■ ■*

I , idUl

t\.\.,.. .m ; tii .i.>« Ifc^ i- ■■' T . 'r i.

... , .» » . .. , , " »

* When two eit casdally meet, as ib hunaheu, to finish ;

. ,.. ^^ .. . 4. . .^.. .^ .

freehri^ honourted^ Hg;, (lie first; is slender, and the second follows
the general rule. ' ',

c 2

12 ANALYSIS OF THE

die Strtn ; die Taptte^ the hangibgs; die Tnmpetey
the trumpet ; wenig, little.

II. The sound of the open or broad e is simi-
lar U> that of the first EngU^ e in there ; of the
French first S in tSte, head ; of the Italian^e in mela,
apples ; of the Spanish e in negar, to deny ; of the
Dutch 6 in Uver^ liver.

1st. It takes place at the end of a syllable^
which is not the last of a word^ as in leben, to live ;
ergebeuj to surrender, &c.

2d. It retains its sound when a contraction
happens, as in ^ lebty for er lebet, he lives, &c.

3d. In words, except after an h, and in double
ee^s, in the article of the close e.

4th. E is apt to run into the open sbund before
an r, supported by another consonant) and also in
monosyllables, as in die Erde, the earth ; das Pferd^
the horse j ersty first ; der Herd^ the hearth ; das
Schxverty the sword ; werden, to become ; der Wertk,
the worth ; tverthy value -, der, the ; quer, traverse ;
wer, who ; &c.*

III. The slender, e answers to the e of the Eng-
' lish in ebb ; to the first of the French in cree s of

the

* It may not be improper to direct the atteDtton of the
•tadcDt to the differeiice of the close and the open e. The Ger«
man and English^ in general, whoie ditcnminatioa is so fine
in many other respects, too frequently confound these two
sounds. Th|B difference of tone is imiqediately perceptible to an
*far familiarized with the French and Itafian languages.

OERMAH LANGUAGE. 13

the Italian first e in vekno ; to the Spanish in tenH^
to hold I to the first e in Dutch of ^^&g[^n, situate.
This sound is found,

'1st. At the end of a short syllable, either at
the beginning or in the middle of words ; as in
ebencHj to make even ; ich Uebete, I did love ; er
lobet, he praises ; sie tobeten, they praised, &c.*

2d. Before one or two consonants it is dis-
tinctly articulated in the same syllable, as in das
Betty the bed ; ^ das Feldy the field ; die Ebbe, the
tide ; eheste, next ; Exempety example.

IV. The guttural, or obscure e, is that which
the English have in battery, and the French in re/iis.
The Italians and Spaniards have no such sound.
The second e of the Dutch in the word Edelman,
nobleman, is adequate to the German e obscure or
guttural. It is generally heard,

1st. Before the liquids, /, m, n, r ; zs in die '
Diestel, the thistle ; der Athem, the breath ; qffen,
open 5 das Messer, the knife.

2d. It remains obsciire, though one or two
other consonants should follow the liquid, as lie-
bendy loving ; tugendkqft, virtuous ; die Wissenr
schafty the science ; gelautert^ purified ; geldutertes
Gold, purified Gold.

li

* It IS fiiaqoenitly . tuppressed ; as io ReheU, hhet, U-
Uun, Which are often written and pronounced^ iUhtey lobt,
lohien.

14 AVALYSK 0# TflE

•'■•■••' ti. . '

This vowel is either long or short. When
it is long, it has the sound of the English ie in
' Jklds of the French t ingitey the den (of a hare) ;
of the Italian in the last oi finire-i of the Spanish
m deciry to say. The Dutch / has also two different
sounds like the German, It is lohg in Isabely and
short in misty dung ; and answers the ee in English,
or the i in ship, ivhip-

When it is short, it has the sound of the
English i in Jig ; of the French in ami ; of the
Italian in the first oiJirf.ire^ to finish } and in Spa-
nish of oiry \o hear.

1st It is long when th« full accent rests upon
it ; as die Fibel, the horn-book ; wider^ against :
and also when attended by. an e. in the sanae syl-
lable> which is frequently tibe case ; as dicy the ^
Liebe^lqvQ ; Pi^pzV, poetry ; Melodic^ melody, .&c. .

2d. It is long before' an A, as in ihm^ to him.;
ilviy him ; ihry you, &c.
, The i is ' short, .

1st. Whep^the i and ۥ are pronounced sepa-
rately, which happens in the declensions of the nouns
ending in ie y as die Kniey the knees, &c. and in
the conjugation of verbs, as sie schrieriy they did
cry : and also in the following words , die Histo-
rie, the history ; die Komedie, the play ;. die Lilie,
the lily 5 der Spanievy the Spaniard ; die Aticy
the air.

2d. It becomes short, when it is followed

by

' GERMAN LANGUAGE. 15

by more than one consonant; as in Dienstag,
Tuesday ; das Viertel, the quarter ; vierzc/m,
fourteen ; ich giengy I went ; ich hiengy I hung.*
In all other instances the i is short.

O

This letter may be long or short. When it
is long, it ans\yers to the English, French, Italian
^d Spanish o in robCy zone, porno, hombre \ when
short, it is like that of hot, pomme, oggi, odor.

The Dutch o has the same sound with the

German and Englisli, only with this difference, that

the accent falls invariable on it. This may be seen

in two words, viz. it agrees with open, which is

the same as in English ; but it differs In oven,

\fi)^Tt (as observed) the accent falls on the o alone,

afi making a syllable by itself, whereas in English ,

it fall^ on the ao. When oo occurs in the Dutch

language, the sound is lengthened as in German

and always pronounced as oa, in the words loan,

road, hoar.

The o is long,

1st. Chiefly when under the full accent ; as
in sogar, even ; sosehr, so much -, gewogen, ad-
dicted, &c. •

2d. Before an h ; as in ohne, without ; Ohr,
ear, &c,

Sd.

■

* la the latter instances, it would be better to omit the
f entiraljr.

16 ANALYSIS OF THE

Sd. When doubled ; as in das Moos, moss.
* It is generally short on all other occasions.

Oe 0.

Has the same pronunciation as the French eu,
in cceur^ or jeHnCy when it is long ; and like eiiy
in jeune, young, when it is short. The i in the
English words shirt and bird, have a striking simi-
larity with o. Neither the Italians nor the Spaniards
have any thing like this sound. The Dutch oe is
the same as the German o in Boer, clown ^ as hiiren^
td hear ; Konig, king, &c.

«

' U u ^

When u is long, it has the §ound of the
tEnglish 00 in mood 3 of the French ou in route s
of the Italian u in pure, of the Spanish in robusto.

When it is short, it is like 00 in good ; ou in
houle s u in palire ; and u in curbar.

The u in Dutch is always pronounced like
the German, and like the English in full ; and
when doubled lengthens the syllable -, as Uur,
hour ; Vuur, fire.

It is always long when under the full accent,
and before h, ; as der Bube, the boy ; der Buhler,
the lover.

It is short before two consonants, and on al-
most all other occasions.

Ue ii.

Is pronounced exactly like the French u in

vertu :

GERMAN tANGUAGfi. 17

loertu : as Uebely evil ; uberj over ; bemuhcjiy to
trouble; gruszen^ to salute, &c. The Dutch m/
answers the German in duit^ a copper coin. The
English, Italian and Spaniards, have no such sound.
It will be useless to attempt to give any idea of
the pronunciation of this" vowel by any English
word, for it would merely perplex the student,
and perhaps superinduce a vicious and false pro-
nunciation. To attain it exactly, recourse must
infallibly be had to a vivd voce teacher ; except
the student knows the genuine and pure pronun-
ciation of the French u in vertd, which alone, of
all European languages (the Dutch excepted) pos-
sesses any word adequate to the illustration of this
obscure sound.

rry.j*

. SOUND

Nata. The German Y considered as a vowel^ occurs only
in foreign teroois and proi>er names. It is called Ipseelon,
from the Greek u^iXof ; and the French assign to it the sound
of their i, and call it igrec. The Dutch have it in their lan-
guage^ and pronounce it as the long English t. It occurs in May,
May; Kmderey, childish play j ft/«y / fie! &c. Most of the mo-
dem German writers have expunged the antieiit spelling,
and write, thus : Mai, Kinderii, pfiit, according as it is pro-
noQDced. Most frequently the y is seen in coalition with the
rowel e, and it thus forms a diphthong, equivalent to the
Germaa d, or the long i of the English.

18 ANALYSIS OF TBfK

SOUND AND PRONUNCIATION OF THE DIPHTHONGS/

All these diphthongs, except au, oi^ (oy) and
uij have the sound of the English z in.yfr^ ; of the
French ai or aym aid, or ayeul; the Italian aj in
ajo s the Spanish at in Caiego, a name of a moun-
tain ; the Dutch ai in hair, hair. There is such a
strict analogy between the German diphthong
with those of the before-mentioned languages, that
any further observations upon them will be here
Unnecessary. Thus it must be pronounced in Kai-
^ ser. Emperor; Wayse, orphan ; Lause, lice 5 eilen, to

haste ; Feiter, fire.

Au ail.

Is pronounced like the English ow, in the
word coxc ; in the French aoute ; and au in the
Italian aura ; in the Spanish avueh, grandfather.

Oi 01.

Thi^ diphthong has the sound of oi in the

• English word boil, and occurs only in a few proper

names. In French, no such sound is to be met

with. In Italian it is to be -found in Zoilo s and

in Spanish in hoi, or hoy, to-day.

Ui ui.

It will be impossible to convey an idea of
the method of pronouncing these letters, except

by

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 19

by a circumlocutory descriptibn. The reader will
therefore remember, that they are pronounced thus :
oo in the word good, and the y articulated like ee
in the yrordfeed ; and oui in the French : in Spa-
nish cuiyo ; and cui in Italian.

ARTICULATION OF THE SIMPLE CONSONANTS,

h C, d, /, gy hyj, ky ly TTl, Uy /?, q^ Ty Sy ty Vy Wy Xy Z.

This letter is articulated the same as in all
modem languages^ and when singly pronounced,
is called bay and not be, as in English ; as Bady

9

bath y Brody bread ; haberiy to have, &c.

»

C c

The articulation of this letter is the same as t
T)efore the letters say thus : tsay y before cc of the
French pincer ,• and of the Italian zeno -y the Spa-
nish of ^^/acfo/. The Ducth c is invariably the same,
in all its branches, as in German and English.

It has this articulation before Cy ?*, yy and ay c/,
ajid^Q/i as Centnery ^ hundredweight; Cither , a
musical instrument; Cypcrriy Cypria^ Casavy Caesar;
Coliusy Coellus ; Ceyloriy Ceylon : articulate, Tsentner,
TsitheTy Tsyp^rrty TsasaVy TsuUouSy Tsiloiu

p 2 It

«>^i

* The letter h b neyer mute in Geroian, even when it
lorminates n word.

20 ANALYSIS OF THE

It is sonf)etimes articulated as a A, or the hard
Cy which is found in the English word cat ^ in the
French cadre ; in the Italian canto. It has this ar-
ticulation before the vowels a, o, n, and the diph-
thong au ; also before the consonsaits ly and r ; as
CanonCy a cannon ; Comet y a comet; Cuvy the cure ;
Causenmachery a pettifogger ; Climay the climate ;
CreuZy a cross : pronounce, kanoney komatCy kooVy
koLvsenmacher y kleemdy' kritZy with the sound of i in
Christ. .

Observation. — From the above it is evident,
that c sometimes has the force of tSy or the sharp z
of the Italian, and sometimes of k ; consequently it
may be considered as superfluous in the German
alphabet. On this account it has been expunged
by most of the modern writers, who, in lieu of it,
have adopted z and ky as occasion might require .
which is certainly allowable, since they cannot be
distinguished from each other in articulation. We
must, however, retain it in some foreign veords and
proper names, and occasionally it is necessary in the
composition of some double consonants.

D d.

This letter is articulated as in the above-men-
tioned languages ; except that in the alphabet the
Germans articulate it with the a in date — da s as
dery dicy dasj the ; DintCy ink -y Degeni sword ; die-
neriy to serve ; duy thou. There is not any variation
in the pronunciation or sound of the Dutch d from
the German.

Ff

GERMAN LAN CV age;

21

Ff.

This corresponds exactly with the letter of the
above-mentioned languages; as Fragc^ question ,
Frosty frost; Feuer, fire ; fiinfy five ; /rey/ free ;
frohy happy ; fuoco in Italian ; fuego in Spanish.
The Dutch / is the same^ in pronunciation and
sounds as the German.

Gg.

The articulation of this letter, especially when
guttural, cannot be explained by the pen, as it can
only be acquired by the instruction of an able
teacher. However, the following remarks will
serve, in some measure, to elucidate the proper ar-
ticulation of it in i;nost instances-

1st. The true articulation of this letter is the
hard one5 which is found in the English word go ;
in the French gare s in the Italian gusto s Spanish
gola. . The Dutch g corresponds exactly with the
German in all its sounds, and even in the guttural
one. In every other instance, it has the same sound
as the English g. In this manner it must be arti-
culated in the beginning of words or syllables ; as
Ctffte, gift; Geld^ money ; GitteVy grate; Goldy gold ;
Gtmsty favour ; gdhcy steep ; Gbtze^ idol ; Gutey
' bounty ; gieseuy to pour ; Geissel, hostage ; GlanZy
splendor ; Gnadcy grace ; Grufty clift ; Guinecy gui-
nea ; GypSy plaster, &c.

2d. In the middle of compound words, g is
also articulated hard, like the former ^ as hergebeny

to

Qi ANALYSIS OF THE

to hand ; gegeberiy given ; gegangen, gone, &c. The
reason is obvious ; for in that case the g is, in fact,
at the bcginnin^g^ of the second word, which forms
the con^pound, viz. ker-gebeUy ge-gebetiy gc-gan-
gen, &c. which are two distinct words united.

Sd. The letter g in the middel of a word, not
compoundy and at the end of a syllable or a word,
(if not preceded by w, or the syllable ge, prefired
to participles) has a guttural articulation, which is
peculiar to the Gerpian language, and very much
resembles ch, (see the articulation of that compoun4
consonant) as BiUigkeity equity ; bUligeUy to ap-
prove 'y Giitigkeity bounty ; Sieg^ victory ; Krieg^
war, &c,

. 4th. When g is preceded by w, it is articulated
as ngy in th^ English word^ king and ring ; gny in
the French gagne ; the Italian agneUo : as Finger,
finger; Dinge, things; Hoffnungeny hopes; longy
long ; jungy youngs &c.*

5tb. It has the same articulation, when ^^5: is
followed by n in the middle of a word, which
chiefly happens in foreign words, as in magnus,
magna, magnuniy &c. pronounced thiis, mangnus,
mangna,^ maiignum.

6th. In the word Genie, it preserves the French
articulation, viz. j in jour.

Uh

* Some gnuiimarians have asserted, that it was to be ar«
ticolated in tjlie latter case as a i^ ; but this is totally wrong.

/

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 23

// //.

When h is not mute, it has the same articula-
tion as in the English wotds handy hally &;c. which
consists in breathing forcibly before the following
vowel.

Observation. — This hard articulation is in-
compatible with the natural softness of the Italian,
Spanish, and French languages- It is true, there
is in this last an aspirated h ; but it widely differs
from the English and German aspiration ; for its
effect (according to the celebrated Abbe DoHvet)
is confined, to prevent the suppression of a vowel
before another, or the connexion of a consonant
with the following vowel. This difference has been
very properly noticed by the author of the French
Pronouncing Dictionary for the use of the English,
a work which has been highly praised by men of
the greatest eminence in French and English li-
terature.

At the beginning of words and syllables it is
invariably aspirated ; however, when it happens to
be placed between two vowels in the middle of
words, it is hardly perceptible, as in nahen^ to
approach. See.

It is mute at the end of a word ; as in fr'uhy
early ; Schiihy a shoe ; Floh^ a flea -, which are pro-
nounced, . free (with the French sound)^ shooy Jlo
(with that of the English) :but as soon as the word
increases^ it is restored, as Schuhey Fluhey &c.

It is mute, likewise, when at the beginning

of

24 ANALYSIS OF TItE

of a syllable it is preceded by r or ^ ; as Rhein, the
river Rhine, Thurm^ a steeple..

H in the Dutch corresponds with the German
and English sounds in every instance.

The consonant 7, called yot^ answers to the
English y in you ; to the French in ayeul ; to the
Italian in ajuto. In Spanish, the sound of j is quite
guttural, and consequently not applicable here;
but in Dutch, there is not any variation between
the German and English.

K k.

This letter in the alphabet is pronounced kaht
and when a double articulation is required, a c is
put before k (see ck in the sequel). The same ob-
servation applies td the Dutch k.

L L

H^s the same articulation in all languages;
as das Lamniy a lamb ; das Land, the country ; da^
Leberty life ; Liebe, love ; die Luft, the air ; /a-
chen^ to laugh ; liegen, to ' lay down ; loberiy to
praise, &c.

M m.

This letter has the same articulation as in the
above-named languages; except that it never
makes a nasal sounds as in some French words.

iSTn

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 25

N n.

Has also the same articulation as in the above-
mentioned languages; but with a before g?iy it
makes the French nasal sound of en in encore^ as
ia gegangen^ gone ; and gn are articulated as in
poignmit, gag?ie, and bagno.

Pp.

Has the same articulation as in the above-men-
tioned languages ; except that in the German al-
phabet it is articulated with the a oi fate, pa ; as
Ptst^ pestilence ; Person, a person ; Post, post ;
Priester, a priest.

' • Called in German koo, is always followed by Uy
with which it is articulated ; as gu, in the English
quadrant ; in the French equaieur ; in the Italian
qiid; in Spanish quadrar. The Dutch q is exactly
similar to the German, when it meets an a or an o,
as die 2naal^ the torment ; der Quotknty the quo-
tient, &c. But when it meets with a^ e, or 2, it
has the articulation and sound of the French qu in
questeur, and cu in eaielle, a porringer ; as die Qua-
ker, the Quakers ; die Quelle, the source ; die Quitiey
a quince.

R r.

This letter, which the Germans call er, has
die samie articulation as in the English word i^obe,
or (in which its articulation is not curtailed) as in

E garden

I

36 AVAI^TSiS OF THX

garden. The other languages adhere strictly to
the German articulation.

Sf, s*. .

The r is articuUted the same «8 in all the be-

fore^mentioned famguages^ as sound, English ; safny

French ; sonoy Italian -, ser^ Spanish ; sabel, Dutch :

except when it is followed by a consonant, in which

case it is articulated as sk/inskare s chin ckevals

SCf in scemare : ^s in der Spdss, the jest ; stehen, to

^tand ; der Stein, the stone ; rfer Slave, the Scla-

vonian j der Smaragd, the emerald ; der Sciave, the

slave ', derScudo, an Italian coin; der Durst, the

thirst ; die Biirste, the brush -, die Gerst^, the barley ;

garstig, nasty, &c. However, in the second person

of some verbs, and at the (Bn4 of superlatives io ste^

the st preserves the articulation it has in stfle, stilo.

Thusi it must be articulated in du wirsf^ thou bo-

icomest ; du warest, thou wast \ du lehrest, thou

teachest -, der erste, the first \ der Schxverste, the

heaviest.

Tt.

Is pronounced ta, with the sbund of a in fate.
It has the same articulation as in the above-men-
tioned languages; except before i the Germans add
to the articulation of the t that of s, in the words

sound,

m ' — —————— ■■■ fi

* The small s has the tame power ds airy other s, and is
never found l>ut in the middle of compoimd words^ and a^
ways at flie end.

ik'

^(Mnd, English ; sain, French ; sano, Italian : as
Nation^ naitioxi ; Portion, portion. In this manner
the Italians articulate it in natione, gratia, &c. but
if an s precedes the t, it preserves its single arti^
eolation^ as in qucestio.

Called ybtt>> has the same force as the English^
Freii€b> Italian, and Spanish/, llie same sound
aad pronunciation of the Dutch v, as the German t;.^

W w.

This letter has the same articulation with all
the above*mentioned languages i but is never mute
in either,' as in the English, as write, wrested, wrists
&c« It resembles the v of the French, in valeur ^
the Italian in valore. The Dutch w corresponds
in articulation and sound exactly with the German^
and is never mute.

The souAd of the German v) seems to be be-
tween the i) and w of the English ; as das Wasser^
the water 5 det Weg, the way, &c.

This letter is called ix, and is articulated ks%
in like manner with the English and French in expe-

E 2 dition.

w. , — . • » ■ .■ — ■ ■ ' ■ ■'

^ * Between two vowels or diphthoags^ by some it is articu-
lated BBV } as ia it^ Frevel, the cricne ; >jier Stuver, a German
coin ; der Selfive, the shve : but tbii mcUiod is ot>jectiQn»ble«

28 ANALYSIS OF TH^

dition, I have never met witli this articulation eithef
in Italian or in Spanish. The Italians, who wish
to obtain it, must articulate at the same time their
c in corCf and their s in sano - cs, I represent this
articulation by cs^ because they use neither k nor x.
The Dutch x is now very little used, except in such
words as arc taken from the Greek and other lan-
guages. The same sound can be produced in Dutch
by ks and kz, viz. bliksem^ or blikzem, which used to
be written blixerriy lightning. Examples, with the ks
above, as in Axt^ the axe ^ die Hexc^ the witch ^
das Exempely the example. Pronounced, Aksty
Jlckse, Eksempd.

Y y (considered as a consonant).

Is called ipsiloiiy and is merely a substitute for
the short Germari /. Modern writers very seldom
use it, except in the word seyny to be, in order to
distinguish it from the pronoun seiuy his.r In this,
or any other words wherein it may be found, it has
the sound of/, in the English ^;?e; of a?/, or diy in
the French ayeuU or dieid. The Dutch y is also a
substitute for i.

% z.

Called. /A'rf, and is invariably articulated ts.
This is precisely the articulation of the Italian Zj
or zzy in diligentay nozze. Ex. gr. Zeity time ;
Zoruy anger ; Zinriy tin ; zitterriy to tremble ; zu-
fiehmetiy to increase, &c. Uttered thus : tseit^ tsom, •
tsinn, tsitiern, tsunehmen.

ARTI-

G£RMAN LANGUAGE. 29

ARTICULATION OF THE COMfOUND CONSONANTS,

cky chsy ck, dt, ff^ giiy ku^ pfy plh ps, sch, ss^ sf,

sz, thy tZy wr.

ch.

1. In the beginning of a word, whether fol-
lowed by a consonant or a vowel, is articulated
as in the English word character; the French chaos;
the Italian chiodo. The Dutch is the same as the
German ; as Christy Christ ; Chor, chorus ; Chri-
stinaj Christina ; Character, character, &c. ; pro-
Boiinced Krist, Kor, Kristiiia, Karacter.

2. If ch be followed by the consonant 5*, it
takes the articulation of the t, in the English word
expulsiaUy and the French extase. The Italians, who
have no z, obtain this articulation, in uttering, at
the same time, their c in €o?r, and their s in sono.
Ex. gr.

Achsdy shoulder : articulate axel.

Ochsy an ox , - - - - - ox.

sechsy six; - - - - - - sex.

. FlachSy,QBX^ - - . . . ^ax.

But when they accidentally meet, as is some-
times the case, in compound words, or by the
elision of a vowel, as in zvachsaniy vigilant ; nach^
seheuy to connive at y des BuchSy of the book^ for
cUs Buches ; dps JLochSy of the bole, for des Loclies 5
jffr sprachsy he said it, for er sprach es ; the cJi ^od s

must

must be articulated sepacai€ly> accoi^ding tb ttleif
peculiar rules.

3. In the middle, and at the end of words,
sifter the vowels a^ o, u^ ^nd aU, ch h guttursd, a^
in ach ! alas ! Dachy roof ; nochy yet ; das Buchi
the book ; der Straucky the shrub, &c. This arti-
culation is the same as the Scotch have in loch j
the Irish in the gk of bugh. Xh^ c, or th in the
IVelch language^ has also a similar sound. There
are two letters in the Spanish language which are
adequate to the sound, namely, the j, in the words
jugar, to play ; jurat y to swear ; lejos, far 5 and the
X in exercicioy exercise ; dexavy lievc.

4. After any other vowel or diphthong, cA has
the palatic articulation, which is explained (see the
consonant g). Thus it is articulated in Hechty a
pike y Lichty light \ die Ddcher, the roofs ; die
LocheVy the holes ; die Bikheri the books 3 die
Strduche, the shrubs.*^

a /

cL

The Jetterc before k, forms the compound cfc^
which is . articulated like two MV, each of which
must be heard distinctly s as backen^ to back ^ ha*
ckejiy to hack« &c. } articulated bakkeus hakken.

de.

^^^^-*— *— -*^ .>■- 1^ lifc. *•■«->., -:* • ...,-,, ^ e - ^ ^ . • ■

* t'e^tr (if any) weirds begifaning with cb, are pure Ger-
tndtt. tliej genttaUy retaib the articuladon ot their origimif
lenguagev

GSKMAK LAMGUAGC. tl

/ *

V

dt.

Is articulated a$ a single t^ but written 4ti \n
order to distinguish some particular words i as tod,
^ead^ from der Todt, the death ; statt^ place, for
die Stadt, a city, &c.

When the letters gn follow each other, at the
beganmngofa word, they have not, as some pre*
tend, a&asQl articulation, bvtmust'be articulated
9$ ^, iathe French gnmie^ gnomidtj gnostiques^Sicl
as JGnadij mercy • gndcb'g, gracious, ^c.

'Rie same observation -applies to kny which is
pot nasal; though it appears to be so, if not properly
explained by a teacher well skilled in the German
prominciation. It must be articulated as qucriy in
the French word quenouilley in dropping the mute
(T, which leaves only the articulation of a A: before n;
las Knabf, ii^boy ; Knic, knee ; &c.

■pf-

TOie letters J5f have been unjustly complainedt
jrf for their harshness of ^sound ; but they may be
isasily attained by articulating the p before / ; as
Pfundf a pound ; PJird, a horse; ffropfen^ to graft.

ph.

I3 lironoimced the ^me as in -English, French,
and other langu^es^ for it is a mere /i s^sPfiiloso-

phiCf philosophy, &c.

ps.

n

.ANALYSIS OF THE

Is articulated as in the Fpench words, psawne,
psahnodie ; wherein the p is articulated before $y as
PsahUy the psalm. The English suppress the /), and
the Italians do not use it.

sch.

Is articulated the same as sh, in shore ; ch, in
(heval; and se, in scemare. In some provinqes oi
Qermany they write and pronounce the following
words, ^sSchlavj slave*; Sclaverei/y slavery, &c.
thus : SklQVy Sklaverey ; articulating the k before /.
The former practice is ho^^ever preferable, the
Jatter being very rarely allowed, except in the
word SklaVy and its derivatives, pronounced Sklaf^

Is preserved in writing and printing, in order
to prolong the pronunciation, but the h is never
aspirated as in English : the t only is articulated,
and the h is silent ; as Muth^ courage ; Thaty a
clee^ i rothy red ; thwiy to act ; Reichthum, riches,
i&c. .Most of the modern writers have adopted
the custom of omitting the h in those German
words where it seemed to be superfluous.

* It may. be observed, that the word Slave applies to
the people called Sclavonians.

GfiRMAir LANCt;A<SB« S^

tz.

The letter t is often prefixed to a single ^, In
order to double its sqund, as in setzeuy to scat,- &c.
but this should never happen, except after a votvet
or a diphthongs being entirely useless after a con-
sonant, as in Herz^ heart, which would be wrong
spelt thus. Hertz.

tor.

Occurs but in one or two proper names, as
Wriseriy Wrisberg. The pronunciation is per-
formed by the insertion of a very short e between
w and r ; as Werisberg, a mountain ; fVcrisen, ai>
environ or circuit.

REMARKS ON THE DOUBLE CONSONANTS.

The letter b being seldom doubled, it occurs
but in a few words i as die Ebbe, the tide ; die
JRibbe^ a rib ; and few more derived from other
languages. They must be sounded distinctly.

- The same may be said of the letter d, when
followed by a vowel ; but this is found only in the
word WiddcTy a ram, and its derivatives.

The letter/ is frequently doubled, and is ar*
ticulated as in the English word difficidt ; the French
difficile; the Italian difficile. The Dutch- is like
tfai^ German.

In ancient writings, the letter t is frequently
affixed to %4ouble^, thus.^. The best modern

F autho«

S6

ANALYSIS OF THE

A TABLE, EXHIBITING, IN ONE VIEW, THE

VOWELS.

German.

English.

^ ^' \short, . - ^

Vater - -
Mann - -

bar - - •
glass - - -

Ae a, ----- -

^rgerlich -

f«tc - - -

C close, ...

E e, -J open or broad, '
(^ slender,' - -

Wayse - -
Itfben- - -
lobet- . -

fate - •• 1
ebb . - -

I ; ilong,' - - -
^ \ sliort, - - -

Febel- - -
Knee- - -

field- - -
f/g . ,- .

O 0, long,^ - - -

S{?gar- - -

robe - • '

//i fl/Z other position

s it is short.

•

Oe 6, - - - . - .

Konig - -

sh/rt - - -

* \ short, - - -

*

m

Bwbe- - .
brwmmen -

mood - -
good - - -

Ue ii, -

gmszen - -

VHHi^

Y y. See the consonant y.

-

DIPHTHONGS.

ai, ay, ei, ey, eu, aeu or au.

Kaiser - .

ft re - ^ -

au, - - - - - - -

Juge^ •» -

cow - - -

oi, ...... .

B(?2tzenburg ^

hoil - - .

ui, ------ -

see w- - •

ooy - - -

ARTICULATION OF THE SIMPLE CDNSONANTS.

b, has the sdme articulation in all the otjier languages.

( like tsa, - -
^' I like kr ' -

Centner- -
Canone • -

tsai/ -
car -

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

37

HTHOLE ORGANIZATION OF THE ALPHABET.

\Dutch.

Ftfbel • -

K^t - . -

Wflereld- -

edik - - -

lever . . -

gelegen - -

/sabel • •

mist - - .

^en - - •

# •

Uur - - -

^ffer - - -

Hazr- -

hoo/ - -
Auit - -

French.

bas - - -

bal - - -

bont^ - -

vente - -

tttt - -• .

cr^e - - -

g/te. . .

am/ - - •

z(?ne - - -

Cedcrboom -^
Choor '^ •

0W2 - •

pincer
cadre

c^ur- - -

rowle- - •
bowle - -

verted

Italian. '

am^zre - •

ardere - -

sedia- • -

dim - - -

mda - - -

vejeno - *

finzre- - -

finire- - -

pomo - -

pz^re-
p?dire

ajo
aicTdi
zoilo
cut

«eno-
canto

Spanish.

amar
anadir

cscapar

leer

ncgar

tcnir

deczr
oir

h(?mbre

robwsto
C2/rbar

catego
avouelo
hoi, hoi/
cuiyo

;telador

3«

AHAXTSIS X>F tn

• \ German, j English.

4d, and f, anp iAtf ^atti^ in ail the other languages.

Gold- . - 1 gold - - •
Biili^kfiit - I see eft • -

'f hard, • - • -
^^ t guttural. - * -

h, the same

/och - - •

JA5U - - -

k, I3 iHj n, p^ q, r, s, t^ aZ^ these sounds nure synonymous
in all languages.

V, lik^i, - -

w, - - . -

X, like ks, . -

y> - - - -

Fater - -

Heire- - •

se^ - - -

Z^it - - -

/ather - -
zomt - - •
eicamplc- -
6ne - - , -
^^eit - - -

ARTICULATION OF THE COMPOUND CONSONANTS,

• - ■• ■*

{ likek^ -
cb, < like X, -

( guttural^ - -

ck^ like double kk, -» •
dt, like a single t, - •

gn, tfnrf kn, - . . ^
pf, artieylate p ^^rtf f
ph, like f, ^. - . -
ps, articulate^ before^
sch, //^e sh, - - - -

arist . .
\Ochs - - -

acA ! - - -

bacfen ^ - I
Torf^ .- - •

Gnzdit 5 Xnabe

P/und - -
PAilosoj&Aie
f^^lm - -
SchlaS . • -

cAaracter -
expulsion •

Philosophy •

^^Aore- - •

th, /if^r a single t, • - | MuM -

The onfy use vf Hie h.is to lengthen tfke syllabte;- *

GBUMAN LANGtrAGY.

s»

Dutch.

Cod. . .

rear. • -

French^

gZTt-

Italian^

ga^o - ,-

Spanis/u

^erfa

zT/exd -

Wrok - -

raleur - -

bli^^em - -

e^rpedition-

Fawn . -

ayeul - -

^bra • -

/^ • ' •

»

CAristus - -

c/iao9 - -

„^..^

eiTtase - -

a/uto*- -

I'alore -

{

gnome -
j'Me/zouille

diligen^a -

€kiodo

J^S^^

•.

tcAeval - -

^cemare -

40 AKALYStfT Otr tag

t ■ ' « ■

CHAPTER 11.
ty the Formation of Speech.

Having sufficiently analysed each character^
separately in the German alphabet, I shall now
proceed to treat of the force of each of theix^
when conjoined. '

1. Syllables.

A syllable is formed by uniting together
a certain ' number of individual signs, among
which there must indispensably be, one single
vozvely or diphthong. These characters, when
pronounced, produce an' intelligible sound, which
is enunciated by means of a single opening of the
mouth.

2. Words y and their Derivation.

Words are articulate sounds, used by common
consent, as signs of our ideas, and contain as many
Syllables as there are vowels or diphthongs com-
prized in them. Words of one syllable are called
monosyllables ; those of two syllables, dissyllables /
words of three syllables, trisyllables > ^nd words
of four or more, polysyllables. The monosyl-
lables are to be considered, in the German lan-
guage, as original or radical words ; but the p^
lysyllables are formed in three different ways : 1. By
means^ of (Biegung) inflexion, as des Manw^s, of

the

GERMAN LAKGXJAGB* 4l^

tiie man ; der Weic/irC^ {the) soft ; fest^er^ fester \
Ue-ben, to love ; ich lie-be, I love, &c. 2. By means
oi (AbleiiungJ derivation; and 3, By means of
fZusammensetzungJ composition.

It will, however, be superfluous to dwell any
longer on a subject, which would only bewilder
the student in perusing this work. Suffice it, fof
tbe present, to observe, that language, among rude
and illiterate people, possesses a certain degree of
roughness and want of consistency ; but a3 they
become more reined, by the influx of n^w maA-
nfrs, ideas, and modes of thinking, then also their
language becomes regular and improved. From
hence it happens, that the deep vpw^ls gradually
pass on to the next higher ones, and the broad an4
rifugh diphthongs into the softer ones.

3. Bj/ Composition or Junction,

With respect to the formation of compound
words I ^hall \)e very brief. I introduced the forin^i^
^d this subject merely as preliuiin^ry to the sequel
(see the formation of substantives), and as being
nefifissary to exhibit the progression of speech,

If two words be united into one, there ensues
acomposition, or a compound word. This junction
is done for the sake of assisting the ideas, which
OQ simple word cap express, The word to which

«k

JkMAJLJSU OV

tttODtioo dioiild be dcmB, mAc rmdkai
alwifs stands bduod. *

CH^UTTR nL
Of the AccaU or Torn qfW^rds.

Ha* ing suffidesdv dwell upon die artkmla&Mi
of single cliaractersy their formation into sjlhblesy
and single and compound words^ the next dmig
to be considered is^ the relation diey bear to each
odier^ and the power with which diey are pfo*
nounced.

Every thing, in the German pronunciation,
as well as in other modern languages, depends on
the accent, /. e. the peculiar empliasis which sjl«
tables require, in order to pronounce the words
with correctness.

It seems, that every modem language has a
kind of predilection for its accent. The rules which
I am about to lay down on that head, as fiu^ as
they relate to the subject, may be cmisidered hf
the student as decisive, and the true criterion.
It must, however, be observed, that it is fl^t ray
intention here to give % foU description and ex*

plana-

* This i$ mexdy applicaUe to wor^^ hu,% na^ tp ^l|9^q|
Of sounds, I because the two latter dgijtot^i^ a ckear^ Igpijt
merely an obscnre idea^ whereas words' are expros^oof of i
eattin deterounate rcpresentationt

6EltitfA# LAK6irAdft» 4i

fflftustiofl Sf the Germah mf?/^ or the mteha^
lik^ pail of Gerrtttri versification: I shall in-
tf^ttee fh^ object, only^ As far as it is nece9*
laHly cohnected with the former instructions*
The stfb*4quent rules, therefWe, will be quit4&
wflSdefjt for the sttid*ht, wh(^ Irishes to aequir*
flie gertditt* prirKriples of c<Jtrect f>rot[u<!eiitiori»
Itiih regard to iht other part, which reffers t6 thtf
Ungfky shortness, or quantity of syllatJes (of whic!i
I shall treat distinctly under the head of Gerttaifi^
prosody), it ought not to be confouaded with the
present subject.

GENERAL STANDARD

FOR TXB

GERMAN ACCENT.

•

According to the most celebrated modern
German grammarians (especially professor Gott*^
iched and Adelung), they have adopted as a stand*
. ffi aAd g<fnferal ftJiS, that the accent in German
is mostly placed on the tadieal syllable ^ constf*
(JMBMly ** auxiliary ^llabl^, which Hre to be
fottfld at flie beginning or the end of a word, aro
Aevef accented.

However ingenious and satisfactory this as-
sertion may appear to the philological mihd, and
however this noUon may be fully confirmed by

G 2 a strict

4$ JlNAtYSXS O? TBS

t^ attention shoiikl be drawn, is the radical one^
and always stand* behind. •

CHAPTER IIL

ft

0/ tfic Accent or Tqw qf Wordfi.

Having sufficiently dwelt upon the articulation
of single characters, their formation into syllables,
and single and compound words, the next thi^ig
to be considered is, the relation they bear to each
other, and the power with which they are J)ro*
nounced.

Every thing, in the German pronunciation,
as well as in other modern languages, depends on
the accent, t e. the peculiar emphasis which syl-
lables require, in order to pronounce the wordsr
with correctness.

. It seems, that every modern language has a
kind of predilection for its accent. The rules which
I am about to lay down on that head, as far a$
they relate to the subject, may be eoDsidered by
the student as decisive, and the true criterion.
It must, however, be observed, that it is n'et mv:
intention here to give a foil description and ex-

^ ^ plana-

*«w*

I > ii / n^>»^i»<»w»— w*«iyy^^;»*yyy I* . i» f * . i > 1 1 j ' l ^p * \, ' ^ ^i,X '

* This U mereljr appllcahlfs to ivot:^^ hu% |ao( J4) «;^|)^ef^
0J8 souDds^s because the two latter d9ixot£;iye a clear| l^jt
noerely an obscure idea^ whereas words' 9re expressions of a'
<!trt^in determinate represeotatioa.

GBRM AN LANGUAGE. 4$

Sd. When, they are doubled i as : das MaSlf
the marque ; die See, the lake;- das Me?r, the sea;
der Kleiy clover, &c.

4th« In the diphthongs; as, rauscheUy to

make a noise ; sch7esze?i, to shoot ; biiszen, to
si^r. Sec.

5th. In words which may be lengthened, and
jvhere the vowels are followed by one single con-
sonant; as, der Schzvan, the swain; dieGlSfy live
Coal ; der Ton, the tune ; das Bluty the blood, &c,

6th, Before sz, as, der Fusz, the foot; grdsz^
great; susz^ sweet, &c.

The vowels are short, '

1st. At the end of words (when single) of
more than one syllable ; as, die Liebe, love ; er
lebcy may he live; die Kiiltey the cold; Galle,
"bile ; der Uhuy a screech owl.

^d. In those monosyllables, which are not
capable of being lengthened in their termination ;
as, aUy^ waSy deSy and some other particles.

The following are exceptions to the former ;
as, nUUy now ; thurty to perform ; er thiit, he per*
forms ; die BrUty the breed.

3d. At the end of words of two or more syl-
labi^, of which the first is long, although finishing
by a consonant ; as : abery but ; JapaUy Japan ;
gelobty praised; der Haber^ oats ; bebeuy to trem*
ble ; die Ader, a vein ; ein Liebhahery a lover ; he-^
ieny to lift up ; bezahlen, to pay.

4th.

M AKALTits or rm

4th. Before 1 double eonsontat; ai^ ^H^Jen^
to labour $ nhmen^ to luime; tkr BRk, the look |
hSsseny to hate ; . verbannen, to bani^ ; die Stitdi^
^ city.

ON LENGTH AND BREVITY OF COMPOtTND PAftTl«

CLBS AND FOREION WORDS.

1st. In compound word^ of two syllables^^ thi
fifst is generally long.

2d. The particles ab^ an, aufj aus, b^y dar,
durch, etfiy Jiir, her^ hin, mity nack, ufrty vtm, vor,
xvegy zceily zifilly zu, which enter in the composition
of substantives or verbs, ,<pre always hng^ either
When prefixed or affixed.

3d, The terminations ^, tly thi^ em, en^ tr^
tfrty est 9 and ety in words of more than one syl*
fetble, are always short i as : die lAebt^ krtre ; det
Eselj an ass ; mangeltiy tO be in want ; meir^hft^
mine ; redeUy to speak ; Vatery fether ; iirgemy
to be angry ; du ikatest^ thoa pcrformest j iht sagft,
you said.

4th. The insepafrable prefixes are always short;
as, be, empfy enty rr, gey nrtiy very zer.

5th. The terminations, bar y haft, tfeiti /«, keit,
teirty h'chy misXy saly saniy schaffy thurity and ter^y are
shorty when preceded by a long syllable, in a word
©f ftt;67 syllables ; on the other hand, the same ai^
longy when found after a short syllable, in a word
of three syllables.

6th. It sometimes happens, that in compound

sub-

GSRMAir LAKGUAGt* 4f

silbrtanttres tiic last part of the cmnpound xfFord
18^ longf wlien pronounced separately ; but when*
evac united with another word, it is always short,
whether in its previous state of disjunction it was
brief or long ; as. Hand and Schlag, which are
long by themselves, but become short in Hand*
schlag, a clap with the band, or Handsckuh, a
glove, &c. For the true de6nitian of compound
■words, together with their manner of being formed,
relative circumstances, &c. the reader is referred to
the formation of compound words,

7th. In the last syllable of foreign words the
accent is at the end, as NafMr, nature ; org3n, or«
gan, HomBr^ Homer, lloriz,, Horacei 9^(^,

8th. The articles before the substaiUivea, and
the pronouns before the verbs, are short, when fol-
lowed by a long syllable ; but they become &;^;^
when followed by a short syllable ; as, d^r Mann,
the Husband ; dte Frau^ the wife ; das KIthI, the
child ; dn Girichti, the just ; die GHlelHe, the be-
loved J dSs G^baude, .the building \ die Verjiuehten,
the cursed -, tch Itebe, I love ; dii hassest, thou
hatest ; ^r betsset, he bites ; dU beldhnest, thou re-»
compensest' ; er g?nleszt, he enjoys ; wJr verder^
ben, we perish ; Vir gewtnnet, you gain ; sie be^
gihren, thpy^dcmandL

It is unnecessary to make wy furtljey repfiarks
on this subject at present ; the following practice
will enable the student to become, intimately ac-»
Quainted with thq subject. The fir§t practice %

I

45 ANALTSIS OF TR^

have marked with the accents i as for the r^Ap
I have left it to the student to supply them^ ac-
cording to the rules prescribed in the preceding*

Freiind ! versaumc nicht zn leben,
Denn die Jahre fliehn, ^
Und es wird der Saft dcr Rcben •
Uns night lange bliihn,

Lach der Aerzt' iind ihrer Rankc :
T5dt iind Kjrankheit laurt,
Wenn man bey dcm FroschgctrankS^
Seine Zeit vertratirt.

Mosler^ Wein, der Sorgenbrccherj
Schaft gesundes Bliit.
Trinkt aiis dem bekranztSn Becher .
Gliick iind frohen Mfith !

f

So ! noeh eins — siebst du Lyaen
Und die FreudS nun ?
Bald wirst du aiich Am6m schfti,
Und aiif Rosen rtihn.

^i«

(
\

MUMA* LAKGtTA^B, 49

DIE KATZE, DIE ALTE MAUS, DIE

JUN6E MaUS-

KATZE.

Du allerliebstes kleines Thier !
Komm doch eln wenig her zu mif.
Jcb bia dir gar zu gut. Komm, dasz ich 4i^

nur kiisse.

\

ALTE MAUS.

i[ch nUhe ^ix$^ Kind^. gehe nicht !

KATZEii

&> komm doch ! Siehe^ diese Niisse

4Sin4 i^e dain^ wenn ic^ dich einmal kGsse^

JUKGE MAUS.

O Mvtter. faore doch. y^ic sie so freundJ&ch

spriest 5
Jch geh. . , , . .

...

ALTE MAUS.

Kind^ gehe nicht.

• KATZE.

Auch dieses Zackerbrod, i^nd aAdre sphione Sa-

chen,
Geb ich dir^ wenn du kommst.

H JUNCE

fio

ANALYSIS or msf

f •

JUNGE MAPS.

Was soli ich ro^chen ?
O Mutter, lasz mich gehn.

ALTE MAirs.

Kind, sag' ich, gehe nicht !

JUNGE MAVS.

Was wird sie mir denn thun ? — Welch chrii-

ches Gcsicht ?

KATZE.

Komm, kleines Narrchen, komm!

JUNGE MAUS.

Ach M^tt^, hilf ! ach weh !
Sie wiirgt mich : ^ch ! die Garstige !

ALTE MAUS.

Kun ists zu spSt, nun dich das Ungliick schoix

betrofFen, '

'\V^er sich nicht rathen laszt, hat HUlfe nicht zu

h9fFen.

germanI'languaoe; 5 1

^UMs.

SECTION THE SECOND.

Of WORDS AS PARTS OF SPEECH, AND THEttt

JLEXIONS.

CHAPTER. I.

A getieral Vietv of them^

Words may be considered as perspicuous and
distinct archetypes of our ideas^ and these are either
obscure or clear ; such also are our expressions or
words, which aire divided into two very unequal
classes, namely, into interjections, which repre-
sent our most obscure representations ; and, in a
narrower sense, into words. The first are the foun-
dations of the latter ; but, by themselves j can only
constitute a very imperfect language.

Our clear representations relate to existing
objects by themselves, or to such as may be counted,
x>x are perceptible. The first arc called substances^
the latter accidents or modes of being.

We cannot conceive an object at once, with
all its attributesi but must separate its qualities one
fromanothen Thus, the idea of " a young, handsome,
and virtuous girl," cannot be conceived at once.

H 2 We

6t' AJfAtYSIS OFv.ttti.

We mast apprehend young, handsome, and virtuoiuf^
and ^object itself, separate and distinctly i sitet
which we consider them as appertaim*ng to the*
existing substance. Consequently^ as young, hand^
some, and virtuous, canhot exist by themselves^
b^t refer to other objects, they niay be very
justly considered as accidents^ or modes of being.
Our thoughts, and speech consist, therefore, in
joinings to a substance certain peculiar attributeg
or accidents.

The substance to which something else 16
united, is called the subject; and that which is af-
firmed or denied of it, the predicate. The word,
by which the two parts are connected, is called
the copula ; and the whole together is denominated
a period, or sentence. ' '

The affirmations or negations of an object are;-
generally speaking, of two kinds ; that is, either
existing in the object itself, as a quality, or ex-
ternally, as an accident, or aitrihute. Each of
these we can represent to ourselves, in dififerenl
manners, either by itself, without the substance,
as roth, red ; schbn, handsome j or connected with
it, as eine sckone rothe Rose, a handsome red rose ^
or, lastly, with Sn intention of application, die
Rose rbthet^ the ro^ reddens -, i. e. die Rose wirdl
roth, the rose gets red, &c.

In proportion as words express the different
kinds of representations in the chain of our ideas^
or express them in a period or sentence, they ai*c

^ called

germanI'languaoe; 51

■^AtB

SECTION THE SECOND.

Oi WORDS AS PARTS OF SPEECH, AND THEItt

i-LEXIONS.

CHAPTER. I.

A gaieral Vieto of therm

Words may be considered as perspicuous and
iJistinct archetypes of our ideas, and these are either
(Ascurp or clear ; such also are our expressions or
words, which aire divided into two very unequal
classes, namely> into interjections, which repre-
sent our most obscure representations ; and, in a
narrower sense, into words. The first are the foun-
dations of the latter ; but, by themselves j can only
constitute a very imperfect language.

Our clear representations relate to existing
objects by themselves, or to such as may be counted,
t)r are perceptible. The first arc called substanceSi
the latter accidents or modes of being.

We cannot conceive an object at once, with
all its attributesi but must separate its qualities one
iromanothen Thus, the idea of " a young, handsome,
and yirtuous ^irl," cannot be conceived at once.

H 2 We

6t^ AJfAtYsis oy.Ttti.

We mast apprehend young, handsome, and virtuoufg
and iitiQ object itself, separate and distinctly j aftet
which we consider them as appertaining to the-
existing substance. Consequently^ as young, hand^
some, and virtuous, canhot exist by themselves^
but refer to other objects, they niay be .very
justly considered as accidents^ or modes of being.
Our thoughts . and speech consist, therefore, in
joinings to a substance certain peculiar attribute*
or accidents.

The substance to which something else is
united, is called the subject; and that which is af-
firmed or denied of it, the predicate • The word,
by which the two parts are connected, is called
the copula / and the whole together is denominated
a period, or sentence. ' '

The affirmations or negations of an object are;
generally speaking, of two kinds ; that is, eithef
existing in the object itself, as a quality, or ex-
ternally, as an accident, or atti^ibute. Each of
these we can represent to ourselves, in dififerenl
manners, either by itself, without the substance,
as roth, red ; schSn, handsome ; or connected with
it, as eine sckone rothd Rose, a handsome red rose ^
or, lastly, with Sn intention of application, die
Rose rotket) the ro^ reddens 5 i. e. die Rose mrdl
roth, the rose gets red, &c.

In proportion as words express the different
kinds of representations in the chain of our idea»^
or express them in a period or sentence, they afe

^ called

GErRHAH LAIIOUAGE. SJ.

CftUed parts qf speech y of which the Gerraatn Ian-
ipiage contains the following*

rti*

CHAPTER IL

O^ THE SUBSTAKtIVES.

1. Tlieir various Kinds:

Substantives are names of objects, existing
bjr themselves, or such things as can be enumerated.
These objects either necessarily exist by themselves ;
as, Menschj man / Baum, tree ; Haus, house ; or
fliey do nbt exist at all, but are merely ideal, as
Scfion/ieitj beauty 3 Grosser greatness ; Bitterkeif,
bitterness ; which have always a reference to othet
objects. The first are called concretes, and the
latter abstracts. The concrete substantives arc again
subdivided into

1st. Proper names^ which represent an indi-
vidual object, as London, Frankreich, Plato, &c.

2d* Appellatives, which denote a number c^
single objects by one common sign 5 as, Bawn, tree;
Haus, house 5 Thier, animal ; Stern, star, &c.

3d. Collectives, which denote many objects; as^
VoUcy people ; Mehl, flower 5 Sand, sand ; Korn^
com ; Ohsti fhiit^ &c. and,

4th^ Materials, which denote merely the. mat*
ter, as Eiseni iron ; Metall, metel 3 Wasser, wa?
X^r\Wdn^yfvx^y Bier, beer^ Stein^ ^ion^ -, Ilt^lz,
wood, &c.

Cene^

S4 ANALYSIS 6f tm

Generic terms comi^nzc, in all language^, this
inost abundant part of substantives. However^ as
they are derived from a single sign, as bird, an
animal that flies ; tree, an elevated vegetable ; they
consequently may be applied to many more similar
objects. As we should find great difficulty in dis-
covering which single object of the whole genus
in particular is meant, the articles are here made
use of to distinguish the object alluded to, from
all others possessing any verisimilitude.

Abstracts represent something connected with
another object, yet appearing to exist by itself, /. e.
they denote the accidents, or modes of beings as
substantial, viz.

1st. Aqualihf ; as, Grosse, greatness ; Schon*
heit,' beauty -, Schdrfe^ sharpness, &c.

2d- Situation j as^ Armuth, poverty ; Jugendf
youth ; Beichthunty riches, &c.

3d* An action; as, die Betrachtimg, contem-
plation J Begegnungi meeting ; der Sprung, the
leap 5 J5f/r2^^, deceit, &c.-— So are a certain kind
of abstract-collectives, called iterati'oes, or words of
repetition 5 as, dasGeheul, howling; das GebriiUg
roaring 3 Gemurmel, murmuring*

V

2. Tlieir Formation^

I. ...

Substantives are either genuine rddicat Words^
derivatives, or compounds.

Those which are formed by derivation, slfe
divided into primitives, an4 derivatives* . —

Pri*

GSHKAN LAVGVA61L. S5

Primitives cannot be derived from any other
word, and are, for the most part, monosyllables ; as,
die Handy the hand; der Fusz, the foot; das Band,
the union ; der Arm, the arm j die Brust, the breast ;
der Tod, the dead.

Derivatives are those which have their origin
from another part of speech, viz.

1st From another substantive or noun-adjective ; '
as, der Gartner, the gardner, from Garten, garden 5
die Finsternisz, obscurity, from finster, obscure.

. 2d. From a verb ; as, der Bauer, the boor,
from bauen, to cultivate, &c.

3d. From an adverbs as, die Wohlthat, the be-
nefaction, from wohl, well, and that, performed.

4th. Froip a preposition ; as, der Gjsgner, the
adversary, from gegen, adverse.

Remarks on t1ie preceding Formations.

The German language forms substantives, by
adding' to other words certain terminations here-
with subjoined.

1st. Schaft, heity keit, ung^ ey, nisz, thum,
sals as, die Freuncbchaft, friendship -, die Bekdnt*
xhaft, the acquaintance ; die Liistemheit, lust ;
4ii Rsdlichkeit, probity; die Besserung, the a-
mendment ; die Hoffnung, hope ; die Kinderey,
puerility ; die Tdndeley, loitering ; die Finsternisz^
obscurity ; die JHindemisz^ hinderance ; das Fur-
sfenthum, the principality s das Bisthumy the bisbop-

rick ;

,A6 ANALYSIS ^P THl

f ick ',■ der Irrsedp the iafoyrinlh j Ae 7>|{6#A/, ad*
yersity. ■

2d. Those terminc^tionji of ^r, for the mattiuliile
gender, and those of ir^ or i»» for tfae feoiinine ; At*
Wagner, the wheel-right ; flfer Schneider^ the UyM"^
fl!<fr Schuster y the shoemakef ; ifer Getber, the tan-
ner ; rf/e Gebieterinn^ the mistress ; dieFiirstinn, tKe
.(reigning) princess; rf/(? FreundinUy the (fitmale)
friend ; d/e Nachharinn^ the (female) neighbour.

3d, The diminutives are formed by the tcraii^
nations lein, or chen, changing their vowels ^y Oy v>
of primitives, into a^ q, ujbs,

ein Mann, Mdnnlein, or Manncken.

a man, - a little man.

• e/» Kifid, Kindlein, or Kindchen;

an in£uit,, a little in&nt.

e/;i Knab^ JCndblein, or Kmbcffjen.

a boy, a little boy,

«

eiri Lamm, La^mlein, or Lans/mchen.

r a lamb, a lambkjin.

\ tin Buch, BUdil^iny or Biichelfhgn,

a book, a little book.

efwe Frau, Frdukin,

a woman, an unmarried noble lady, aHttlewool^

4th. Iteratrves are formed by the prefixed vfh
4able ^e / as, das Geschwdtz, chattering j &ekln^ei,
tk^ tingling of a small bell. ^

Substantives derived from the Latin or Grttk
.Japguage, if introduced in the Geripan language,
3ie formed, .

... 1st.

GE&MAM LAK<^UAa£« 57

1st. By changing the termination a, is, into i ♦'
ia, into ejf and ic ; is, us (in the names of people and
lects)^ into er ; icus, into iker ; as, Matrone, z ma-
tron J Thescy thesis ; Abbey ^ abbey ; Pkantasie, fan-
tasy ; Atheviensery Athenian ; Historiker, historian ;
Mathematikcry mathematician,

2d. In adding to the nominative of the nouns
which terminate in o, asy oriy ensy ans, the letter
nor t to their genitive ; as. Generation^ generation ;
DUananty diamond ; Horizonty horizon ; Klienf,
client i Repre^entanty representative.

3d. In retrenching the final syllables.; as, Forrriy
model ; Kapitaly capital ; Altar ^ altar ; Dekrety de-
cree ; Diplam, diploma ; Atheist, atheist ; Element,
element ; Doctrin, doctrine.

4th. In changing the final syllables drjis, dra,
drtmij into der ; tms, tra, trtim, into ter s bra, bris,
into her / ulus, ula, ulum, into eh as, Cylinder,
cylinder ; Scepter^ sceptre ; November, November;
Fabel, fable^ &c.

There are some Greek and Latin words,
which reject the former adopted formations, and
form their plural thus : Abimnen, alumni ; Epho-
iW, ephori 5 Prdparatorien, preparations ; Stu-
dien, studies.

The Infinitives of verbs may be employed in
like manner ; as, das Spotten, mocking ; das Pfei-
fen, whistling, &c.

Observations. The German language is un-
commonly rich in compounds % it often cona-

I bines

5S JlKAtTSIS 6? TITB

tiries tzoo, three, and more words together. When
this occurs, we should unite them, for the sak^
of perspicuity, with a hyphen. We ought, how-
ever, to avoid those compounds which impart
tio distinct meaning, as they necessarily produce
confusion. Almost every p^rt of speech may be
C6mpounded with each other, the radical word
Still remaining unaltered. This> in my opinion,
is a great advantage in the German Ian:-
guagfe^ if, in compounding them, we adhere
strictly, 1st. to analogy; 2d. perspicuity; and
Sd. to euphony: for it. ought to be observed, that
every word in the composition,- which, when taken
^parately, may hare a certain signification ; as, der
Theetisch, the tea-table ; die Hobelbank, the joiners'-
bench -, der Stockknopf, the button of a stick ; das
JEsebokry the ass's ear, used as a nickname; das
Schalksaugei the eye of a rogue ; die SdweihfedeTy
the peti.

From the following examples we may see
how far the composititon may be prolonged ; as,,

die Stelky
the place, situation ;

die LitutenantS'StellCy
the commission of a lieutenancy ;

die Feldmarschall'LieutenantS'SuUe,
the commission of a fieldmarshal-lieutenant ;

dieReielis^GeneraUFeldmarschalULieiitenants^Steltey
the commission of an imperial general fiieldmarshal-

lieutenant, &c.

If

OERMAK |.ANGVA€£. <S9

If two or more words be unite(l, so that one
be determmed by the other, that by which the
idea is determined is the rqdicul ooe, tnd air-
ways constitutes the last part of the compounil
word; ?s^ BanholZy\\mhtv\ Rathhaus^ town-house s
Straszenraubery highwaymen j gfiingelb, yellow co-
lour, th^t tends to green.

All these have a different signification, as soon
as the words which constitute the composition are
pl^ed otherwise^; as, I/olzbau, plantation of wood ;
Hqusratb, furniture; die Rduberstrasxe^ the road
for highwaymen j gelbgrun^ green colour, that
)tends to yellow.

Substantives may be compounded,

}^t. . With a substantive ; as, der Tauten^
iials^ the neck of a pigeon ; der Reisehut, the tnu
velling-bat ; dasKoj^fiveh^ thehead-aclie; die Zahur
xhm^rzi^9 the tooth-ache ; die Halsbmde^ the cra-
vat ; das Hutbandi the hat-band ; das Hausbrod,
household-bread.

2^. With an adjective; as, der Groszvater,
the graniJfather ; der Freyherr, the baron ; die Lanr
geweiky t^diousness ; der Triibsinn, melancholy ;
der Rot/fgieszer, the brazier.

3d. With a verb : as, Brennol, lamp-oil ;
Grabstichel, a graver ; ein Reitpferd, a saddle-horse;"
das Brechmittel^ a vomit ; ein Trinklied, a jovial
song.

4th. With a preposition, or an adverb ; as,
der VartheiU the advantage ; der Vorderarm, the

I 2 fore

60 ANALYSIS OF THE

fore part of the arm ; die Niederlandey the Nether-
lands ; das EbenmaaSy the proportion -, der Ifach
theily the disadvantage ; die Hinterlisty artifice ;
das Gegentheily the contrary ; das Gegengewicht, tlie
counterbalance.

5th. With different parts of speech ; as, etn
TaugenichtSy a good for nothing fellow ; ein Nim-
mersatt^ a glutton ; das DaseyUy existence 5 das
Zutrauen, confidence.

6th^ With a substantive and one of the follow-
ing prefixed particles, erzj ur^ un, miss as, der
Erzvater^ the patriarch ; der Erzherzog, the arch-
duke ; ein ErzUigner, an arch liar ; ein Erziiarr, an
arch rogue ; eine Urkundey a document ; eine Ursa-
chcy a cause or reason ; der Ursprung^ the origin ;
der UrhebeTy the author ; Oer Urgroszvatery thfe
great grandfather; der Urenkely the great grandson ;
uralty very ancient ; die Uraltem, the ancestors.

The syllables un and mis have a peculiar signi-
fication in German as well as in English ; as,

der Menschy the' man > der Unmenschy an inhuman

person.
das Glikky fortune ; das Unglucky misfortune,
moglichy possible ; unmogUchy impossible.
der Sierriy the star ; der Unsteriiy disaster.
das Thiery animal ; das Unthiery monster.
holdy kindly; unholdy unkindly.

hoflichy civil; unhoflichy uncivil.

xverthy worthy; umverth, unworthy.

Jhe

GERMAN tANGtAGE. 61

The same with mis ; as,

ifcriatt/, the sound ^ der Mislaut^ dissonance,

die GuTisty the favour ; die Misgunsf, envy.

das Geschicky destiny ; das Misgeschick, inaptitude.

4ie Gtburt, the birth ; die Misgeburty an abortion.

ie Handlung, demeanor ; die Mishandlung, mis-
demeanor.

derVersiand^ understanding; derMisverstandyTnis"

understanding.

dai VerstdndnisZy intelligence ; das Misverstdndnisz,

mismtelligence.

Observation. When the last part of the com-
fosition is common to two or more words following,
ve retrench in the first, and replace the retrenched
part with an hyphen (-), which signifies that the
wird has the same termination as that which fol-
lov^ ; as, der Ein- und Ausgangy the entrance
and going out, instead of Eingang und Ausgang ;
Er ist ein giiter Sprach-- Screib^ Fecht-- mid Tanzn
Xeister, he is a good linguist, writer, fencer,
aid dancing master.

3. TTieir Genders.

It is an unfortunate circumstance, that this
pirt of grammar, which is of the highest impor-
tance, should have been hitherto so indifferently
treited by former authors ; many of whom, instead
of tendering it clear and simple to the student, have

per-

69 JINALYSJS OF THE

perplexed it' more, and led him into a labyrinth of
numerous irregularities and difficulties, from which
I hope to extricate him, by a plain and easy pro-
gression.

The Garman substantives are divided into twf
principal genders, viz. the personal ^nd neuter^ The
first is likewise masculine or feminine.

General Remarks.

Masculine are those which express strength,
vigour J energy, or activity.

Feminine are those nouns which express what
is soft, agreeable, pleasant, or affectionate.

Neuter are such as cannot ejcpress any of
the above objects.

Although this comprehends, in an ezistjig
mantier, all the genders oF noups; I shall, lot-
withstanding, exhibit each class individually,
and at the same time point out the three jen-?
ders of the German language separately, togc*-
tbcr with the small number of exceptions which
each of them possess ; at the conclusion I shall add
some peculiarities, under the title of '^ General
Observations on the Genders."

Rules for the Genders*
The masculine genders are :

1st. A^ proper names of male persons, gOds,
angels, and demons, as well as all names expressing

an

/

GERMAN LANCrAtJl. 65

an office, dignity, quality, station, or instrument,
peculiar to the male. Except, diminutives which
are neuters ; and a few compound words, in which
the last component is of a different gender ; as, die
Mannsperson, and das Maniisbildy both denoting^
iL itiale y die Persouy the person, being v^ feminine i
das Bild, the figure, neuter.

2d. The names of stones, winds, birds, fishesy
trees, seasons, months, days, and the elementary
productions.*

3d. All derivatives ending in er, expressing a
station, and those denoting an instrumtent pecu-
liar to the male. Except, das Messer, the knife i
das Ruder, the oar ; die Kldmmer, a cramp-iron i
die Klapper, a rattle ; die Ha\fter, a halter j die
Letter, a ladder, die Leyer, a hurdy-gurdy.

4th. Most derivatives ending in en. . Except
the infinitives, and some other single nouns, which
are neuter; as, das Almoserij alms; das Becken,
the basin 3 das Kiissen, the cushion ; das Lehen^
the fife ; das JVapen, the coat of arms ; das Zeichen,
thesfgn; das Eisen, the iron.

5th. All derivatives endifig ming and ling.
Except, das Messing, brass.

Femi^

' ♦ This rule contains^ comparatively speaking, very few
€Xf:epUoos> the priocipal of y/hich are : das Jalir, the year, whicfii
is fteater j and die MiikoocBe^ W^dnescfay, fetfiipine -, and a
few othcftj; ...../

#4 AKALTSIS OF TfiE

Feminine arc, '

1st. All the names of female persons, expre^
iiDg the dignities, relations, qualities, functions,
md instruments, peculiar to the female sex ;
and consequently all derivatives ending in inn.
ExcEPTf das Weiby the wife, or woman ; cUis
JHensch, the wench, a low woman ; das Weibsbild,
a female ; das Frauenzimmer, a lady ; das Weibs^
stiich, a contemptible expression for a woman.

2d. All derivatives ending iney or eiy heit,
teity schafty and xing. Except, dtr Brey, pap;
das El/, an egg; das Geschrey^ the clamour; der
Schqft, the stock of a gun 3 der Sprung^ the leap ;
ier Hornungy February.

3d. All substantives ending in e, which are
derived from adverbs ; as, die Grdsze^ size ; die Giite^
goodness ; die Liebe, love, 8cc.

Neuter are,

1st The names of metals, countries, and places-
ExCEPT, der Stahl^ the steel ; der Tomback, pinch*
back ; der Zink, zink ; die Pfalz, Palatinate ;
and those which end in ey ; as, die Turkey^
Turkey, &c.

2d. AH diminutives in chen and fe/zz.

Sd. All derivatives ending in thum. Except,
der Reichtkum, riches ;. der Irrthum^ error ; der
Beweissthum, argument.

4tb. All collectives and iteratives, which begin
W^^ the syllable ge. But when not collective

or

GSRMAK LAN6UA01, 6$

or an iterative signification^ they do not belong to
this rule.

5th. All which msty be used as substantive^
without being formed as such 5 as,
das Aber^ the word but i

— LebewoJily — — farexvetl;

~ ^' > and all thf letters in the alphabet

GENERAI^ REMARKS Q» THE OENDERS^

1st. The termination in Qr inny which answers
to the English essy in some respects, denotes the
sexes^ and when the masculine constitutes th^
name of the species, they are only applicable to
quadrupeds i as,

der Lbivcy the lion ; die Loxvinn, the lioness.

der Hund, the dog ^ die Hundinn, the bitch.

der Wolf, the wolf ; die IVolfinn, the she wolf.

der Escl, the ass ; die Eselinny the she ass.

JJd, From the above, the termination inn has
been transfi^red to certain attributes and titles, and
for the greater part to proper nam^s, to d^pote
the feminine gender; as,

der Kiinigy the king 5 die Koniginn^ the queen,
der PriJiZy the prince ; die Prince^sijin^tht princesg

fl(er-y<:A^{/'^r, the shepherd; die Schqferim^ the $bep»

herdess.

derSlchieider, the taylor j die Schneiderinn, the tayw

lor's wife, §cc,

K 0«#

€i AKALTSIS Of THE

vmt ; Jifagd, female servant 3 Sohtii son ; Techier f
daughter.

9th. Many words are used, according to their
. various significations, in a different sex ; as, der and
das Band, the union^ riband; der and das Bund,
the bond, bundle ; der and das Mensch, a human
being, a wench ; der and das Verdiensty merit, or
deserts *

4. liieir plural Formation.

By an original or primitive word, we can de-
note either one or more objects. This difference
constitutes the numbers^ of which there are two in
German, namely, the singular and plural.

The plural, in many words, is not denoted at
all, in which case both the singular and plural are
equally the same ; as, der Kaiser, the emperor, die
Kaiser, the emperors ; das Geleise, the track of a
wheel, die Geleise, the tracks of a wheel, &c. but
if the plural is to be denoted, then it happens by
the change of the vowels ; as,

Vater, father; - Plur. Vdter.

Mutter, mother; — — Mutter, &c.
or it is done by affixing the flexible sounds e, er,
€71, or w,- as,

Brod, bread; - Plur. Brode.

Geist, ghost ; - Geister.

Achselj shoulder ; — Acliseln^ &c.

or,

1JI H — ~~-- -■ . -. . ■ . ■ — — - „

* A few provinces differ, in the gender of some words;
^t it is not necessarjr to notice all those derlations.

CERMAN LANGUAGi:* ۤ

- or, lastly, by both the former methods at the
same time ; as,
,Gruft^ clift; - -. Plur. Grilfte.

GotU Godi - • G'iitier.

Primitive words only are suscejitible of a
plu]:al \ but as proper names may also stand for the
former, they may likewise have a plural; as^
Frankrdchs Ludwige, the Louis's of France ; di€
Cicerone unserer Zeity the Cicerq's of our age.

At the same time, many primitive words have
no plural at all. This relates to such as are abstracts;
as, 2)^Z72^, thank ; WillCy will ; Bundy union ; Rath^
counsel. Other appellatives, on the countrary, are
usual in the plural alone ; as, Gefdlle^ taxes ; EiJtr
kilnfte, revenues ; Kosten, \}ie costs ; Unkosten^ ex-
penses ; Aelteni, parents ; Ahneriy ancestors ; AlpCTi^
the Alps, &c. In many others the plural may be
used, but they occur very seldom ; as, Blattem^
small-pox ; Triimmemy ruins; Vorfahren^ ancestors;
Nachkommeny descendants ; Kaperriy capers, a ve-
getable.

The collectives are used in the. singular alone;
• as, das GeblUty the mass of blood ; die JVdsche,
washing; das Gesinde, the male and female servants.
However, many others suffer a plural ; as, Volker^
people or folks ;. GeldeVy payments of cash ; or are
used in the singular or plural at the same time ; as,
.das Haavy hair; - Plur, die Haare.
das Gerdthy furniture i "^ die Geratfte,
or in the plural alone j as, Leute, people ; MoLken,
whev.

The

•-»<
<

€i AKALTSIS Of THE

vmt; Jif^(2» female servant; Sohfh ^on; Tockteff
daughter.

9th. Many words are used, according to their
. various significations, in a different sex ; as, der and
das Bandy the union^ riband; der and das Bund,
the bond, bundle ; der and das Mensch, a human
being, a wench ; der and das Verdiensty merit, or
deserts *

4. liieir plural Formation.

By an original or primitive word, we can de-
note either one or more objects. This difference
constitutes the numbers^ of which there are two in
German, namely, the singular and plural.

The plural, in many words, is not denoted at
all, in which case both the singular and plural are
equally the same ; as, der Kaiser y the emperor, die
Kaiser y the emperors ; das Geleise, the track of a
wheel, die Geleise, the tracks of a wheel, &c. but
if the plural is to be denoted, then it happens by
the change of the vowels ; as,

Vatery father ; - Plur. Vdter.
' Mutter y mother; — — Mutter y &c.
or it is done by affixing the flexible sounds r, er,
tiiy or Wi as,

Brody bread; - Plur, Brode.

Geisty ghost ; - Geister.

Achselj shoulder ; — — Acliseln^ &c.

or,

* A few promces differ, in the gender of some words;
kit it li not necessarjr to notiqe all those detiations.

CERMAN LANGUAGE* ۤ

or, lastly, by both the former methods at the
same time ; as,
,Gruft^ clift^ - -. Plur. Gritftc.
Gotty Godi - • Gutter.

Primitive words only are suscejitible of a
pluial ^ but as proper names may also stand for the
former, they may likewise have a plural ; as^
Frankreichs Ludwige, the Louis's of France ; di9
Cicerone unserer Zeit, the Cicerq's of our age.

At the same time, many primitive words have
no plural at all. This relates to such as are abstracts;
as, DankyihRnk ; Wille, will; Bund, union ; Rath^
counsel. Other appellatives, on the countrary, are
usual in the plural alone ; as, Gefdlle, taxes ; £/;!-
kiinfte, revenues ; Kosten, \he costs ; Unkosten^ ex-
penses ; Aelteni, parents ; Ahneny ancestors ; Alpen^
the Alps, &c. In many others the plural may be
used, but they occur very seldom ; as, Blattem,
small-pox ; Trummemy ruins; Vorfahrai^ ancestors;
Nachkommeny descendants; KaperUy capers, ave-
getable.

The collectives are used in the-singular alone;
as, das Gebliit, the mass of blood ; die JVasche,
washing; das GesindCy the male and female servants.
However, many others suffer a plural ; as, Volker^
people or folks ;. Gelder^ payments of cash ; or are
used in the singular or plural at the same time ; as,
. das Haary hai r ; - Pl ur . die Haare.
das Gerdthy furniture ; — die Ger'athCy
or in the plural alone ; as, Leute, people ; Molkeny
whev.

The

"K AilALV^IS OP THE

The iterative^ and material substantives admit
only of the singular ; as, das Gewiil, rooting, Ge^
bruUj roaring ; Gezvimmer, whimpering ; Thon,
clay 5 Goldy gold ; Silber^ silver ; Stroke straw ^
jE>dif, earth. Many material substantives, in the
ingnification of more kinds, suffer the plural ; ai
all sorts of poison^ earths (containing minerals),
and solid xjooods.

Words implying measure, weight, quan*
tity, or extent, remain unaltered, and are never
put in the plural ; especially when they are , pre-
ceded by a definite numeral, exceeding one ; as,
sechs Fasz Bier, six barrels of beer ; fiinf Paar,
five pair ; sieben Fusz lang, seven feet long ; drey
JPfund schzcer, three pounds weight ; hundert Mann^
a hundred men. Except the feminine ending in
e ; as, EUey an ell ; Meilcj a mile, JVoc/ie, week ;
^tunde, hour ; Tonne, a ton ; Rutlwy a rod : and
•partly those of Tagy day ; Jahrhundert, century ;
Glas, glass ; Sack, a sack.

If a preposition be antecedent, which requires
a dative case, then the length or measures of time
-are put iri the plural 3 zs, vor zwey Jahreny two
years ago. The others suffer both numbers; as,
wn zehn Schritt, or Schritten, of ten steps ; with-
out changing in the plural their vowels ; as,
tine Lange von zehn Fusz, a length of ten feet ;
ein Garten von vier Acker, a garden of four acres.

' Mann, alone, does no suffer a plural with any

preposition^ as, em Regiment von tausend Marm,

a regiment of a ' thousand men.

Ob-

GERMAN LANGUAGE. f|

\ Observation. Many words suffer a plural ja
different significations, whereas in many they do
not. Those which have no plural, are partly such
as &il both in German and English, and part^
such as are wanting in German alone : I have
therefore, carefully exhibited all the latter in-
stances, which the student, by comparing with the
idiom of his own language, will find at once strik*
hig^ cx)frrect, and useful. What is not comprizej^
under this head, he will be made acquainted with
m the sequel, under that of " Formations of cer<
^ tain Plurals".

r
I

5. Tieir Declension.

Substantives, in a period, may be found m
different situations, and may either be declined
by their own significations, which is done by cer-
tain simple radicals affixed to them, or by prepo^
sitions. The denoted situation, which is given to
the word itself, is called a case, and to conduct ji
word through all its cases, is the declension of it.

The number of cases is not equal iti :b31
hngudges. The Germans have but /our, because
they only denote four variations in a substasH
tive^ as,

1st. The case of the subject, whether it be
the first or third person ( Nominative) , or the se-
cond (Vocative). For that reason, both these cases
Unequally the same in German.

:^d. The case of the personal objects^ ;or of

the

^ A1*ALYSIS OF THB

the thing of which good or bad is affirmed (Da^'

tive).

3d. The case of the suffering object, upon
iRrhich an action immediately refers {Accusative J i

4th. The case which serves the explanation of
the difFere!:t ideas {Genitive).

The declension of German substantives is very
incomplete, because all the cases are not denoted,,
«rid many of them but very seldom. The Nomi-
native has no proper declining syllables. The Ge-
nitive is denoted by es, s^ ens^ or w, and often not
at all. The Dative very seldom, by f, rw, or n.
The Accusative, more seldom, by en or n. In the
plural terminations, the Dative only is expressed,
sometimes by enor ny the others are used to supply
fee definite words of the substantive.

But few general rules can be given for the
Germlan declension. The principal are,

1st. In all neuter nouns, the Accusative is the
iame as the Nominative.

2d. All feminine nouns remain i^naltered m
Ihe singular.

3d. All words, which have es in the Genitive,
must hdve an e in the Dative. Those which have ^
alone, leave the Dative without it.

4. Substantives ending their nominative plurals
in »,' remain unaltered in the whole plural. ThosQ
that terminate in e, h or r, adopt an n in the Da»
tive s but all the other cases remain the same as thd
KominativQ,

Ihavc

6eiIman langitAoe; tS

I have adopted but on^ scheme of declen-
iidft tor all the substantives in the German lan-
guage : whereas those ailthors who have written
before me affirm^ that there are four^ six^ and even
eight ; although they have not, with their utmost
labour^ been able to describe more than two or
three variations.

Such a practice has tended mei*ely to check
thel progress of the student, and excite in him ap-
prehensions of difficulties, that have in fact no
existence.

Were I not apprehensive of experiencing an.
invidious critique from some cotemporaty gram*,
mariaris, who condemn every system but their own^
I would assert that the substantives^ so far from
hiving the number of declensions which they af-
firmj tnight with propriety be said to havfe none i
or, at leasts that the title of declension might very
well be discarded, as the variations amount ta
nothing more than a few uniform, inflections.

SPECIAL RULE FOR THE SINGULAR*

The csise called Ablative^ in other lan^ages^
can only be expressed in German by prefixing
to tbd noun a preposition governing a Datiti^ case ;
therefore thfe German Ablative is no other thati
the Dative, with any preposition that governs that
case ; which rule holds good in both numbers ; as,
ich gebe es dem Bruder, 1 give it to the brother ;
ich gebe es der SohwestiTy I give it to the sister ;

h ich

74 ANALYSIS OF THE

«

ich gebc es dan Kind, I give it to the child,
these are examples in the Dative cases ; bixt ich
habe es von dem Bruder, I have it from the brother ;
ich habees von der Scktvester, I havfe, it from the sister;
ich habe es von dem Kind, I have it from the child ;
are Ablatives, formed by the preposition von, which
sigtiifies of or from.

The Vocative, in both numbers, is always the
same as the Nominative.

The Genitive case, in the singular number
of the masculine and neuter, is the same as in
English, by the addition of an s, and sometimes
es ; as, des Bruders Garten, the brother's garden ;
Gottes Gnade, God's grace, &c. but feviinines re-
;6iain without variation.

SPECIAL RULES FOR THE PLURAL.

' The plural is made, by addin^^ to the Nomi-
native singular, in the masculine gender, the letter
e ; in the feminine, the syllable en s in the neuter
the syllable er ; as,

\der ffund, the dog, Plur. die Hunde.
die Zeit, the time, — — — die Zeiten.

das Bild, the picture, - ■ die Bilder.

The t)ative case plural is the letter 71, for all
nouns in general 3 as, den Hunden, den Zeiten^
den Bildern.

EX-

» '

CERMAN LANGUiWGE. 75

EXAMPLES.

1. The Masculine Gender with the Dejinite

Article.

Singular. Plural.

K der Weg, the way. N. die Wege.

G. des Wegs, or ges. G. der Wege.

D. dem Weg, or ge. D. den JVegen.

A. den Weg. A. die Wege.

m

2, The Feminine Gender,

Singular. Plural.

N. die Zeity the time. N. die Zeiten.

G> der Zeit. G. der Zeiten.

D. der Zeit. D. den Zeiten.

A. die Zeit. A. die Zeifen.

3. The Neuter Gender.

Singular. Plural.

N. das Feld, the field. N. die Felder.

G. des Feldsy or des. G. db: Felder.

b. dem Feld, or rf(?. D. den Feldern.

A. rfa^ Feld. A. c?/e Felder.

h 2 l.The

T«

4na;;XSis of iTHS

I. Tlie Masculine Chnder with the Inde^niff

Article^

singular.

»

Nonj. ein TempeU a temple.
Gen. cines Tempels.
Dat^ einem Tempel.
Ape. einen TempeL

2. The Feminine Gender x

Siipigular.
Nom. eine Feder^ a pen.
Gen. einer Feder.
Dat. einer Feder.
Ace. eine Feder.

?• The Neuter Gender,

r.

Nom. ein Kindy a child.
Gen. eines Kinds, or rf^^,
Dat. einem Kind, pr rfe,
Ace. gin Ktfid.

^is article hyas np plural,

|tB«9

/
GERMAN LAKGVAGEf 7T

Eemarks on the declension of substantives,

1. It is indispensably necessary in speaking, to
pay great attention to the termination of the ar-
ticle, as its variations are more numerous than those
pf the noun, particiilarly in the Dejtnite : and 1%
maybp useful! tor recollect, that the Genitive c^ise
lingular, in the feminine gender, is der in the one
article, and einer in the other,

2. The Genitive singular, as was before said, is
sometimes terminated in s, and sometimes in eSj,
either of these forms aye equally good ; but the first
is more frequently used in conversation, and the
latter in composition,

5. In serious discourse, an e Is added to the
Dative singular, in the masculine and neuter, of de-
^ite nouns ; for we may say , dem Weg, or Wege^
dem Feldy or Felde.

• • •

4. Substantives of the masculine gender, ter-
minating in ely euy er j neuters in e, ely en, er, and
all diminutives, take s only in the Genitive, indis-
criminately with the defijiite or indefinite article.
They also remain unaltered in their plural, as in
0ie Nominative singular ; and when sonle occur
with the vowels a, o, «, in the singular number,
they must be changed into the diphthongs a, 6, ii,
is the plural ; and as I have before observed in
the special rules, the Datioe plural is determinated

ift »; aR»

Mas^

n

ANALYSIS OF TH5

Mflsculines,

Singular,
Nom.. <jen.
Engel, angel J Engels.
Bissen, a bit ; Bissens.
Vater, father -, Vg.t€rs,
Vogely a bird -, Vogels.
Brndcr, brother; Bructers

Plural.
Nom. Dat.
Engel, ' Engeln;
Bissen, Bisse?i.
Vdter^ Vdtern.
Fogel, Vogeln.
Briider^ Briidem.

Neuters.

Singular.
Nom. Gen.
Gewerbe, trade ; Gewerbes.
Siegel„ a seal; Siegels,
KusseUy^LCM^ion ; Kiissens,
Mess/erp a knife ; Messers,

Plur.
Nom. Dat.
Gexverbe^ Gewerben,
Siegel, Siegeln.
Kiissen, KUssen.
Messer^ Mc$s^rn.

Dimin

utix

)es.

Singular,
Nom. Ldmmlein, a lambkin ; Gen. Uimmkins^

Plural.
Nom. LHmmlein, Dat. Lammlein.

5. Substantives ending in Sy sz, z, tz, have
their Genitive case ending in esj invariable with
either article ; as, der Hals, the nec^, des Halses i
der KusZy a kiss, des Kusses ; das SalZy salt, des
Salzes ; der Schutz, protection, des 'Schtitzes.

6. Substantives of the masculine gender, end-
ing in e, terminate their Genitive in ens, and the

n re-

GERMAN LANGUAGl.^ 7»

n remains in all the following cases, both in the
singular 2uid plural, with either article ; as.

Singular. Nom. Gen. Plural.

der Haufe, the heap ; des Haufe?is, die Ilaufen.
derKnabey the boy; des KiiabenSy die Knaben.*

7. The following nouns of the masculine gen-
der terminate their Genitive in 71 or en, according
to their nature, and continue it through all the
other cases, both in the singular and plural number,
with either article; as.

Singular. Nom. Gen. Plur.

der Bar, the bear; desBHren, dieBdren.

— Brvnn^ the well ; — Brunnen, — Brunnen.

— Cftm/, the christian ;— CAm/^7z, — Christen.

— Fels, the rock ; — Felsen, — Felsen.

— Fremde, the stranger; — Fremden, — Freniden.

— Graf, the count ; — Graf en, — Graf en.

— Hdde, the heathen ; — Heiden, — Heiden:
-*- Held, the hero ; — Heiden, — Heiden.

. — Herr, the master; — Herm, — Herrn.

— Hirt, the shepherd ; — Hirten, •— Hirten.

— Jude, the jew ; — Juden, — Jtiden.

— Klumpen, the lump ; — K lumpen, — K lumpen,

— Mensch, the man ; — Menschen, — Menschen.
-r- Mohr^ the moor ; — Mobren, — Mohren.

— Narr, the fool ; — Narren, ^ Narren.

Sin-

♦ Da$ Herx, or Herze, the heart, haA Herzens in tl^c
6enitiY«,

Plurai.
die Ochseh:
^ Pfaffek.
•^-* Pfaucn.
-— Prinzen.

8t) ^LhAlysis op

Singular. Nom. Gen.

der OchSy the ox i des Ochseri,

— Pfafe, the priest ; -— Pfqffen,

— Pfau^ the peacock ; — /yiiM^n,

— Prinz^ the prince ; — Prinzen^
-^ Soldatj the soldier; — Soldaterty — Solddten.
— - Stratisz, the ostrich; — Straiiszen, -^^ Strauszerii
•^— Tlior^ the simpleton;'-^ Thoreuy . — Thoreti.

— T'wVit, the Turk ; — Turkerii -i— TurkaU

Masculines, which form their plurals in er.
Singular. Plural.

der Geisty the spirit ; die Geister.

— Gott, the god ; — Gotter.

— Leib^ the body^ — Leiber.

— Mamiy the man ; • — Manner.

'•• , . i

Feminines, which form their plurals in ft
Singular. Plural.

die Angst i anxiety ; die Aejigste.

— - Brautf the bride;

— Brust, the breast ;

— Faiisty the fist ;

— Fruchti the fruit ;

— Grttft^ the vault;
-^ fia??rf, the hand ;

— Hauty the. skin ;

— Khtft, -the cleft ;

— Krafty strength;

— Kiinst,y the art ;

— LaiL^i the louse ;

— Lufty the air ^

— Brduie.

— Briiste.

— Fduste.

- — Fr'uehte.

— Griifte.

— Hdnde. .

— Haute.

— Klu/te.

— Krdfte.
— • KUnste.

— Iduse.
•— .Liifte.

Sin-

Singular.
die Lust, ple^Aire j

— Maus, the mouse ;

— Nachty the night ;
•— . Nusz, the nut 5

— Sail, the sow ;

— Schnur, the' string;

GERMAir LAKOtJAOt.

Plural.
die Liiste.

— Mduse.

tl

— Nachte.

— Niisse.

— Saue.

— Schmire.

— ^/a(//> the town ; -

— JPa;2£f,thewainscoat; — ' Wdnde.

— Wurst, the sausage ; — Wiirste.

All substantives in iVz form their plural in e; as^

Singular.

Phural.

die Erkenntnisz^ recognisance 5 die Erkenntnisse.

~ Belrubniszy affliction ; -

— Sdumnisx, delay; —
dasZeugnisZy testimony; -

— Geheimnisz, secrecy ; -

The following nouns of the neuter gender, have
their plurals ending in e, instead of er^ beiQg more
harmonious to the ear ; as^

Betriibnisse.
Sdmnisse.
Zdugnisse.
Gekeimnisse.

Singular.

Plural.

das Ding, the thing ;

die Dinge.

— Fellj the skin 5

— Felk.

— Gamy the yarn i

— Game.

— Gerichty the didi ;

— Gerickte.

— Haavy the hair ;

— Haare,

— , JahVy the year 5

' — JahrCp

— Jochy the yoke ;

— Joche.

— tjoos, the lot;

•— Loose.

-^ Nel%y the net;

— Netze.

-^ fferd^ the horse 5

— Pfcrde.

H

Sin*

%^ ' /JIALYSIS , OF THE .

Singular. Plural.

das Recht^ the right ; die Ttechte.

— Reichy the empire ; — Rciclie.

— Schiffy the 6l>ip y . \ — Schiffe.

— Schtvehii the hog -, — SchweinCn
~ Seily the rope ; ^ — - Seik.

— ^piel^ the play ; — ^ Spiele.

— Thiery the animal ; — Tldere.

— Thor^ the gate ; — - Tkore.

— Werky the work; — Werke.

Tlie following have en in their plural ; as>

Singular. Plural.

das Aiigy ox AvgCi the eye; die Augen.

< — Betty or Bettey the ;bed ; — Betten.

— HerZy the heart; -^ Uerzen.

— OhTy the ear ; — Ohren.

Substantives, whose singular ends in e, form
their plural by the addition of n ; as,

die GabCy the gift ; Plur. die Gaheuy &c.

s

The same rule m^y be applied to \h.^ feminine
nouns ending in el^ or er ; for, between / and n s r,
and n ; the letter e is dropped ; as,

die Regely the rule ; Plur<. die Regeln. -

— Fedevy the ^en ; . :■ ' -^ Fedem, j&c.

Except the termination 2/r; as,

rf/e Nature the nature ; Plur. die Naturen.

. . ■ -^ . , .' ■ «

Frequently, and more particular^ in inpnpjsyl-

lable the; ^tbree vowels, a, o,.m, are;changeci.ipto

the diphtl^pi^gSpj^ a, q\ ii, iix t^^jpiuraj number^ ji$,

•. . * Sin*

GERMAN LANGUAGE* 88p

Singular. Plural.

das Buck, the book ; die Bucher.

•— G/eis, the glass ; — - Gldser.

, — Hotz, the wood ; — Holzcr.

die Ktinsty the art ; — Kiimte.

— Magdy the maid ; •— Magde.
der Siandy the station ; ~ Stande.
— ^ ASfocA:, the stick ; — Stocke.

— Thurniy the steeple ; — ^ Tliurme.
Neuter nouns, which form their plural in e,

and those of all genders, whose plural ends in ert,
do not alter their vowels; as,

das Jahvy the year ; Plur. die Jahre.

die Schtdd, the debt ; ■ — Schulden.

der Knabe, the boy ; Knabeiiy &c.

OBSERVATIONS.

1. Compound words, terminating in mann,

form their plural by changing 77ia?m into leute ; as.

Singular. Plural.

der Kaufmamiy the merchant ; die Kaufleute.

— ' HauptmanUy the captain ; — • Hauptkute.

— Edelmamiy the nobleman ^ — Edelleute.

— Fidirmanriy the carrier ; — Fuhrleute.

— Schiffmann^ the master of a vessel \ — Schiffleate.

— Amtmanny the bailiff; — Amtleute,

2. The monosyllables Mann*', a man ; Fusz,

M 2 or

^ _ . _, - - ^ ._- - ■ I - I -- _ - - -

* Marty witii a single n, signifies one, or tbey : as, man
sap^ one says, or thejr say j man glauH , one beiieTcs> or ihsf
believe^ &c.

•4 ANALYSIS OP THE

or Schuliy a foot ; ein Buck, a quire ; ein Ffund, a

pound, &c. are never put in the plural (see the

preceding remarks under the head of plurality V; as,

der Ackeri the acres ztvej/u7td zwanzig Acker iMnd,

twenty-two acres of land.

der Gradj a degree y hundert Grad> hundred degrees

die Mark, the mark ; zwolf Mark Gold or Silber^

twelve marks of gold {?r silver.

das Buck, a quire ; seeks Buck Papier, six quires

of paper.

dasDutzendy thedozen yfiinf Dufzend FlaschenWein.

five dozen of wine.

das Paar*, a pair -, ein Paar Schuhe, one pair of

shoes, &c.

das Schock, a number of sixty ; drei Schock Aepfel,

nine score apples.

das Siiick, a piece ; zwei Sliick Tuck, two pieces

of cloth.

der.Zoll, an inch ; drei Zollbreit, three inches broad,

we say also, mat, once -, einmal, once ; zwei7nal,

twice ; dreimal, three times, &c.

There are some few exceptions to the former ;

such as die Elle, an ell > die Meile, the mile ; die

UnzCy the ounce, &c.

3. Some

^ Ein Paar signifies also a few ', as, tin Paar Gulden^ a
few florins j ein Paar Tdge, a few days, kc. This, hofwevcr,
applies only to such things as can be. separated from each other;
but in Schuhe, and in the following, as Striimpfe, stockings ;
Hoszen, breeches, &c. the word pair ought to be preserved.
'The French make the same distinction by their wotds faire
and couple i and, I believe, this is the same case with respect
to the English.

GERMAN LANGUAGE* BS^

3. Some words are never used in the singuliaf i
as, die Aeliern, the parents ; die Briefschaffen, pa«
pers or letters J die Geschwister, brothers and sif-
ters ; die Gliedmaaszefiy the limbs. Sec. (see my ob-
servations on that .head, under the chapter of plu-
rality.) ,

I have only to observe, before I conclude this
part of speech, that by a strict comparison of the
Gferman with that of the English language, the
latter abounds in similarities with respect to the
idioms of the former.

9

6. Of Proper and Foreign Names.

The German, like every other nation, intro-
duces names borrow.ed from the Greek and Lathi,
mto its language. This is frequently the case with
respect to the French, English, and other modern
languages, where it is hecessary to make use of
such names or words, which tannot be avoided in
composition ; and therefore the Germans, when
they introduce them, either print those names in
italic characters^ or merely with a more distinct
type from the general one of the work.

It would be wholly unnecessary to mention
this circumstance, were it not that several modem
Grammarians have given me an opportuility of
doing so. .

Some of them have gone so far, as to arrange,
voluminously, the Latin and Gree^A: names, under
the head of four or six declensions ; and have also

added

•6 ANALYSIS OF THE

added many remarks, observations, and exceptions
tfiftredn.

Suppose, for instance, that a foreign name oc-
curs in a composition, and I would tell the English
or French scholar to pronounce AlcibiadeSy or Fir-
giVs jEndSy &c. according to the German habit of
pronouncing or declining foreign languages ; cer-
tainly the same scholar would have an equal right
to tell me to. pronounce or decline the same ac-
cording to his dialect or declension.

For a student who understands both languages
before -mentioned, it will be an easy task to dis-
cover by the context, in what case such a name is
put by the autTior ; and by him who does not un-
derstand either the Greek or Latin languages, it
will be considered as a mere barbarism, by which
he would become in no degree more wise or intel-
ligent.

Proper names are declined thus :

Nom. Horn.

Gen. Roms.

Dat. %u^ iuy nach Rom.

Ace. Ro7n.

•• •

All other names of cities, boroughs, and vil-
lages, follow the foregoing example ; and according;
to the subsequent are declined all proper names
of deities, angels, men, and demons.

• V Mas-

GERMAN LANGUAQS. i|7

Masadinci

Nom. Jupiter.
Gen. Jtipiters.
Dat, Jupitern.
Ace. Jupiter.^

^ Feminine.

Nom. Minerva.
Geri. Minervens.
Dat. Minerven.

Ace. Minerven.

♦

Eveiy proper name is, like a common sub-
stantive, formed into a diminutive, by the addi-^
tion of chen or fc /?« ; as Karly Charles ; Karlchen,
little Charles ; Diana, Diana y Dianchen, little
Diana, &e.

* Names of the masculine gender, which do not termi<
nate in r, take in the Dative and AccntatiTe the tjilatde ^n.

f' -

ANALYSIS OF THE '

PRACTICE ON THE PRECEDING.*

HcHodora ward nicht weit

von' Anacndolia voa einem

Fischer gefunden ; aUein sie

suchte umsonst ihren Vater.

Sie beweinte den Untergang

des Edlen, und ihr Herz scbaa-

dertebey dem Gedanken, jetzt

ganz veilassen in einer frem-

den Welt^Mi seyn. Nachdcm

sic sich bey Ihrem Retter cr-

hohlt hatte, sah sie kein an-

deres Mittel sich zu erhalten,

wis von Stadt zu Stadt zu rei-

$en ; upd glucklicher Weise

hatte sie ihre Latite, ein theu^^

res Andenken^von ilirer Mut-

ter» gerette^) weil sie dieselbe

inuner an einem feuerfarbe-

nen Bande fest iiber der Schul-

der trag.

No€h nicht lange hatte sie
anrdem Ufer des Meeres, wo

wir

Hellodora was rescued from
the waves by a fisherman^
and when life and recollec-
tion returned, she eagerly in-
quired for her beloved father.
Alas I her father was not to
be found. Unprotected, des*
titute, and in a strange coun-
try, her lute became her only
resource and dependance.
It was the dear remembered
gift of her mother, and she
constantly wore it, suspended
from her shoulder, by a crim<
son ribbon.

Not long had she slum<-
beredy where we first bor

held

* The above extract is taken from a beautiful work of
Baron Gothe^ entitled, Heliodora^ or the Grecian Minstrel, It
is necessary, also, to inform the student, that the translation
of the extract is executed freely in some instances | as, to have
adhered closely to the author, would have rendered many parti
ridiculous**- A complete translalioa of this work is in the pieis^
and will be speedily publisbed.

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

89

wir SIC zuerst erblickteti, ge*
schlummert, ais sich langsam
cin Jiingling nahete, der auf
dcm Wcge von Pasto nach
Neapel war. Den Nachmit-
tag hatte er in dem Museum
zu Partici zugebracht, und
der Anblick der Kunstwerke
des heiteren Alterthums hatte
ihm auf einige Augenblicke
den Kumoier gelindert, der
Icb^idigcr in seiner Brust er-
wachte, je nahcr er der Stadt
kam. EingeliebtesMadchen,
von dem ihm die Scheide
wand des Uebereinkommnis-
ses trennte> soUte er vielleicht
schon ais die Gattin eines
gtuckilchern Mannes wieder-
selien.

Er verliesz dieHeerstrasze,
und wandelte dichte am
Me^re bin, um die Abend-
landschaft herrlicher zu ge-
aieszen. Oft stand er stillc,
und ubersah die Reize, wel-
die die Natur so verschwen-
derisch in diesem Raume aus-

breitete.

held her, ere a youth slow
ly made his approach. H^
was on his way from P^j-
tum * to Naples, and had
passed the afternoon in the
museum of Portici, \vhcre
those master-pieces of art,
the pride of antiquity, had
for a time alleviated his sor-
rows, which as he drew
nearer the town broke forth
anew. lie loved, and was
beloved ; but a fatal des-
tiny intervened, and the maid
of his heart was about to be-
come the wife of another*

He quitted the high road,
and passed alongthesea shore,
to enjoy the luxurious charms
oif the evening landscape.
Often did he pause to review
the beauties which nature here
had so profusely displayed.

Early

* A city of aocient Lucania^ of which the modern Ben-
licati^ a province of Naples^ forms a part. It is remarkable,
acoordisg to Virgil, for producing roses twice a year, in May
3Bd September.

Bisen TTuma Pasti. Gsoxc.

K

90

ANALYSIS OF THE

brcitete. In dieser Gegend
waien seine Ideen von Land-
schaftmalcrci gereift, hierhat-
te cr cinige Jahre mit so be-
dcutendem Gewinn fiir seln
besseres Leben zugebracht —
iind hier ward seinem Herzen
ein so schones Fest zuberei-
tet. Er sah die Stadt vof
sich, wo seine Seele war,
und iiberdachte scin Schick-
sal. — Wie leer ! rief er aus,
indem er sich niedersetzend
seine Mappc ofFnete, — wie
wenig ausgefiihrt ! Hatte ich
sonst unter Pastums Ruinen
gewandelt, und in Portici
niich in ein schoneres Ztit-
alter versetzt, wiereichkehrte
ich zuriick ! — Ichglaubte un-
ter jenen ehrwiirdigen Zeug-
nissen einer schonen Wirk-
samkeit den verlohrnen Frie-
den wieder zu, finden, — ^aber
nur Ergcbung bringe ich zu-
riick ; ich habe mich mit dem
furchtbarenOedanken derUn-
moglichkeit versohnt. -Nur
diese Saulenreihe des Pseudo
dipteros in Pastum ist ausge-
fiihrt

Early enraptured with the
art of painting, he had cho-
sen it for his profession *,
and in this place had his
conceptions of landscape been
refined to an exquisite degree.
Here had he passed several
years of such distinguished
horiour, that he deemed them
the happiest of his life. His
interest in the scene was great-
ly augmented. Before him
stood the city which contained
the fair object of his fondest
affections. He sat down and
contemplated his fate. How
ill is this executed, said he,
opening his portfolio. Had 1
earlier strolled under the ruins
of Paestum, and wandered
round Portici, how rich, how
happy might I have returned*
How should I have produced
many honorable testimonies,
and reaped the reward of ho-
nest industry., Perhaps I might
have been a stranger to the
sorrow which now oppresses
me. Nothing, continued he,
looking attentively over his
portfolio, nothing is compleat- .
ly executed in Paestum, except
thisPseudo diptorie co\on?Lde. *

Although

* The term is Greek. In architecture it signifies a temple
surrounded by a single rowof piUars> so placed as to counter*
/eit a double row.

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

fiihrt, — unci ich hattc mir
doicH; so Test vorgenommeii,
cine Zeichimng des ganzen
herrlichen Denkmals mitzu-
nchmen. — Und von dem trun-
kenen .Faun in PorticI nur
diese wenigen Striche I — Ach !
nie habe ich ,die Wahrhcit
ficbmerzlicher in melneni In •
nern gefiihlt, dasz Friede in
dem stillen Geiste wohnen
musz, der dur^h Kunstdar-
stellungen zu dem stillen
Geiste redcn will.

£r erhob sich, und indem
er fortwandelnd seit warts
blickte, sah er das schlafende
Madchen. Er trat naher,
und die ganze liebliche Ge-
stajt iibe^aschte sein Auge.
Das schwankende Abendlicht
gosz einen Schimmer iiber
sie, dasz die gereitzte Fant^-
sie des Jiinglings sich auf ei-
nige selige Augenblicke dem
Wahn iiberKes^y er sey in die
goldoea Zeiten entriickt, wo
die Himmlischen herab zu
dem Gescblechte der sterbli-
chen Menschen stiegen, und
iinter ihnen wandelnd das
miihsame Tagewerk des Le-
bens ihnen erleichterten. £r
kniete nialer, beugte sich ehr-
furchtsvoU iiber die Sclilum-

mernde^

91

Although I had promised
myself a finished drawing of
the whole of this excellent
monument, and of the drun-
ken satyr in Portici, I have
only there few sketches.*
Ah ! never till now did I
so forcibly experience the
lamentable truth, that the
muses will converse with
none but a mind at ease.

He arose, and walked on«
wards. Casting his eyes
around he perceived the
sleeping maid. Hedrewnear,
and was astonished at the
beauty of her form. The
trembling rays of the de-
parting sun glanced faintly
over her countenance, which,
in the glowing imagination
of the youth, appeared to
be divine. Surely, said he,
it is son^e goddess, come for
a time to mingle with man-
kind, and restore the golden
age. She has descended from
heaven, to relax from the toils
of immortality. He kneeled
down, and respectfully bend-
ing over her, gazed on her
features. They wore the

D a respect

.«

/ ,

92 ANALYSIS

memde, und seine triibcMienc
crheiterte sich bey dem An-
blicke des Friedens, der aus
diesem schonen Gesichte
stralte. — Manchmal strccktc
er seine Hand aus, um sie zu
crwecken, aber der frohe Ge-
nusz der Ruhe, welchen er
in dem stilleu Lachein um ih-
renMund erkannte, hielt ihn'
ab| und da ihre Lage nicht
unsicher war, so begniigte er
sich, «eili Auge auf ihrer Ge-
stalt ruhen zu lassen. Er
hatte in Paj>to eine der lieb-
lich dufcenden Rosen unter
den Ruinen gepfliicki ; sie
war. halb verwelkt, aber er
legte sie leise auf den Busen
des Madchens, und entfernte
sich dann n^t dem tiefcn Ein-
druck des Anbliks im Herzen.
HeJiodora erwachte bald
darauf,und erhob sichschneli
wm N eapcl noch vor der Dun-
kelheit zu crreichen. Die
Rose fiel vor ihr nieder, und
sie en othcte bey dem Gedan-
Jcen, da'sz eir> Voriibergehcn-
der sie hipgelept habc. Sie
fuhhe sich heilerer und gc-
starkter durch den kyrzeu
Schlummer, und gieng mu-
thig neucn Erfahiungen ent-
gcgeq.

OP th'e

respect of resignation, and
were heighrened by ^ the
charms of innocence* As
he stretched forth his hand
with the intent to awake
her," he perceived she smiled.
-^I will not, said he, check-
ing himself, her sleep is
peace. — I will not awake
her to this world of care.
She is safe ; for she t)ears the
semblance of heaven, and
heaven will protect its off-
spring. Under the ruins of
Paestum he had plucked a
rose. It was now half faded ;
but he placed it gently on
her bosom and withdrew,
bearing in his mind a deep
impression of her beauty*

Heliodora awoke ere night
assumed her reign. The rose
felling .to the ground told
her she had not sleept un-
observed, and she blushed at
the recollection of having
been exposed to the eyes of
a stranger. She felt herself
refreshed from her slumber,,
and hastened towards Na«
pies, with the hope of reach-
ing it ere dark.

GERMAN LANGUAGE^ 9S

CHAPTER III.

OF THE ADVERB.

I. Its Kinds ^

The substantive is the name of an object ^xia*
iiig by itself, and every thing that is either af-
firmed or denied of it, is originally an adverb^
for which reason it must here be treated of, because
it constitutes the foundation of all the other part$ of
speech.

An adverb denotes all that relates to an ob-
ject as accidental, and ought to be attributed,
principally, to the substantive ; for which reason
it is called adverb^ and may be diyided into tzvQ
kinds, namely, of quality and circumstance.

The adverb of circumstance denotes that which
is not essential to an object, in as far as it relates
to itself alone ; as,

1 . The circumstance of time : heiitey to-day ;
gestem, yesterday ; friih^ early ; spat, late ; nun,
now ; Jetzty at present ; sckon, already.

2. Of duration : stSts, continually ; nochy still ;
immer, always ; .seit, sitice ; bis. until.

3. Of place : hier, here ; da, there ; dort,
yonder; ijueit, far; feruy a distance; oben, above.

4. A circumstance : allein, alone ; eins, one ;
^Wey, two, &c. ; viel, much ; zvenigy little.

5. The manner in which any thing is ex-

pressed: .

94 ANALYSIS OF THE

pressed : ah\ as ; eben, just > zoky how ; desto, so
much.

6. Of the accidental tendency of the mind of
the speaker, as consisting either of affirmation, ne-
gation, question, oi; doubt : ja^ yes ; iieiny no ;
nichf, not ; zvo^ where ^ xvenn^ when 3 zcaniniy why ;
vielleiclify perhaps.

7. Of the degree of strength : sehr, much ;
gar^ very ; fasty almost ; k-aitni, scarcely, &c. &;c.

The adverb of quality, denotes that which
depends on an object referring to itself; as, grosz^
great y klehii little ; scIncarZy black s giit^ good ;
bosej bad, &c.

Manv circumstantial words do, however, in
the mean-time, assume the power of qualities ; as
sclteUi seldom ; feriiy far ; kunftigy in future ; fruhe^
early ; spaty late : others are bothy but in different
significations, eberiy just ; weity far ; gleich, imme-
diately.

2. The Formation of Adverbs.

Adverbs are* either rarf/c^/, derivative y or com-
pound. By means of the two last, other parts of
speech may also be formed into adverbs. To
the radical also belongs those, which receive (for
the sake of their filial sound) the soft e ; as, triibey
dark; miidey tired; behendcy quick; blode^ shy;-
geschwindcy hasty ; gelindcy soft ; langCy long ; bail-
gey anxious ; feigCy cowardly ; schrdgCy unstraight ;
kiscy softly ; bose, badly ; losCy kna,vish ; zveisey wise-

•/<■.

GERMAN LANGUAGfi. 9j

1/ : to which belong also those with an h s ehf'y
soon y friihey early y nahe^ near : and sometimes
geriiey willingly; and heuiey to day.

The adverbs of circumstance are generally ra-
dical or compound words, and sometimes deriva-
tives. Their derivative syllables are ;

en or n ; as, ausxen^ without ; innen^ within ^
unteiiy below ; oben^ above ; hinteny behind ;
vonittiy before y zinccilc?iy sometimes ; morgcriy
to-morrow y sildeny south ; icestoiy west ; qsUuy
east ; nordeUy north ; mitten^ in the middle ;
sdteiiy seldom ; gcge/i, tovyards ; gesteniy yes-
terday ; feni'i far ; ebizclny single.

erj as, heucry this year; /r-nze, further; i miner y
always : and in the prepositions hinteHy behind ;
iibery over ; untej'y under ; auszeVy without.

s to form adverbs of quality from nominals ; as,
abendsy in the evening ; a?iderSy otherwise ;
rechtSy rightly ; jidclistenSy soonest.

sty only in a few ; as, einsty once, or one day ;
langsty long ago; viittdsty by dint; selbsty self;
ndchsty soonest ; sonsty else.

The adverbs of quality are likewise radicals,
compoundsy or derivatives.

The derivation may be known by the prefixed
syllables, be and ge ; but more frequently by sylla^.
bles affixed, some of the principal of which are :
bar^ ely en, w, endy er, eruy ety /, hafty icht, ig, isrh,
Uchy licht, sam. An example of each : nutzbar, use-
ful ; edd, noble -, Itaren, to cast the hair ; kupfem^

of

96 ANALYSIS or THB

of cooper ; suchendy seeking ; bktery bitter ; nuchterrty
sober ; geliebet, beloved ; gelobt, praised; mangel-
Jiafty defective; thorichl, foolish ; ^67?^, benevolent;
neidisk, envious ; manrdichy manly ; laulichty luke*
. warm ; arbeitsaniy laborious.

Many adverbs of quality are compounded; as,
bmimstarky strong like a tree : to which also belong
those with the particles erz and ting.

Words frequently become adverbs by being
compounded with others ; as, anstatty instead ; alle-
zeity always ; allemalily every time.

Often whole sentences are used adverbially ;
as, xu FolgCy according to'; zu Liebcy for love's
sake, &c.

3. Degrees of Adverbs.

In German the adverbs of quality are pecu-
liarly subject to degrees of comparison, as are also
other adverbs. Their comparison is as follows :

The syllable er is affixed to the positive, in
ord^r to form the comparative ; as, schon^ hand-
some ; schoneVy more handsome : but if the positive
ends already in e, the letter r. is only added ; as,
hlSdCy shy; bUider y more shy, &c.

The superlative affixes sty or est, to the the po-
sitive ; as, theiiersty dearest ; oberst, highest, &c.

Some adverbs are irregular in their comparison;
9$^ kochy high ; hohery higher; hochsty highest; nahcy
near; nailery nearer; ndchsty nearest; ^aW^soon;
€hery sooner ; ehesty soonest ; guty good ; besser, bet-
ter; best, best; viel, much ; mehr, mortimeist, most^

Ob-

GERMAN LANGUAGBfe 9t

Observations.

1. The following substantives, denoting the
time of the day, are often used in the Genitive,
case adverbially ; as, abends^ or des Abends^ for an
iem Abend, in the evening ; morgends, or des Mor-
gens, in the morning ; mittags, or des Mittags, at
noon 5 Montags, on Monday -, Dienstags, on Tues*
day, &c.

2. Also with adjectives ; as, grades Weges,
straightways ; keines Weges, by no means -, widri^
gen Falles, . in case of any thing happening to the
contrary; aUen Fdlles, at all events; folgenden
^JTages, on the following day.

* 8. It is precisely the same with regard to nouns
of the feminine gender ; as, nachts, in the night ;
Mitttoocfis, on "Wednesday.

4. With the article prefixed ; as, des Nachts,
des Mittxoochs.

5. They occur with adjectives and pronouns;
aSf meiner Setts, on my part ; alter Seits, on all
parts.

6. When a contraction takes place ; as, dis-
seits, on this side ; jenseits, on the other side.

7. We meet also with a peculiar instance pf
a noun plural being marked with the characteris-
tic s of Jthe Genitive singular ; as^ aUerdings, Xfj
all means*

4. Tlifi

w»-

f Although ^ is aa advtrbial temiinfitioQ, we should not,
* O - kow-

St AKAtTSIS OF T9B

4. The Ij^etkn qf Jtdverhs.

Advftrbar denote erery thing tl»t majr b* said
of an object, dnd consequently are the most nume*
I'ous and useful parts of ^pe^eb. But yet they t»*
qtrire verbs when applied to an object i ai» rfef
Vogel fliegt schnelU the bird flics quick ; die Frvda
fsf teif, the fruit is ripe ; die Uhr $chl4gi xwey, tha
clock strikes two, &c.

But in German we have an idea of an adverb
Virithout any assistance from th6 rtdun. This is doiic
\)j St peculiar kind oi flection (called die KonkrStiQn\
Which consPtitutes the proper idea, by itself, of t\m
adverb, and is done by the vowel e, which acconil-
Ing to circumstances, may adopt the inflection of
genders and declension : for instance,/ friWn th6 adb^
verbs ein, vieU and gut, issue the Other pedttltir
parts ; as, der eine MaiiUy one man 3 dep viele Wietn,
much wine ; das gute Kind, the good dhiM : aad
y^ith the gender and declension ; as, des ein-^m
Mdnhesy of (a) one man ; viel-er Wdn, more w|Mf j
die guten Kinder, the good children.

Thus then> all adjectives consequently arise
from inflection of adt^s ^f quality, and witlleut
them therfe can be no adjectives in Germtii^

r

Jiowever, exceed proper liknits, by modelliDg neiif iKh>lifi8^ Mr
idi0Qld confine oorsclves to those which exxsr^ mi are fane?
tlooed by custom*

G%1S^A» LA.1IPU age; 99

iMta

CHAPTER IV.

SUBdTANtiVEB*

Together with the befqie-iDentipned adveths
ith(5re C3)ist the definite words of wfestftntivcf, which
are tbe article, the numeral, and the projiaun, dt^
noting the circumstances of substantives, and with
the a4jective, the quality of theiyi.

As the Geripan substantive expresses but the^
•genders .and the cases very .imperfectly, the want
is therefore mppUed by these definite worjis, which
with (them make up a perfi^ct declensipn*

This per&ct depknsbm'denptes^ not pply the
.tBSMs i)ut ako :the ipeoder, 4e.finitely, ^ught to be
itKpvesscd wiA every -sttbstHfttiv^. As it very often
jbi^pens Aat mor^ d^uite wprds ^tand before jsl
^HR^ttkPJ^v^j thei^efore they have a doubje declen-
iUfiO, ffne pif which is caUed the d^nitcj the other
^th^ ind^nite.

3Tie j^cftiite one denotes the gcpder : all end

similar in the singular. The indefinite denotes

^W> f&l\^5 v'Wd therefoi:e the Accusative and A^-

TmiwtifKfXOi t]^ feinixunp.and neuter genders, are

iOUB wse. J» the plural ihey are alike in both

In /the magculiae and ixeuter gepders of the
^Wlguiar .ctf the de£ioilte declension, the diCerence
:ll»4h2|t ,j(he asliclfi^ .the qumeraU Wii the pronoun

o 2 receive

100 • ANALYSIS OF THB

receive es ; the adjecrives, howevef, better and
more frequently, en.

Those definite words which precede all others,
like the article and many pronouns, have therefore
the definite declensioBh-alooe ; but those which
follow after, nothwithstanding they often precede
^ substantive alone, as many numerals; some pro-
tiouns, and all adjectives, may be declined in both
manners, either with the definite or indefinite'.

I. Of the Article.

The greater part . of substantives are either
appellatives, or general names, which are applied
to many individuals of the same species. In order
that the student may know which, or how many the
orator means, of the whole species he is speakix^
of, the articles are introduced to supply the still
deficient declension of the substantives.

There ^^re two articles in the G^erman lan-
guage, namely, der^ the, called the definite j
which is derived from the pronoun ; and e/n> a
or an, the indefinite^ "which is derived from the
numeral word* * ,

The 'definite article der possesses a. double use,
1st. it serves for the declension of proper ijames,
and consequently is a mere sign of case 5 and 3d. it
defines th« appellatives, whilst selecting an ob^e^t^
either from the whole species, which may be al*
ready understood ; as, giebmir-da^Buch, i. ©. «f/-
ches vhr dif'tiegt, give me thebooki -mr^hkh

lays

CrSRMAK I.ANGUAOE. 101

iays before you : die Gaste sind nun da^ i. e. welche
zcir erwarUten, the guests are now present, vvi.
which we expected 5 or denotes the whole species,
which may be done in the singular as well as in
the plural ; as, der Mensck ist wie eine Blume, or die
Menscken sind wie Blumeti, man is like a flower, or
men are like flowers 3 both signifying as much as
. idl men. If a more precise definition be necessary,
then- the pronouns are used.

Each article has three genders, viz. the mas-
adine, the femini?ie, and the neuter. The definite
article is declined thus :

SINGULAR.

^ Masc. Fem. Neut.

Nom. der, die, das.

Gen. des, der, des.

Dat, dem, der, dem.

Ace. deny die, das.

PLURAL.*

Nom. die.

Gen. der, (not dererj.
Dat. den, (not denenj*
Ace. die.

The indefinite article denotes, 1st, an inde-
finite object fix)m the whole species, be it which
it may ; as, gieb mir ein Messer, give me a knife ;
' es war einmal ein Mann, there was once a man.
2d. It denotes the whole species, by naming an
indefinite individual out of -it; as, ein Mensch ist
wie eine Blumej man is like a flower -, i. e. one
man, or all men. 3d. It denotes the kind or spe-
cies to which a thing belongs; as, das ist ein

sc/ianes

• The plural if the same for the three genders.

102 MSiAJLWSlS OF THE

)SC^»es Haus ; tjiat is a fine hbuse i €r Hed eincn
iShen Vater^ he has a bad father*

Xhe indefinite a^cle being derived ^oxn tiie
sumericsl ^n, a or »i, conseqneotty d6es not M^
mit of any plural, and has, even in the singukr»
but an imperfect definition, i. e. it denotes in the
Nominative of the masculine^ and that of liie No-
minative and Accusative of the neuter^ witber
sex of casev It is declined as follows :

SINGULAR.

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

Nom.

ein.

eine.

ein.

Gen.

eines.

einer.

eines.

Dat,

etnem.

€i7ier.

emem.

Ace.

ehien.

eine.

ein.

Observation. The definite article can n^cr
stand without its substantive, whereas the indefinite
may ; in which case, however, it adopts the cooeh
^>leat dedte'nsictti signs, which are wanting in the
J^tominatlve and Accusative ^ as, ich habe tin Ham
^gekUttft : question, was fur tins f \. e. wasJmriBm
JStaufJ 1 iiave purchaaied a house: qtiestiony vflsidlDLi
i.T. which iiouse f—</y/ kein Stock da? anslMtr,
hkr4st^ner. Is no stick at hand ? answer, lidasetis
*aie.

I74e xf^the &eTmrf^ Ariicks.

Articles are used in the German as in. other
languages, to limit tlie signification of substantives.

' l.If

. 1« If a substantive be used in it& general nn*
limited signifioatipti, no article is necessary ; if i^ ji
4^buie signification, the article der, tbe, is used ;
if kv an indqfinile, the article ein^ a or an ^ as^
Wein is besser als Bier, wine is better than beer ;
aUck ist nahrhqfter als Wasser, rallk is more nou«
rishing than water ; Engel sind hoher als Menschen^
angcds are superior to men ; die Engely iaelcke sim^
agUn, nmrdeu in die Halle verstosztn, the angeliw
which sinned, were cast into hell ; ei?i Engel hats
ikm prophezeikety an angel has prognosticated it l»
him.

2. Before proper names of men, countries, and
cities, no article is used ; as, nennc mir dock Pi-
zarros Thaten, tell me (then) the deeds of Pizarro';
Spanien ist ein reiches und fruchbares Land, Spain
is a rich and fertile country ; London ist die groste^
Uandelsstadt in Ei^ropa, London is the greatest;
^jercantile^city in Europe.

3. When foreign natnes are introduced, that
h»v^ B0 variation in their termmations, an articif
is usedy particularly in the oblique case, to prevent
ambiguity -, as, Brutus todtete den Cdsar, Brutus
lulled Caesar j ^ kkt in dcr ScbumtM,^ he ]iff» ia
3wi$6erland.

4. Or when a proper name is preceded by a
characteristic epithet;- as, der grosze Friederieh,
the great Trederick ; der tapf ere Karl, the valiant

Charles.

5. )f a pronoun possessive precede a suUtMr
tive, the article is omitted ^ ai^ <km tr ui w§t

Sohn

102 MgXLWSlS OF THE

jchimes Haus\ &at is a fine h6use; €r hed dmt
iShen Voter, he has a bad father*

Xhe mdefinite ai^cle being derived ^oxn liie
sumerical ein, a or »i, consequently dides not ail^
mit of any plural, and has, even in the singulaTi
but an imperfect definition, i. e. it denotes in the
Nosninative of the masculine , and that of liie Vs^
minative and Accusative of the neuteVy wither
sex of casev It is declined as follows ;

SINGULAR.

Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

Nom.

eijiy

eine.

ein.

Gen.

einesy

einer.

eines.

Dat,

einem.

ezjier.

emem.

Ace,

evien.

eine.

ein.

Observation. The definite article can nivcr
Stand without its substantive, whereas the indefinite
may ; in which case, however, it adopts the coook
^eat decJtensictti signs, which are wanting in the
J([4>minatlve and Accusative ; as, ich hahe €in Him
^ggkUu^t : question, wasfiir tins ? i. e. matjwrim
jMsaus? Ihiftve purchased a house: qtiestim, vfkid^l
i.T. which iiouse f—</y/ kern Stock da? jansMer,
hier4st<einer^ Is no stiok at hand ? answer, lisdnetis

JJ^e x>f the &ei^mm, Articles.

Articles are used in the German as in. other
languages, to limit fhe signification of siibstaxifives.

i.if

1. If a substantire be used in it& general an*
limited signi6catioD, no artide is necessary ; if ta «
4^bute signi^catioD, the article der^ tbe, is used ;
if in an itid^finiie, the article ein^ a or an ; as^
Wein is besser als Bier, wine is better than beer j
Miick ist nahrhqfter als Wasscr, milk is more nou-
nshing than water; Engel sind Iwher als Menschertt
angds are superior to men ; die Engel, vxlche sOn^
digUny nmrdeu in die HiiUe verstosztn, the angelfc
which sinned, were cast into hell ; ein Engel hats
ihm proplxzeiket, an angel has prognosticated it t»
him.

2. Before proper names of men, countries, and
cities, no article is used ; as, nenne tmr dock Pi-
zarros Tkaten, tell me (then) the deeds of Pizarro';
Spanien ist ein reiches tmd fruchbares Land, Spain
is a rich and fertile country ; London ist die gro'ste
Handelsstadt in Europa, London is the greatest
Piercantile. city in Europe.

3. liVlien foreign names are introduced, that
have no variation in their terminations, an articlt
is used, particularly in the obliciue case, to prevent
ambiguity ; as, Brutus todtele den Casar, Brutus
lulled Caesar } er kbt in dtr Sckweitm^ he lvn» tn.
Swi$Berland.

4. Or when a proper name is preceded by a
characteristic epithet;- as, der grosze Friederiek,
the greait Frederick ; der tapfere Karly the valiant
Charles.

5. {fa.pronounpossesuve precede a ii]^fl|Hir_^
tlve, the article is omitted ; •< dea» *r igt4

10* ANALYSIS OP THE

Sohrij then he is your son ; ein Preisz ist auf seintn
Koj^ gesetzty a price is set on his head*.

Observation. In the familiar or colloquial
style, the definite article and preposition going be-
fore it, are usually contracted into one word ; as,

am, for an dem j Frankfurth dm Mayn, Frankfort

on the Mayn.

anSy for an das 3 bis ans Ende, to the very end. .

auff^ for auf das ; aufs Buck legen, to place upon

the booly. ^ .

• ■

(fifrchs, for durch das ; durchs Wasser scfuvimmen, to

swim through the water. -

/(ir^y {or fiir das ^ fiirs Geld, for the money.

m, for in dem ; im Anfange^ in the beginning. .

ins, for in das s in^ Wasser hinein rennen, to run

into the water.

vom, for vor dem s vom Himmel, from heaven.

vors, for vpr das ; vors Haus, before the house.

vorm, for vor dem ; vorm Richter, before the judge.

iiberm, for Uber dem; iiberm Wasser, beyond the

water.

iibers, for iiber das ; iibers Meer, beyond the s^a,

unterm, for unter dem s unterm Folk, among the

people.

widers, for wider das /widersGeseiZy against the law..
zum, for zu dem j zum Muster, for a pattern,

zur

* The 'German articles serve occasionally to distinguish
words which have the same sound, but are of a different gen-
der } as, der Aal, the eel 5 die Abl, the awl ; dcr Tbor, the fool ;
das Tb^Tt the gate, Arc. (See a catalogue of similar words in the
fcecnd part of this wprk.)

GERMAil LANGUA/)tt. )05

Mt, for tu der ; sick ^ur Rase rUstrn, to prepaft

for a journey *

n. Of Numerals.

Numerals in German are similar to those of
olher modem languages, viz. the cai^dinal and or-
dinal numbers. I shall speak of them at full length,
and shall treat of the others under their va«
rious denominations.

1. Cardinal l^umbers.

»

The cardinals, from which all other num*
bers are derived, answering to the question wie
viel ? how much ? are the following :

1. ein, eine, ein, or einer, 11. eilf^otdf^ eleven.

eine, eifis, one. 12. zwolf» twelve.

2. ztvei, two. 13. dreizehn AhirtctTi.

3. drei^ three. 14. t^VrzeAn, fourteen.

4. vier^ four. lb. fUnfxehnj fifteen.
^> fiit^i five. 16. sechzehn, sixteen.

6. seeks y si%. 17. siebenzehn^ or sieb'

7. siebeTiy seven. zekn, seventeen.

8. acht, eight. 18. acktzehn, ci^htc^n.

9. neun, nine, 19. neiinzehn, nineteen.

10. ze/ien, OT ze/in, ten. 20. zwanzig, twefttjr.

21. ein

-- 1 '■ - ■■ ■ ■'■■.•> I— a M

* Maojr of the fi^regoing coDtractioni flr4 rtjectdd ia
accQTtte caiiipositioos> but are still very frequent in oottvcnatioa
tti4 dramatic writiog.

% «

U)&

ANALYSIS 0,F THE

21; einundzwanzig, ont 71. einundsiebetizig, one

and twenty.

and seventy, &c.

22. zwey. und zzvanzig, 80. acktztg, eighty.

two and twenty. 81. ein tme achlzig, one

23. drei und zwaiizig,
' three and twenty.

and eighty,, &c.
90. neunzig, ninety.

24. vier und zwanzigy 91. ein und neunzfg, one

four and twenty.

and ninety, &c.

25. fiinf und zwanzig, 100. hundert, hundred,
five and twenty. 101. hundert tend eins^

\

26* seeks und zwanzigy
six and twenty.

27. sieben und zwanzig^

seven and twenty.
^8. acht und zwanzigy
eight and twenty.

29. neun und zwanzigy

nine and twenty.

30. dreiszig, thirty.

hundred and one.
102. hundert und zwey,

hundred ^nd two.
200. zwey hundert, two

hundred.
300. drei hundert, three

hundred.
400. vier hundert, four

hundred.

3 1 . ein und dreiszig, one 1 000. tausend, thousand,
and thirty^ &c. 10,000. zehn tausend, ten

4a vierzig, forty. thousand.

41. ein und vier zig, one 100,000. hundert tausend,

hundred thousand. .
1,000,000. eiyie Million,

a million.
1804. ein tausend acht
hundert und vier,, .
one thousand eight
hundred and four.

. and forty, &c.

50. funf^ig, fifty.

51. ein undfmifzig, one
.. . and fifty, &c.

60^ sechzig, sixty.

61. ein und seckzig, one

and Mxty, &c,
70. siebenzig, seventy.

GERMAN LANGUAGE, *107

Observations on the Cardinals.

1. AVhen the numeral is not placed adjective-
ly, but concludes the sentence, without any help
from a noun, it is customary to say eiiis instead
of cin s as, habt ihr ein Federmesser ? have you a
penknife ? answer : hier ist eins, here is one.

2. EiUf eine^ ei?2, one, is the same word like
the definite article, only used with a different power,
and is declined in the same manner, only pro-
nounced, as a numeral, with a stronger accent ; as
ein Mann, one man ; eine FraUy one woman 5 ein
Kindy one child. When it stands by itself, but with
a reference to an antecedent substantive, the ter-
mination er is added in the Nominative singular for
the masculine, and es far the neuter gender, in
the J^ominative and Accusative cases, ex. gr. habt
ikr einen Slock ? have you a stick ? hier isl einer,
here is one ; haben sie ein Schmipfttich ? have
you a pocket handkerchief? hier ist eins, here is

one, &c,

3. Ein, eine, ein, one, may have the definite
article preceded, then it is declined like the se*
cond form of adjectives 5 as,

Singular,

Nom. der eine^ die eine, das eine, the one.

Gen* des einen, der einen, des ei?ien, of '—

D?tt dem einen, der einen, demevyen^ to —

Ace, den eineiht die eine, das eine, the one-

The plural is sometimes used for the purpose

p 2 of

—

108 AKAI^ySIS Of THE

of distinguishing certain classes of individual oB*
jects^ as the one s^t, and the mother :

Plural.
Nom. die einen^
Gen. der einen.
Dat, den einen.
Ace. die einen.

We sometimes find the pronouns prefixed ; as,
dieser eine Majin, this single manj dieses einen
Mannes, of this single man, &c.

4. The numbers zzveiy two, and dreiy three,
are susceptible of the inflection of theGVw/ViVand
Dative cases ; as, zzveier Britder Erbtheil, the iii-
heritance of two brothers ; dreier Manner Todt,
the death of three men ; mit zweie?i, dreien kam*
Jif^^i to fight against two, three*.

5. All other cardinal numbers are suscep-
tible of the Dative termination in en; as, sich viere%,
sechsen^y achten zwanzigeny &'c. tvidersetzen, to resist
four, six, eight, twenty, &:c,

6. Com-

* Many of the ancient writers have assigned three gen*
ders to the second numeral zu/ei, namely, Masc. zween j Pern.
zwo ; Neut. zwei ; to -vrhieb mode Luther strictly adhered
'v^ .]^s ^rt nslatipn 9f (l^c bibU^ whicl^ is reckoned the |xaiTi>t
among all ot^^r Gerp^n perforipancyes. The modern authorf^
however, do not .admit ^ny other distinction of genders in the
cardinal numbers than one. ItDust here also observe^ that tb^
iDltmehili der andere, the other. It often *4i8ed as a synonynx^

f

C£aMAK LANGUAGE* 109

6. Compound numbers change merely the
last part of the word ; mit sechzehien, with sixteen ;
mitjunf U7i4 zwanzigen^ with twenty-five 5 tHit vier
kunderten, with four hundred j mit tausenden, with
one thousand.

7. In speaking substantively of the cardinal
Qumbeis, for instance of the figures in the catds,
they are considered as the feminine gender ; as,
€me eiUi or eins^ a one ; eine zzvei\ a two, &c.
Their plural has the syllable en affixed j as, zwei
einen^ two ones ^ ziod vieren, two fours, &c.

8. Hundert and tausend are used as substan-
tives, with the neuter article ; as, das Hundert, the
hundred ; das Taiisend, the thousand ; which cor-
responds with the English mode of expression.

2. Ordinal Numbers. '

The ordinal numbers denote the order or the
rank of things, and answer to the question, der
wievielstCy the quantity or amount of a thing.

The formation of the ordinals is made, by-
adding the termination te to the cardinals, fixmi
one to nineteen inclusive (except der erste, the
first I der dritte^ the third ; which are irrc^lar, and
ought not to be styled eimte^ dreile^.J and steftom
t¥rcnty to the lost ^ as^,

der erste, the first. derJUnfte^ the fifth.

— asweite, the second. -^ seeks te, the six A.

— T dritte, the third. — siebcnte, the seventh.

— vierte, the fourth. — : achte^ the eighth.

der

110 • ANALYSIS OP THE

derneunte, the ninth. der dreiszigste^ the 30th,

' — zeknte, the tenth. — vierzigste, — 40th.

— elfte, the eleventh. — /iinfzigste, — ' 60th.
•— zwol/te, the twelfth. — sechzigste, — 60th.

— drazehnte, the 13th. — sieboizigste,-^ lOtU.

■

'— vierzeh?ite, — l4th. — achtzigste, — 80th.

— funfzehnte, — 15th. *— » neunzzgste, — 9qth*
•— sechzehnte, — 16th. — himderslCy the 100th.

— siebenzeknte, — 17th. — hiindert under stCyOtit

— achtzekntCy — 18th. hundred and first.

— neunzehnte, — 19th. — tausendste^the lOOOih.
-— zwanzigste^ — 20th. — tausend acht hundert
*— ein und zwajtzigstCy und erste, the thoii-

the twenty-first. sand eight hundred

— xwei und zwanzigste, and first.

the twenty-second.

Observation on the Ordinal Numbers.

1. The ordinals may be brought under ajl
-fornas of adjectives, except the first or adverbial^
.which is not usual.

.2. When ordinal numbers join a proper naine,
;they are put behmd, with the definite article j as>

- Norn. Georg der dritte, George the third.

Gen. Georg des dritten, of George the third,

Dat. Georg dem dritten^ to George the third.

Ace. 'Georg den dritten, George the third.

3. When the ordinals are compound, the lat-
ter part only is declined 5 3ls, der zwei und'zwanr

ztgste.

GERMAN LANGUAOE* 111

Tigste^ the twenty-second ; des zwei iind zwanzig-
sten, of the twenty-second.

4. To distinguish one from another, we sayt^
der andere ; as, ich habe zwei Briider, der eine ist
ein Kat{fmann^ der atidere ist eiil Mahler^ I have
two brothers, one is a' merchant, the other is a
painter.

5. The adjective, halb, half, joined with ah
ordinal number, is expressed thus : anderthalb^ one
and a half 5 dritthalb, two and a half, &c.*

6. The numbers of fraction are-formed from
the ordinals, by adding the letter / i as das Driltel^
das Viertel, das FiinfteU i. e, the third, fourth,
fifth (part.) The syllable tel is an abbreviation of
the word Theil, part ; the same as to express das
driite TTieil, the third part ; das vierte Tlieii, the
fourth part, &c.

7. Although the ordinal numbers exclude all
degrees, there are, n,otwithstanding, some instances,
where the degrees of^comparison are usual. They
are formed thus^ erster, first; and letzter, last;
comparative, ersterer and letzterer, which is used
for denoting the order, if we speak only of two
things ; as, ich habe zwey Biicfier, ein Englisches U7id
ein Deutsches, das erstere habe ick schon gelesen, tmd

dds

* Th^ same adjective^ when pot before a cardinal number^
in speaking of the hour of the day, is rendered ihus: halb
^ half after twelve j halt zwei, ^^If past one ; haii dm,
half past two, &c.

Iw

tf2 AKALTSiS OF THE

dm Utztere werde ick morgtn kseriy I hare tt^
books, an English and a German one ; the* first I
tere already read^ and the latter I diall begin to*
morrow.

3* MiiceUaneous Numerals.

I. Distributives.

The following numbers serve to distribut#
things into classes ; they are of various kinds ; as,
erstens, erstUch, xtim ersten, Jur das erste, first, in
the first place ; zzveitens, zum zzoeiten, fur das
zweite, secondly s dritiens, zum drittenjiir das dritte,
thirdly, &c-

2. Einerlei, of one and the same sort , zzoeier-
lei, of two different sorts ; dreierla/y of three sorts;
viererlei, of four sorts ; hundert und fiinferleiy of one
hundred and five sorts ; hwiderterlei, of one hundred
sorts ; keinerlei, of no sort ; mancherlei^ of diflfe*
rent sorts ; vielerleyy of various sorts ; allerlei •, of
all sorts.

3, Eins und eins, or je eins und eins^ one by
one ; zzvei und zwei, orje zzvci, two by two s drei
und drei J or je drei, three by three, &c. einen Tag
iiber den andern, every other day ; or, zu ztveien,
zu dreien, zu viere?i, zu funfeuy ^ii sechsen, zu
hunderten, by hundreds ; zu thausenden, by thou-
sands.

4. Paar-

•mmfmt0tmi'^^tmmmfii^mmmm

* Lei la an aDcieot German word^ which signifies speciet
or sort.

• * 4. Paarzveisey or Paar und PaaVy paif, [ot
tbuple) by pair ; didzendxmse, by dozens ; hiii^
dertweise^ by hundreds ^ millioTttvehe^ by millions.

5. %wd Mann hoch^ two men in front ; drei
Mann hochy three men in front j vier Mann hoch^
four raeii in front ; Jiinf^ sechsy sieben^ acht^ newiy
zekn, Mann hoch^ five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten,
men in front, &c.

2. Repetitions.

^Thty are of two sorts, the first are formed
fi'om the cardinals^ bv addin^: the word ??/«/ to
each. They answer to the question, xi^ie viebnal?^
how often ? as, einmal^ once, one time ; cin ein-
ziges rnal, one single tiiiie ; zzveimal^ twice, rfm-
injaly thrice ; viermal, four times ; funfmaly five
times; secksmai, six times 5 siebenmaly ^evcti timcs^,
r^khftmaly ten times, &c.

.The numbers of repetition of the second spe-
cies, are formed by adding the same word 7nal^

to

* The word mal may also be added to indeterminate nxxm"
bcrs, and other words in the same manner j as, diesmal, for,
this tipie ; jenesmal, for that time ; vielmaly mehrmalj oftmal,
many times, often ; fnanchmal, several times, every now and
tlien 5 keinmaly niernal, never. We may convert the same into
adjectives, by changing mal into trialig ; as, etjimalig, that
which happens once; zweimalig, which happens twice, &c.
ExAMPLi^s. Ein dtdmaliger ^ngriff, an attack roade^at three ,
different times ; der viermaiige Einhrucb dcs Feindes^ the ir-
ruption of the enemy, made at four different times.

iI4 ANALYSIS bF THE

to the ordinals, which marks the tiiie of hifi
vften ; as, das erstemaly the fiVst time ; dai zxMiU^
ihaly the second time,* .

3. Multiplications.

The numbers of multiplication are fornaed; hy
adding to the cardinals the syllable /acA, ox fdUigi
as, einfach^ simple, or single ; zzveifach\ zweifdlt^i
Or doppelty double ; dreifach, dreifdltig^ triple, &c.

They ma^ be declined i^ adjectives ; thus, ein
einfacher FadeUy a single string; eines eirifachen
t^ddenSy 6f a single string ; eine ziveifdclie Schnuri
a double string; die dreif ache Krone^ the tripl6
cfoWn.

4. Collectives.

They are substantives, expressing a nunafeer f
asj das Paar, the pair^L (couple) ; das Zehend, th«

tehthj

t

■.•■.'*• , '• ' ' » ' ■

* MHl \% a genuine substantive^ and is dctlined with thh
ot^iHit], to >friiich it IS joined, thus :

Nom. das Er sterna I, the first time.
Gen. des Erstenmah, of the first tithe*
, . Dat. dem Efsienmale. to the first time, &c.

' 1 1 « . • ...

We also say %unt erstenmakf Jur das erstemali iot the Ait
timef zum zweitenmal, &:c.

If we add, to the ordinal numbers the termloation inali^.
We have adjectives 5 as, erstmalig, that which arrives, or exlstil
for the first time ; xiveitmalig, that which arrives, or happeai
for i second time, &c. Examples. Ibr erstmaliger ISesucb, your
first visits m^ine zweitmalige Reise nacb Berlin^ 1117 second jour^
pe}r to Berlin -, si^r drittmalige Einbrucbdes Fmdis, the invasion
of tlie enemy, in^de sji £;>i»rtfa timc«

tenth 5 das Hutzendy the dozenth ; das Mandek 'the
fifteenth ; das Schock, the sixtieth ; das Hundred^
the hundredth 3 das Tausend, the thousandth.

. > . • i

5. Cyphers,.

die Nulle,

nought.

0.

— Eins,*

der Einsepy

one.

1.

~ -J^we-z,

-— ZtoeieTf

two.

?!•

-— Drei,

— DreicTy

three.

1 . i

S.

~ FiVr^

fpur.

#.

— -F'ttVi

•^ FunftTy

five.

$.

!T- Sechsy

-^ SechseVy

six.

^•

— • SiebeUy

-^, SiebeneTy

seven.

7.

r- -^^cA;,

-r- 4chtery

eight.

8.

•r- iVl?W»,

— Neunery

•

nine.

9-

— ^e-Aw,

—- Zehmry

• ten.

IP.

j$. Tii^ Fo/we ^ the Cypken, in the decimal

f • X ■ . ' . , ?

Progression.

Die Etnheity or rfer Einery tt^ t^nit;
ZehncTy the tenth ; rfer Hundert^Vy the hundredth
tfer Tausendery the millionth.

7. Indefinite Numbers.

\ » ■ -

These are adjectives, which designate an indelen*
minate (^[uantityj as, xvenig, little ; pzW, much; TweAr,

Q 2

more;

r «4 ! i ; h

, J ■■•■'' ',

<mr ¥ ■ ■ [ '

"* Bgr laying ^/e Bins, die Zwdy &c. the word ^ft^n 9f
mrnb^, ii uxUexitoQd I ai^ the mmtiriwo^ &c«

116 ANAI.YSIS OF THB^

more* ; mancfier, many a one ; einige^ ctHcbe, se^^
veral ; alle, all ; keinery no one, &c.

When they are accompanied by an article
and a subsianiive, they are declined like other ac}-?
jectives; as,

Norn, der wenige Flcisz^ little application.

die wenige Miihey little trouble.

das wenige 6V/rf, little money.
Gen. des zvenigen Fleisses, SiC. &;c.

If, however, the former words stand without
an article, and th^::: substantive to. which they relate
is npt expressed, but merely understood, then they
are declined like the adjectives, but without an ar-
ticle; as, viele sagen dasZy &LC. many saiy that, &c. j -
xvenige wissen dasZy &cc. few know that, &c.f

When the former words stand without an ar^
tide, but with a substantive expressed immediately
after, we use them adverbially, in this manner :

Nom. vielGeldy much money; instead ofvieles Geld.
Gen. viel Geldcs werth^ the value of much nioney ;

for vielen Geldes li^erth,

Nom,

.- . - ■ I . . . I. I. . ■ , , ,, , II I

* To decline mehr, more, which is the comparative ofvielt
we make a new comparison, by adding the syllable er, which '
makes mehrer, then we affix the terminations convenient t)iU8 : '

Nom. der mehr ere Th'eil, the greater part.

Qen. Uesmehr^refiTbeifs, of the greater pact, &c.

•J- These words never stand alone in the singular nomber,
except in the neuter gender ; bs, wertiges, or ein weniges, a little,
er a small portion i vieles or ein ^vieles ; a large portion ; m^ht

m

reres, or ein mehreres, a greater, or a larger portion.

GBRMAN LANGUAOE.

IIT

»| •Nomrrii?/ gute Menschen^ many good men ; for

viele gute Menschen.
Gen., vid filter Memelien, of many good men ; fo^

vicler gutc' Alcnsch^iiy &c,

IIL Of Pronouns.

A pronoun is a word used instead of a noun,
•to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same
word. Tliese consist of five kinds ; as,

1. Personal and reciprocal Pronouns.

2. Possesswes,

3. Demonstratives.

4. Relatives and Interrogativcs.

5. Miscellaneous Pronouns.

ITie pronouns, when used as substantives^ stand
by themselves ; when as adjectives^ they require
$1 substantive. When a pronoun accompanies its
substantive, it is conjunctive^ when standing alone,
absolute.

As the pronouns frequently precede all other
definite nouns, most of tliem assume the definite
declension ; some few partake of both, and seve-
ral of them only the indefinite declension.

The personal pronouns answer to the three
persons of the singular and plural. They are sub-
stantives, and admit another one to be placed with
them ; as, dUy Konig in Israel, thou, king of Is-
rael ; du^ Mutter der LiebCy thou mother of love ;
4Ui Erhalter der Meiischeny thou, nourisher of all
inen ; du^ Gottin der^ Weisheity thou, goddess of wis-

dorn^

lit ANALYSIS pF rnU

4om, &c. Tbey designate the persaa, either 4iiH
tinctlyy as, ichj rfi<, er^ sie, es s or indistinctly, as,
Jemand, somebody ; nisrnand^ nobody \ m^n, ono,

or they ; and es, it, . r*.,^..-

The pronouns o( the ^rst and second person furc

»

used with all genders ', but the ^A/rrf is different
in the singular in this respect. In the plural, how-»
pver, they ar? all the same. They have only thf
definite declension, which, yet, is defective in si^
yeral cases ; because zcA, mich, dti^ dich, uns^ euc1\,
and er, have no declinable syllables.

1. Personal^.

First Person.
Singular. i Plural.

N. ich, I. N. zvir, we.

G. meiner,ormein,ofme. G. unser, of us,

D. mir, to me.
A. michi me.

D. uns, to us.
A. uns, us.

Second Person.

Singular.
N. du, thou.

G. deiiieVy or dein^ of thee.

p. rf/r, to thee.

A. dich, thee.

Plural.
N. ihvy yoi*.

G. ett(?r, of yoq.

D. ewcA, to you.

A. etich, you.

lliird

dsi^MAN LANIQUAGE. 11^

Third Person,

Singular.

Mate. Fern. Ncut

N. er, he. sic^ she. esy it.

6r seineTy or sein^ ikrery or ihvy seiner^ or idn^
of him. of her. of il.

D. ihrriy to him. zAr, to her. ihrky to it.

A; ihriy ^ Wm. ^/e, her. eSy it.

Plural.
N. i-^f, they (for all genders).
tJ. ihr€7*y of them.
D. iftneB, to them^.
A. sky them.

Reciprocal for the third iPersoov

Singular.
N. j[n6ns.)

G. seiner y or ^e/«, zVir^r, or lAr, seiner^ or f^iw^

of himself. of herself. of itself.

D* ^/cA, to himself, to herself, to itself.
A. sichy himself, herself, itself.

Pluml.
N. (none.)
G. ihrety of themselves.

D. sichy to themselves.
A. sichy themselves.

Remarks on tlte above thymoun^.

1 . The Genitive case of these proriouns, in both
numbers, is limited as to its use. It occurs after

cer-

Il20 ANALYSIS OP Tflli

certain verbs, ex. gr. Er lachet meinir, he laugb .
at me ; er spottet ihrer^ he mocks them, &c. It is
likewise joined with some prepositions, by means of
connecting letters ; as, meinetwcgen^ for my sake }
deifielioegen for thy sake \ ihretitwegai or ikreiwegeni
on their account. Thus, meinethalben, deinetliatberii
meinetwillen^ 6r um meinetivilieny &c. &c.

2. There is not a more absurd custom^ than
the German manner of addressing each other in con-
versation and in letters. They do not confine
themselves to a single personal • but, like the. Ita*
lians, Spaniards, and Portuguese, make use of the
Jlrst, secondy and third persons indiscriminately, and
in many instances use the plural, when speaking ,
to a singte person, as if he w^ere more than one,
which is done in English and French, by saying
you and vans, instead oithou. Yet this is not quite
so irregular as the other, where the person is address-*
^d as if he were not the same to whom we
spoke, which is the case, in rriaking use of the
third personal ; a§, xvas macht er ? zvas macht sie f
literally, what is he doing ? what is she doing ?
How is it possible tliat an Englishman could sup-*
pose, that in these questions the persons are
meant, to whom they relate, if he does not
know that it stands for, what art thou doing ? in
both cases. And how absurd to address one single
person in the third pronoun plural ; as, was machen
sie ? literally, what are they doing ? which may
stand either for a male oxfemaky which the Ger-

mansj

GERMAir LANGUAGE* 121

mans make use of for persons to whom they owe
respect.

However, as this absurd mode of address pre-
vails amcmg all ranks of people, it is here the
proper place, and my duty, to elucidate the whole
in striking examples,

Z)ii, thou, is used in addressing the Supreme
Being ; as, Gott ! auf dich hqffe ich, du wirst mich
erreiten, God ! it is in thee alone I trust ; thou wilt
deliveir me.

It implies sometimes familiarity, founded upon
affection and fondness* : it is the pleasing appel-
kticH), when parents speak to their children, or
brothers and sisters to one another. It is the language
of love and conjugal felicity ; and with friends, it
is considered as a token of intimacy and confix
dence. It is also, in another manner, applied as
the reverse of ceremonious politeness. It is made
use of to people in very subordinate situ^ions ;
for instance, by the officer to his soldiers, or a
judge to a criminal, and in speaking to a Jew. It
is often heard in quarrels and opprobrious language,
when decorum and propriety are disregarded. All
these applications may be reduced to the notion

of

* There is a pccaliar verb in German, which expresses
the second personal, vi%. duizen, answering to the French iw
ioyir, . Und jetxt nocb erne Biite, Lieber, nenne mich du, and
yet still one more request, roy dearest friend, always call me
Mow.

122 AI7ALY8I6 OJT THB

of fatnilkrity, differently modified ; as, mein lieher
Sohn, da hast noch eine andere Pflicht zu volhichen^
my dear son, thou hast still another duty to per-
form ; hdre Judy zoos giehst du mir vor diesen R^ I
here, Jew, how much wilt thou give me for this
coat ?

//tr, you, is applied to one person* and gene-
rally conveys the idea of that condescending ft-
miliarity, which is used towards inferiors, as a
master towards his servants ; it is also bestoWed
upon people of low condition ; as, Johann ! ihr
muszt in die Stadt geheuy John, you must go to the
city. ; Sophie^ ihr miisztmch eilen^ Sophiai, you mjast
make haste*

£r, he. Persons of rank will speak to tradeis^
people in the t&iird person of the cihgnkr, thus :
Meister Jung ^ag er miry &!<:. Mister Jung^ teH
me, &c. ; setze ersich, seat yourself .^ Frofir^Fueh*
sinriy sag sie mir dock, Mrs. Fuchs^ tell me then^ &c. i
setze sie sick, sit down.

Sie, they, is used for persons to whom ^6 ioWe
respect, -and is employed both in the masculine atid
feminize ; as, fneiii Herr, He iverdeti mir eine groszt
Ehreerzeigen, Sir, you willdb me agreait honour;
. Madafjie^ zcoUen sie so giltig seyn. Madam, will you
be so kind, &c. &c.

3. The. power of the reciprocal prontouns is
this : the first and second personals themselves are
u^ed reciprocally, without any addition. Myself,
thyself, ourselves, yourself, and yourselves, are ex-
pressed

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 12S

pressed by micht dich, uns, eiich. For the third
peraQA there is a peculiar reciprocal, which may
be jseen aboye. In this respect, the German lari-
guage differs from the English, where the i^ci-
thi procals are composed of the possessive pronouns
and the termination self. We have a word which
{m3w:ers to self, which is the invariable pronoup
selbst, or s^ll>er y but that may be annexed not
o»ly to pronouns, but to any substantives, to which
it imports an emphasis of distinction. (See the
invariable pronoun self^ explained at the end of
the pronouns.) It will be understood, that as thfe
thurd personal serves as a pronoun of address, the
third reciprocal must correspond with it ; as, seize
tp siclif Jiterajjy, Jet him seat himself, i. e. sit dowpi
S€lz0 sie sichf literally, let her seat herself, 2. e.
sit dpwiir The first applies to a man of inferior
coodition^ and the latter to a woman of the sam6
condition ; but setzen sie sich, the plural, as a po-
lite mode of speaking, literally, let them seat them-
selves, for sit down.

4* The neuter of the third person singular, is
used as the subject Nominative before and after
yert)s, and is joined with all genders and numbers j

ex. gr.

Es ist der Vater, it is the father.

— — die Mutter J i mother,

— — das Kindy ■ ■ . ■ child.

Es sind Manner y they -are men.

— — Weiber, ■ women.

■ ' Kinder, i children.

R 2 Es

124

AKALTSIS OF THE

Ei i$t ein Mann hievy there is a man here.

■ i ■ eine Frau hier. ■ woman here*

Es sind Leutc hier^ there are people here.

Ein Marm ist es, it is a man.

Manner sind es, they are men.

5. Es is often contracted with other pronouns^ ?
as, ichsy mirsy michs, dirs, dichs^ ihrs, instead c^
iches, mir es, mich es, dir es, dich es, ihr es.. I
good composition these contractions ought to l>
avoided, though they are more frequent in coll
quial language.

2. Possessives.

These pronouns have three genders in
singular, and are declined in the same manner
the indefinite article, and the first numeral ; as.

Singular.
Masc. Fern.

meine,
meiiier^
meiner,
meine.

Nt'iit.
mein, my.
meines.
meinem,
mein.

Plural,

meine.
meiner.
meinen.
meine.

N. mein,
G. meines,
D. meinem,
A. meinen.

Like this are declined the following 5 as,
dein, deine, dein, thy,
sein, seine, sein, his, or its.
ihvy ihre, ihr, her.
unser, unsere, unser, our.
eiier, eure^ euer, your.
meiner, meine, meines, mine,
deiner^ deine, deines, thi^e.

GEHMAN LANGUAGE. 125

. seiner y seine y seines, his.

- ihrery ikre, ibres, hers.

: unserer, ttnserey unseres, ours, ^

eurevy eure, cures y yours; or,
der meiney die meiney das meine^ mine.

- der meinige, die meifiige, das meinige^ mixie. 8ic.

Remarks on the Possessives.

1 . These pronouns are either joined to a noun ;
TiSimein Vatery my father; deine Schwestery thy
sister ; sein Kindj his child, &c. Or they stand by
theipselves, and the masculine gender, in the No^
minative singular, sometimes receives the termi-
nation er ; and the neuter, in the Nominative and
Accusative, that of es.

, When these terminations are added, it is a
sign that a noun is understood, ex. gr, das ist meiji*
Stocky that is my stick ; neiny es ist meinefy or der
meinigCy no, it is mine : Wessen Ilund ist das? whose
dog is that ? es ist unserery it is ours : Jst diesz met"
neSy oder Hires ? is this mine, or theirs ? nein es ist
deinesy oder euerSy no, it is thine, or yours, &c.

2. In

. * Mein and metner are . generally said to aoswer to wy
and mine in English, They do in the instances before-men*
tioned. There is one construction^ however^ where in English
the possessive mine is to be rendered not by metner, but by mm,
namely^ when it is separated fronx its noun by a verb ; as, diesd
Bucb ist mein, this book is mine 3 dieses Pferd ist mein, thia
horse is mine. The above^ meiner, meine, meines, deiner, sei^
ner, kc, are declined like gutery gute^ gutes.

. ^

126

ANAXiYSIS OF TH«

2. In unser, euer, the e iKjfore r is frequently
dropt, when a syllable follows it s as, unsrer, un*
srersj eurer, euresy for unsereri unserers^ euerer^ fuC"
resy This omission is arbitrary.

3 . Dero and ihro (instead of ihr) your, or yours^
are indeclinable, and are merely used in ancient and
ceremonious language. They serve to address per-
sons of high rank.

4. We sometimes find the possessives put after
Genitive cases ; 2i% des Mann seiii Pferd, the man *s
horse ; der Frau ihr Kind^ the woman's child j for
des Marines Pferd, das Kind d^r Frau, &c. . but
this is not classical.

S. Demonstratives.

Under this head are comprized all those which
point out or determine the subject to which they
irefer. The declension of those which are properly
3etnanstrative, is thus :

Singular.

Masc. Fern. Neut.

N. diesery diese, dieses, or dieszy this.

G« dieses^ dieser, dieses^

X>. diesem, diesery diesem.

A. dieseriy diese, ditses^ ox diesz.

JJ. ienir^ jency jenes^ that,

Cr. jeftesy jenery jenes.

Xi. jeneniy jener^ jenem.

A. jeneny jene^ jmes^

Plural.

diese.

jdieser.

' diesen.

diese.

jerter.
jenen.
Jene.
Be-

GSRMAN LAiroaAGE.

127

Remarks.

1. It sometimes happens, that wc find two
demonstrarives put together in the Genitive and
Dative singular and the Genitive plural. , Tlie last
ofthem may assume the termination en, instead of
^r> tniy es : this is done to preserve the harmony
of the language ; as, der Rath dieses undjenen Mail-
nes, the advice of this and that man ; die AleiimU'
gen dieser und jtneu GelehrteUy the opinions of
these and those scholars; von dieser undjenen Bege^
beubeit, of this and th^t event ; aus diesem undjenen
Britfcy out of such or such a letter.

2. The neuter singular of these pronouns is put,
indiscriminately, before and after verbs ; as, dieses
or dies% ist ein Besen, this is a hroojfn jjenes ist eine
Burste^ that is a brush 5 diesz sind FremdCy these,
are strangers ; was fur ein Bawn ist dies% ? what
sort of a tree is this ? zva^ fiir eine Frucht ist
diesz ? what sort of a fruit is this ? was fur Leutc
sind diesz ? what people are these ?

The determinative pronouns^ which determine
a subject, are generally followed by a relative.
They are declined thus :

Singular. Ehirafl.

Masc

.Fern.

Neut.

\

N. dery

diey

dasy that.

die.

G. desseuy

deren^

dessreji.

derer.

D. devfiy

dery

dem.

denai.

A. den^

die;^

das.

die.

Sin-

I2S ANALYSIS OF TH&

Singular. Flural*

Masc. Fern. Neuf.

N. derjenigCy diejenige, dasjenige, diejenigen.

that.

G. desjemgen, derjenigen, desjemgen. derjenigen.

D. demjenigeriy derjenigai, demjenigen. denjenigen.

A. daij^nigen, diejem'ge, day'enige. diejenigen.

N. derselbe, dieseWcj dasselbe, dieselbeh.

the same.

G. desselbeUy dei^selben, desselben, dcrselben.

jy. demselben^ derselben, demsdbat. denselben.

A. denselben, dieselbr, dasselbe. dieselben.

Remarks.

1. These pronouns may stand by themselves,
or be joined ttf substantives ; as, deir, zoelcher
mddglebty ist toeisCy he, who lives moderate, acts
wisely; der Mensch, zvelcher in der Jugend spart^^^
ist walirhaft klitg^ that mart, who is saving in his
youth, acts truly prudent, &c.*

2. The relative generally follows after derje*
nige, but very seldom after cfer, and derseWe; as,
es ist der Herr^ it is the genleman ; es ist der^
selbe Herr, it is the sanle gentleman.

3. When der stands by itself, some local ad-
verb is generally joined with it 5 as, der da, that

man

^Wi^'^—^^iMiii— ^— i— ^P ■ p«^i— IM^^^i^ illli I. .■■■ ■ ^

* We must not confound the demonstrative pronoun deft
with the definite article, der, die, dqs. The former has a '
strongejr accent in proounciatioa than the definite article.

GERMAN LANGXTAOE. ^ Kft

man there ; der hier^ that man here' ; der dort, that
man yonder ; tvessen Pferd ist das f whose horse is
that ? dessen da, or desz da, that man's ; wem ge-
hSrt es ? to whom does it belong ? dem da, to
that man.

4. Das, like diesz and es^ is used absolutely, in
connexion with different numbers and genders ; as,
das ut der Knabe, that is the boy ; das ist die Toch-
ter, , that is the daughter ; das sind die BUcher,
those are the books,

5. The adverb eben is sometimes put before
the. demonstrative pronouns, and so also the first
nunieral ein ; the first gives an additional force,
and the latter increases the meaning ; as, eben der,
diei das, the very same ; eiu wid eben derselbe, one
and. the same.

, 6. Derselbige^ dieselbige, dasselbige, Ao not vzxy
in signification, from derselbe. Der ndmliche und
d^rgleiche, are mere substitutes for derselbe.

1. The following belong also to the list of de-
monstratives ; as, selbiger, ge, ges, that, or the said
(man) -, solcher, eke, ches^ or ein solcher, che, ches, or
sa ein 9 e, ein, such a ohe.

8. Instead of the demonstrative pronouns with

certain prepositions, the local adverbs, hier, here,

and i2a5 there, are frequently made use of : hier is

then changed into hie, before a consonant, and da

is transformed into dar, before a vowel -, as, hier--

wit, or hiemit, herewith -, dawn, thereof; daran,

thereon.

5 4. Re"

wo

ANALYSIS OF THK

4. Relatives and Inter rogatives.

*

The English distinguish in their relatives^ the
pronouns who and which, applying the former to
persons, and the latter to animals and things. The
Germans only use welcher, in relation to the one
and the other. In English, that supplies oftctt thfe
place of who or which, for the purpose of avoid-*
ing repetition. In this manner the Germans make
use of der, die, das, instead of toelcher, wclche^
Xpekhes. Declension of welcher :

Masc.
,N. welcher.

Singular,

Fern.

welche.

G. welches, welcher,
D. zvelchem, welcher,
A. welclien, xtelche.

Neut.

welches, who
or which.

welches,

welchem,

zvelches.

N. wer^ who ? was what ?

G. wessen, whose?

D. wem, to whom ?

A. wen, whom ? was what ?

Plural,

welche^

welchern
wfelchen^
wekke.^

^ \

iiemarks. ,

T. i)er, may be also used as a demonstrative
pronoun -, but as der conveys often two meanings,
and may produce misconceptions, especially 'fh>m
the proximity of a similar word, we rather pfefer
xvelcher, instead of ckr ; as, ick, welcher {inst^Bd of

der J

GERMAN LANaXJAOE. 131

^er) viele gute Bucher gelesen habe, I who have
tead many good books, &c.

a. Mer, asarelative> cannot be joined with
a substantive ; for instance, der Knabe^ can never
express which bay.

S. The Genitive plural q( der, die, das, is pro-
^eriy derer, but when ia a relative signification^ it
IS often changed into der^n -, as> Fremde, deren An-
kuTife nnbekannt war, strangers, whose arrival being
tinkjiownii

4. The adverb so, so, occasionally serves as a
substitute for the relative ; as, das Mittel, so ich
ieuch vorg^schlagen habe, the remedy, which I have
proposed to you ; diejenigeny so mit mir redeten,
those. Who spoke to me.

5. Wer, who, as a relative, always begins a
sejitence, but never c;in be joined with a substan-
tive ; as, wer Knabe, which boy, ought to be, wel-
ther Knabe.

6. The neuter was, what, may either commence
ia sehtence, or be placed after an antecedent ^ aS)
was ich gesagt habe ist zmhr, what I have said is
true.

'7. The relative pronouns are sometimes omit*
ted inEngli^, and are only understood; as, the
per^H Ilo^e, i. e. whom I Jme : in German they
must always be expressed, ♦

9* The pronouns «fc^r ; neuter was; andzvei*-
cher, Welches welches, also answer to questions, or in
Other words have the signification of interrogatives.

s 2 Wer,

132

ANALYSIS OP TH»

IFer^ is applied to persons, either male or femafe,
and was to things. They ask the question in a ge-
neral way, as the English who and what, therefore
they are tiever joined with a substantive. IVelcJiery
tvelchey welches, refers to particular objects, and
may be united with substantives. It answers to
the English interrogative which ; as, welcher Knabe,
which boy ? welclie Frau, which woman ? zvelckes
Kind, which child?

9. Was is generally combined with the indefinite
article, and the preposition Jilr is inserted between
was and the article ; as, zoasjur einMarm^ what man,
or what kind of a man? was fur eine Frau, what
woman, or what kind of a woman ? ijoasfur ein
Pferd, what horse, or what kind of a horse ? In-
stead oi was fur ein, we sometimes find, welch ein y
as, welch ein Mann, welch eine Frau, welch ein
Pferd.

10. The local adverb wo^ where, joined with
a preposition, frequently supplies the place of a
relative pronoun ; as tcomit, wherewith j instead of
mit welchem, fem. welcher, or plur. mit wekhen, with
which : — wovon, whereof, instead of von welchem,
welcher^, welchen, of which : — wodurch, instead of
durch welchen, zoelche, through which. When the
preposition begins with a vowel, an r is inserted
after wo ^ as, woraus, whereout, for out of which ;
woriiber, whereupon, or whereover, for upon which,
or over which.

5. Mis^

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 1^

5. Miscellaneous Pronouns.

Under this denomination I comprehend the
following, which I did not think it necessary to
class under the foregoing divisions. They are in-
definite pronouns, because they design a person or
a thing indeterminate. Some of them are inde-
clinable; as,

mauy one, or they ; as, man sagt, they say.

eSf it ; as, es ist nicht wahr, it is not true.

etwas, semething ; as, ich gab ihr etwas, I gave her

something.

nichts, nothing j as, er gab mir nichts davon, he

gave me none of it.

The following are declinable ; as, einer, eine,
one, or some one ; ein einzzger, or ein einiger, a
single one ; keiner, keine^ none, or no one ; man-^
cher^ manche, many a— ; solcker, solche^ such a— ;
verschiedene, sundry ones ; etUche, some ones ; ein
und andere, one and others ; all, alle, alles, all ; jV-
mahdj some one 5 niemand, no one -, jederman, every
one I ein jeder, eine jede, each one ; ein jeglichery
eine jegliche, everyone; der eine, die eine, the one;
der andere, die andere, the other; 6e/rf^, both; der
ein und der andere, die eine und die andere, the one
and the other.

Keimr, mancher, solcher, einer^ are doclined
thus : '

Sio-

ii4

Analysis of tHB

Singular.

■

Plutal*

Masc.

J^ern.

JSTeui.

1

N.-

keinery

keine.

keines.

kein^*.

G.

keineSy

keinevi

keines^

keiner^

D.

keinenty

keinery

keinem^

keinen^

a;

keincn^

keine^

keines^

keine^

Ein jedety tin jeglicher, ein ehtziger^ trc di^
clined thus, without plural :

' Masc. '
N. ein jedeVy

Neiit.
ein jedes.

Fern,
eine jedCy
G. eines jedeny einer Jeden, eines jedefi.
D. einem jedeny einer jeden, eineni jed^n^
Av einen jeden, eine jede, ein jedes.

The subsequent three are declined in the fol*
'lowing manner without plural : v

N. jemand. niemttnd.

G. jemands. niemands.

D. jemanden. niemanden.

A: jemanden. niemanden^

The followinghave no singular number y t«>

N. beidcy "both. alky alL

G. b eider. alle7\

D. beiden. aUen^

A. beide. aUe^

Remarks.

1 . EineTy eine, eins, is often employed in art
absolute sense ; as, einei die gem heirathen xvollte^
sagle, Xc some one, who wished to marry, said, &c* ,
. i * 2. The

jedermann.
jedermannst,
jeddrmami^
jedermann.

GSRIfAV LAKGITACk. 1^

2. The neuter, eiits, conveys also a thing ; as *
noch einSy still one. It serves also to mark one
thing out of two or more persons, which are not
of the same sex ; as, cins von euch beiden Jiat unr
rechty one of you are wrong.

3; Keiner is always put in a negative sense;
as9 keiner weisz wenn er sterben wirdy no one knows
when he must die 5 keines von uns^ none of us;
The same is applicable . to niclUs, nothing.

4, The invariable pronoun, selbsty or selber,
has been noticed before. It answers to self, in
English, but may be added to any pronoun or
substantive in its original state ; as, ich selbst, I
myself; die Leiite selbst, the people themselves, &c, ^

IV. Of Adjectives,

When the adjective is placed before the sub*
stahtive, it must agree with it in gender, number,
md case,

Wherp the adjective is placed after fhe sub->
stantive, the termination is omitted, both in the
singular and plural : as, der Vater is gut, the father
is good i die Vater sind guty the fathers are good i
iie Mutter is gtity the mother is good ; die Mailer
find gttty tht mothers are good; das Kind ist schon,.
the child is handsome ; die Kinder sind schon, the
children are handsome.

The declensions pf the adjectives are two.

J}e^

13© ANALYSIS OF THE

/

Declension \sU

Singular. Plural.

Masc. Fern. Neut.

N. guter^ gut€y gutes: gate.

G. guteSy guter^ gutes. gtiter,'

D. gitt^my gutevy gutem. suteit.

A. guten, • gutey gutes. gute.

Declension 2d.

N. gute, gute, gute. guten,

G. guten, guten^ guten. guten.

D. guten^ guten^ guten. guten.

A. guten, gute, gute. guten.

Remarks on Adjectives.

Adjectives, or the accidents ef nouns, are by
the Germans divided into two classes, quality and
circumstance.

The ^first class comprehends those accidents
which are inherent in the noun itself; as, roth, red ;
viereckig, square ; gut, good, &c.

The second, those which are independent of it.
To this latter are refered the articles, numerals and
pronouns.

As many substantives admit not of different
. variations in all their cases, and consequently am-
biguity might arise, this inconvenience is, in some
degree, obviated, either by the termination of the
, article, or of the adjective. \

Rule I. An adjective, if it be preceded by
the article der, by a numeral, or by any pronoun,

whose

GERM AH LANGUAOS* i^i

rfhost nominatives singular have the terthinations
r, e, s, is declined according to the second de-
clension. Of this description ate^ der, aller, man*^
ch€j\ jeder, diescryjener-, derselbcy derjenige^ solcher^
welchety beide*, ex.gr. der gute Mann^ the good
man j dkscr fromme Vater^ this pious father i man-^
dter kbige Mann, many a prudent man ; manchem
bosen Memchaiy to many a wicked man^ &c. Ex-
CEPT unseTy eiicrj and ihr ; for the er and r are not,
properly speakings the inflection of the NominativCi
The same rule must be observed if more than
one adjective follows the article^ &e. as, dieser olid

brave Mann, this brave old man ; je7ie schone rothc
Bhtmeiiy those beautiful red flowers, &c.

Sukll. An adjective, if it be preceded by the
article ein, or by a pronoun j whose Nominative and
Accusative singular, have not the termination of the
first declension fer, e, es^ and en, e, esyj assumes
these terminations in the Nominative and Accusa-
tive singular, but in all other cases and genders
both numbers terminate in em

Of this description are ein (the article as well
as numeral)^ kein^ viel, wenig, niehr ; the posses-
sives, mein, dein, sein, unser, euer, ihr, deros^nd
the personals ich, du, er, 8(c. ex. gr. ich armer Mann^
me a poor man; mir armeri {not armem J Manne,
to me a poor man ; du gate Seele, tf^ou good soul i ein

schonti

■*■

* Beide, both, b from its natare only plural/bot adtntts
it ail the yariatioDS of casr.

T

138 ANALTSIS or THE

schones Kindy a fine child ; mein eigews Hdui^ ray
own hduse; nuinem eigenen Hause, to my own
hcmse ; mit dero gutigen Erlaubnisz, with your kind
pwnission.

The same rule must be observed, if more than
one adjective follow the article or pronoun ; as, deift
gutevy alter y ehrlicher Vater; thy good, old, hdnest
fether ; ein einigcr lieber Sohn, one only dear son.

As an exception to the two preceding rules, it
may be observed, that the Nominalii^, Vocative^
(which is like the former) and Accusative plural,
sometimes terminate in e ; as, meine arme Lipperh
my poor lips, &c. ^

Rule III. If an adjective, not preceded by any
other word, goes before a substantive, it is de-
clined according to the first declension ; ex. gr. ro-
fher Wein, red wine ; geharsame Kinder , obedient
children.

If two or more adjectives, not preceded by
any other word, go before a substantive, the first
is declined according to the ,/?r^f declension, .and
the others adopt the second rule ; that is^ the No-
minative arid Accusative cases singular terminate in
er, Cy esy andew,V, eSy respectively, and all other
cases arid genders of both numbers terminate in^;
ex. gr. gidery weiserVatery good, wise, father; oi£/«72,
weisen Vater^ to a good, wise, father ; reife^ siisze
Fruchty ripe, sweet, fruit ; reifer^ siiszen Friichiy of
ripe, sweet, fruit.
[ If a numeral precedes an adjective, in those

casesi

G£RMAH LAJSTGUAGE. 139

< •

onses^ where the numeral has not the terminations
of the. first declension, the adjective assumes them :
in aU other cases^ the adjective follows the second
declension ; ^x. gr. zwei lange Tage, two long
d^ys ; ztveier laiigen Tage, of two long days ; drei
baare ThcdtTy three ready dollars , i. c. ready mo-
ney I dreier baaren Thaler ^ of three ready dollars.

The Genitive singular of the masculine and
neater genders^ to avoid the repetition of this letter
Sy are sometimes made to terminate in en i as> ge-
rades Weges, straight course ; hiesigesOrtes^ this pre-
sent place ; are better expressed by geraden Weges^.
hiesigen Ortes ; the termination of the substantive
preventing any doubt respecting the case.

For a similar reason, the Dative case of adjec-
tives ending in m ; as, arin^ poor ; angenehm, agree-
able ; mmehm, noble, &c. sometimes ends in en
rather than em.

Some German adjectives admit of no declen-
sion : for instance, the word allerhahd, several, sun-

a

dry ; and those which are compounded with halb,
or the syllable lei ; as, allerhand Sachen^ various
sorts of things s zweierleiDinge, two different things*.
Adjectives are capable of being converted into
substantives, which may be done in two ways.

1 . Elliptkally, when a substantive is understood;

T 2 as.

* Ganx and halb, used without an article, are iodeclin^-
ble, as in English ; as^ ganz DeutscMand, all Germany -, halb
England, half England.

140 ANALYSIS OP THB

fin, der Gelehrte (Marm)^ the learned mdn, of
scholar; die Schdne (Frmi)^ the fair lady ; die
Behannte (Frau)y the female acquaintance, &c.

2. Abstractedly i which follow a different manner|
ts, das Blaxiy the colour of blue ; das JVeis, the co*
lour of white ; das Bund, a round substance, &c.
We find, sometimes, two adjectives of the same
termination going before a substantive ; the termi-
nation of the first is generally suppressed, for the
sake of brevity ; aSf em schxvaz^ und tveiszer Hut,
a black and white hat ; ein genug- und arbeitsdmer
Mann^ a contented and industrious man ; for ein
schtcarzer und weiszer Htif, ein genUgsamer und
arbeitsamerMann.

Observation. All participles are of the nature
of adjectives, and are capable of the Si^me modjr
ficationsi

• •

J)EGREE OF COMPARISON.

^ords, denoting qualities, are capable of de?
grees of comparison: these are the adjectives, and
in some measure the adverbs.

Their comparison i§ generally effected by two
degrees ; one of them, conveyipg the idea nwre,
'which is called comparative ; and the Qthef pxpres-
sing the notion inost, and is called superlativc.^

As these degrees of comparison correspond
with those in the English language, the stujlent
will learn to form them with the greatest facility. *

Jf. for instance, in the English, the adject|ye

wise

6ERMAK LAVGVAGt. HI

wisa is to*be formed into a comparative degree, it
is- to be done by the addition of the letter r> and
4ie 5uperiativi2 by adding $t ; as, wise, wiser, wisest,
which is the same case in German. L^t us now
consider the formation of both $legrees in the Ger?
mjiQ language.

1. THE COMPARATIVE DEOEEEf

Take any adjective in its radical state ; as, zoeise^
prudent; ^chon, handsome ; or en^^,'narrow, which
is called the positive, add to any of them the letter
r, when it ends in c, or if not, the syllable er, and
you ha^e the comparative -, as, weise^ weiser ; schUn^
schqner ,• etige, enger.

fhe declension of the comparatives follow that
pf t^e positive.

Memarfc^ on tf{e comparative Degree.

1. Mono^Uabic adjectives change the voweb
a, Oy u, into their diphthongs, a, o, U ; as arm^ poor ;
armer; lang, long^ Idnger; kur», short; kiirzer, &c.

2. The comparative is always followed by als
or denn, as or than ; ex. gr. Georg vst rcicher als,
or denn Martin, George is richer than Martin ; He-

' Uodora ist schiiner als Helena, Heliodora is hand-
^omer than Helena, &c.

2. THE. SUPERLATIVE PEGREE.

Iq adding to the positive, or the first form of
jidjcctives, the syllable ste, or este, which gives them

the

142- ANALYSIS OF THE

the superlative degree ; as, schon, handsome ; schon-
ste ; groszy great ; groszeste, &c.

The declension of the superlative is the same
as that of the positive ; ex. gr.

der schcnstCy die schonste, das schonste:

— groszestCy — groszeste, — groszestCy or

— groszte, — grqszte, — groszte.

In the following words, the vowels remain
unaltered through all the de^ees.
bunty of various colours, morschy squashed.

fahly fallow. muntery lively.

Jakchy false, plump, clownish.

frohy happy. roh, raw.

kohly hollow. j^undy round.

hold, kind. sacht, soft.

kahl, bold. satt, satiated.

karg^ tenacious. starr, benumbed.

knappy close. j/ofa, proud.

iflAw, lame. straff, straight.

los, loose. itiimm, dumb. '
znatt, faint.

suid those ending in kaft and sam ; as,
lasterhqfty vicious 5 tiigendhaftj virtuous ;

fuTchtsamy fearful.

The superlative is always followed by ww, of
unteTy or by the Genitive case alone ; as, cr ist der
beste von scinen Knechteiiy he is the best of his ser-
vants ; or, er ist der beste unter seinen Knechteriy he
IS the best among his servants ; or, er ist der beste
seiner Knechte.

The

GERMAK LAVGVAGK. 143

Thfj following adjectives are irregular in their

comparison :

bald, soon ; eher, sooner ; am ekesten, the soonest;

bos, bad ; schlimmer, worse ; am sMimmsteny the

worst.

gem, willmg ; lieber, more willing ; am liebsteriy

most willing.

gut, good ; besser^ better ; am besten, best.

A(?cA, high ; hoher, higher ; am hochsten^ highest.

nahe, near -, ndher^ nearer ; am ndchsten, nearest.

viel, much -, mehr, more ; am meisten, most.

PRACTICE, ELUCIDATING SECTION

THE SECOND.

AUFTRITT.

Graf Fiesko. (einMohr
iritt schiichtern ins Zimmer^
und sieht sich iiberaU sorgfdU
tig urn ; Fiesko faszt ikn
scharf und lang ins Auge,)
Was willst du ? — Wcr bist
clu?

MoHR.

SCENE.

Count FiEsco. (aMon
entering with an appearance
of timidity^ and looking rntftd
cautiously^ while FiE see looks
steadfastly and sternly at him. J

What wouldst thou have ?

I

— Who art thou ?

Moor,

* This interesting scene which I have selected, is well cal-
culated to impress the student with a better knowledge of tlie
rules he has already perused in (he preceding part of the work.
It is taken from the chef d'ceuvre of Schiller, intitled : die Ver-
scbworung in Genua ; to which I have added my own trans-
lation, to render it more intelligible. The scene itself is strik-
ing and full of humour. It exhibits a Moor endeavouring fo
asajs inate count Fiesco.

144

ANALYSIS

MoHf. (ivie oben.) £in
Sklave der Republick.

FxcsKO. Sklaverei isteia
clcndes Handwcrk. (immer
^ein scharfei Aug avf ihn)
Was suchst da ?

MoHR. Herr icti bin cin
ciirricher Mann.

F J E s Ko . Hang imroer die-
sen Schitd vor dein Gesicht
hinaus, das \rird nicht liber-
fliiszig seyn ; — r aber was
suchst du ?

MoHR. {sucht ihm immer
ndher %u kon^mcn^ FiESKO
weic/it aiis.) Herri ich bin
kein Spitzbube.

FiESKo. £s ist gutdaszdu
dasbeifiigst) nnd — doch wie-
der nicht gut. (ung^duldig)
Aber was suchst du ?

MoH R . {fuckt wieder na-
her.) Seid ihr der Graf Fies-
ko?

FiESKO. (stolTii) ■ Die
Blinden in Genua kennen
meinen Tritt. — Wa» soU dir
der Graf?

MoHR. (hart an ihn,)
Seid auf curer Hut Fiesko ?

FlESKo. {spttngt auf die
andere Seite*) Das bin ich
wirklicb.

MoHR.

0» tfit

Moor, fas ahve-J A
slave of die republic.

Fi£sco« Slavery w «.
wretched profession, {his eyes
stili fixed on the Moor.) What
dost thou seek for ?

Moor. Sir, 1 am an ho-"
nest man.

FiEspo. Thou well may V
assume this veil, it may not
be superfluous ; — But what
seekest thou i

Moor, {attempting to op-*
protich him^ FiEsco drawi
back.) Sir, 1 am no ^Slain.

FiEsco. 'Tis well that
thou say'st so ; and yet, 'tis
not well, {impatienily) How-
evefj what dost thou seek ?

Moor, (still endeavouring
to approach,) Are you count
Fiescd ?

FiEsco. (haughtily.) Rwcn
the blind in. Genoa know my
steps. What would'st thou
with the count ?

Moor. ( approaching near-i
er to him.) Be oh your guard»
Fiesco !

FiEsco. {springs hastily to
the other side,) That, indeedy
I am.

Moor.

GERMAN LAKGUAGE;

145

MoHR. {wie oben.) Man
Kat niches guts gegen euch
vor Graf.

FiESKO. (retirirt sichwie-
der.) Das seh ich.

MoHR. Hiitet euch vor
dem Doria I

FiESKO, (tritt ihm ver-
troHt wher.) Fr^und ! . solt
kh dir doch wohl unrecht ge-
than haben ? diesen Namen
iurcihte ich wirklich*

MoHR« So flieht vor dem
l4ano« Konnt ihr lesen ?

FiEsKo. Eine kur^weilige
Frage. Du bist bei panchem
Kavalier herumgekommen.
Hast du etwas schriftliches ?

MoHR. Euren Namen bei
armenSUndem. {erreichtihm
9tn$n Zeitel^ und nistet sich
hart an ihtu FjESKo tritt
vor einen Spiegel und schielt
uher das Papier. Der Mohr
feht laurend um ihn ierum,
tndlich zieht er denDolck und
will stoszenj

FiEstCo. {dreht sich ge-
sehitki und fdhrt naeh dem
Arm dis Mohren. ) Sachte Ka-

naille !

Moor, (continuing to ap^ ,
proachj Evil designs arc
formed against you. Count.

Fie SCO. (still drawing
hack.) That 1 perceive.

Moor. Beware of Doria !

Fie SCO. (approaching him
with an air of confidence.)
Perhaps, friend, my suspi-
cions have virronged tb^*rr-
Ppria is indeed the name I
dread. *

Moor. Then avoid him.
Can you read ? .

FiEsco. A strange queS">
tion I However,, thou hast
been acquainted, it seems^
with many of our nobles.
Art thou possessed of any
writings ?

Moor. Your name is in-
scribed in the &tal h'st of those
who are doomed to die.. {pVe^
sents a paper f and nestles up
close to Fiesco^ who is stand-'
ing before a looking-glass ^ and
glancing over the paper. The
Moory leeringy steals round
him^ draws a dagger^ and is
going to stab him,)

Fie %co*(turningrounddex^
terousfyi and seizing the Moor^t
arm,) Softly, scoundrel!

U. {wrens

146

ANALYSIS OF THE

naillc ! (entreiszt ifim den
Dolch.

MoHR. (stampft wild auf
den Boden.) Teufel. — Bitt'
um Vergebung. [wili sich ab-
fuhren*)

FlESKO. (packtihn^ mit
starker Stimme,) Stephano !
Drullo! Antonio! {denMoh-
ren an der GurgeL) HolHsche
Biiberei. (Bedienten,) Bleib
und antworte ! Du hast
schlcchte Arbeit gemacht ; an
wen hast du deinen Taglohn
zu fordern ?

MoMR. {nach vielen ver^
get lie hen Venue hen sich weg-
%U5tehleny entschlossen,) Man
kann mich nicht hoher han-
gen als der Galgen ist*

FiESKo. Nein ! troste
dich ! nicht an die Horner
des Mondsy aber doch hoch
genug, dasz du den Galgen
fiir einenZahnstocheransehen
sollsc. Doch deine Siaats-<
klugheit war zu schlau, als
dasz ich sic deinem Mutter-
witz zutrauen sollte; Sprich
also, wcr hat dich gedungen ?

MoHR. Herr, einenSchur-
ken konnt ihr mich schim*

pfen.

{wrests the dagger jr^rfl
him,)

Moor, (stamps in afran^
tic manner,) The devil !—
I beg your pardon ! \Jie al<-
tempts to retire,) .

Fi E s c o . (seizing him^ calls
with a loud yoicej Stephano!
Drullo ! Antonio ! (holding
the Moor l/y the throat, J Stay,
my good friend! hellish vil-
lainy ! (servants enter,) Stay,
and answer!* Thou hast per-
formed thy task in a bungling
manner ; who pays thee
wages ?

Moor, (after several fruit*
less attempts to e scape ^ reso-
lutely answers.) I cannot be
hanged higher than the gal-
lows.

Fie SCO. No ! be cdm-
forted; not on the horns of
the moon ; but yet so high,
that on beholding the gal-
lows it shall appear to thee
as >small as a toothpick. Yet
thy design was too politic to
originate in thy own contri-
vance. Say then, ^ho has
hired thee ? ^

Moor. Sir, you may call
me a rascal, but I must en-
treat

GERMAN LANGtTAGB,

147

pfen, aber den Dummkopf
vcrbitt ich.

FiESKo. 1st die Bcstie
stolft ? Bestie sprich, wer hat
dkh gedungcn ?

MoH R . (naehdenkend. )
Hum! Sowarichdochnicht
allein dcrNarr ? — Wermich
geduDgenhat ? — Und warcn's
doch nur lOO magere Zechi-
nen ! — Wer mich gedungen
hat ? — Prinz Gianettino,

FiESKo. {erbitiert aufund
mederJ) Hundert Zechinen
und nicht mehrfiir desFiesko
Kopf! {hdmhch.) Schame
dich Kronprlnz von Genua.
(nach einer Schatoulle eilend.)
Hier Bursche sind looo und
sag deineoi Herrn er sey ein
knickigcr Mordcr ! -^ {der
Mohr betrachtet zhn von Fusz
bis %um Wirbel.)—D\x be-
sinnst dich Bursche ? — {.der
Afohr nimmt das Geldy setzt
es nleder^ nimmt es wiedefy und
besiiht ihn nut immer steigen-
demErstaunm.) Wasmachst
da Bursche? (derMobrvjirft

treat^you to leave out blocks
head.

FiEscot Is the rascal
proud ? Speak, scoundrel who
hired you ?
Moor, (meditating.) Hum!
So then I was not the only
fool ? — Who hired aie ?—
It was but a hundred thin
sequins ! — Who hired me ?
— Prince Qlahettino.

Fie SCO. [angrily crossing
j the room,) A hundred sequins^
and no more for Fiesco's life !
{contemptuously,) Shame on
thee, heir to the chief magis-
trate of Genoa, (hastening
to an escritoir.) Here, fellow,
are a thousand for thee ; and
tell thy master he is a mean
assassin. — (the Moor surveys
him from head to footj^^
How ! dost thou hesitate, feU
low ? — (the Moor takes up
the moneys lays it downy takes
it up againy and looks at Fies*
CO with increased astonish'^
ment.) What art thou doing.

das Geld entscMossen auf den fellow ? — {the M oor resolutely

Ttsch und sagt :) Hcrr ! das
Geld babe ich nicht verdient.

FiESKO. SAafikopf von

einem

throwing the money on the ta*
bkj and says:) Sir I that mo-
ney I have not worked for.
FiEseo. Thou foolish

U % SCOUB'

14»

AHALYftH OP THE

einem Gauner ! den Galgen
hast du vcrdicnt Dcrent-
riistete Elephant zertri tt Mcn-
ichen, aber nicht Wiirmer.
Dich wiird' ich hangcn las-
sen wenn es mich nur so viel
mchr als zwcy Worte kos-
tete.

MoHR. (mit einer frohen
Verbeugung.) Der Hcrr sind
gar zu giitig.

FiEsco. Behiite Gott,
nicht gegen dich^ Es gef allt
snir nun eben, dasz meine
Laune einen Schurken wie du
bisty zu etwas und nichts ma-
chen kann, und darum gehst
du frei aus. Begreife mich
jecht. Dein Ungeschick ist
mir ein Unterpfand des Him-
inelsy dasz ich zu etwas gro-
szem aufgehoben bin^ und
dai-um bin ich gnadig, linddu
gehst frei aus.

MoHii. (treuherzig.)
Schlagt ^in Fiesko ! Eine
£hre ist der andern werth.
Wenn jemand auf dieser
Halbinsel eineGurgelfiir euch
iiberzahlig bat^ befehlt ! und
ich sdineide sie ab unentgeit*
lich.

Fiesko* Eine h&fliche Bes-
tie ! sie will sicb mit fremder

ireutc

scoundrel I diou hast deserved
the gallows, but the ofien-^
ded elephant tiamples on
men and Hot worms. Thy
life is at my command, iad
wast thou of more importincey
thou should'st die.

Moor, {bowing etntentei^
ly.) Sir, you are; too good*

FiESCO. What, towards
thee ! God forbid ! No ; I am
pleased to think my, nod can
save or annihilate such a vil-
lain. 'Tis that wWch saves
thee. Mark my words, 1
regard thy miscarriage as an

omen of my future success.

'Tis this that renders mc
' indulgent, and preserves thy

life.

Moor, {confidentidllj;,)
Flesco, your hand! One good
turn deserves another. If any
man in this half staved islan4
has a superflous throat, com<r
mand me, and I'll cut it
gratis^

FiEscOt An obliging
scoundrel ! He will return m^

tbapkc

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

14f

X^eote Gorgtln bedaakea.

MoHR. Wir lassen uns
nichts schenken, Herr ! un-
aer eins hat auch £hre im
X>eibe

FiEsKo. Die Ehrc dcr
Gurgelsjchoeider ! -^

MoHR. — 1st wohl fener-
ftster alseurerehrlichenLeu-
te ; sic brechcn ihfe Schwii-
re dem lieben Herrgott ;
wir hahen sie piinktlich dcm
Tcufcl.

• FiESKo. Du bist eindrol-
Kgtcr Gauner.

AloHR. Freut mich dasz
ihrGeschmack an mir findet.
Setzt mich erst auf die Probe
ihr werdet einen Mann ken-
nen lernen der sein Exerzi-
tiucn aus dem Stegreif macht.
Fordert niich auf. Ich kann
^uch von jeder Spitzbuben-
zunft ein Testimonium auf -
wcisen, von deruntersten bis
zurhochsten.

FiESKo. Was ich nicht
hore ! {indem er sich nieder-
Htxti) Also auch Schelmen
«rkeimeQ Cesetze und Rang-

ord-

tbaAks by cutting die diroalp
of others^

Moor. Men, likeme^ Sir,
receive no £ivoQr without ac^
knowiedgement. We know
what honor is*

Fi£sco. The honor of
cut-throats-*

Moor* — Is, perhaps,
more to be relied on, than
that to which men of cha-»
racter pretend. They break
their oaths made in the pre-
sence of God; we punctually
keep ours, which are made
to the devih

FlESCO.

strange rascaU
Moos* I

Thou art e

am happy to
meet your approbation. Put
me to the proof, and you will
find me a man, who is tho-
rougly master of his profes**
sion* Challenge me. I can
produce you a testimonial
from every fraternity of vil-
lains, from the lowest to the
highest.

FiEsco. Whatdolhear!
(sitting down.) That there
are laws and degrees of rank
eveu aiBong villains ? Then

let

166

ANALYSIS OF tHl

'ordnung i Lasz mich doch
von der untei^tenhoren.

MoHR. Pfiii, gnadiger
Herr ! dasz ist das veracht-
lichc Heer der langen Finger.
Ein elend Gcwerb, das kei-
nen groszen Mann ausbrutet,
arbeltet nur auf Karbatsche
Yind Raspelhausy und fUhrt
— -hochstens zum Galgen. ,

FiESKo, Ein reitzendes
Ziel, ich bin auf die bessere
begierig,

MoHR. Das sinddic Splo-
nen wnd M^^chinen. Bedeu-
tende Herren, denen die Gro-
szen ein Ohr leihen, wo sie
ibre Allwissenheit hohten,
diesich wie Blutigel in Seelen
einbeissen, das Gift aus dem
Herzen scblurfen, und ah die
Beliordc speien.

FtESKo. Ich kcnnc das-^
fort.

MoHR. Der Rang trift
nunmehr die Meuter, Gift-
mischer, und alle die ihren
Mann langhinhalten und-aus
dem Hinterhalt &ssen. Feige

Mem-

let me hear you describe the
lowest class.

Moor. Fie, gracious Sir!
They are the detestable host
of long fingered gentry^ com-
monly called pick-pockets. It
is a contemptible class that
never produces a man of gfr
nius — 'tis confined to the
whip and housci of correc-
tion, and at best can only
lead — to the gallows.

FiESco. A charming goal!
I am desirous to hear the daz.^
racter of the superior.

Moor. These are spies
and informers. -^ Tools of
importance to the great, who
from their secret information
pretend to omniscience. Vil-
lains thar insinuate them-
selves into the souls of men
like leeches, to draw their sc-
crets-r^they syck poison from
the heart, and spit it forth
against the very source from
whence it came.

Fie SCO. I know them—*
proceed.

Moor. Then come the
conspirators, villains that deal
in poison, and brav$es that
rush upon their victims from
dark hiding places, Cowards

they

GStMAK LANGUAGE.

151

Memtnen sinds oft, aber doch
Kerk, die dem Teufel das
Sdiulgeld mit ihrer armen
•Seele bezahlen. Hier thut
die Gerechtigkeit schon et*
was ubriges, screckt ihre
Knochel aufs Rad, und
pflaozt ihre Schlaukopfe auf
Spiesze. Das isc die driite
Zuntt*

FiESKo. Aber, sprich
doch wean wird die deinige
Jcommen?

MoHR. Bliz ! gnadiger
Herr. Das ist eben der Pfiffl
Ich bin durch diese alle ge-
wandcrt. Mein Genie geilte
friihzeidg liber jedes Gehege.
Gcstern Abend machce ich
mein Meisterstiick in der
Dritten^ vox einer Stunde war
ich ein Stiimper in der Vter^
tin,

FiESKo* Diese ware also?

MoHR. {lebhaft.) Das sind
Manner, {in Hit%e.) die ih-
ren Mann zwischen vier
Manern aufsochen, durch die
Gefahr eioe Bahnsichhauen.
ihmgerade za Leibe gehen,
mat dem ersten Grusz ihm
dea Grossccodaak fur den

zwci-

they often are, but yet fellows
who- sell their souls to the
devil ; and even there get but
a scurvy bargain. The hand
of justice binds their limbs to
the wheel, or fixes their cun-
ning heads on spikes. -<— This
is the third class.

Fie SCO. But speak J when
comes thy own class ?

Moor. Patience, my Lord.
That is the very point I have
reached. Already I have tra-
veiled through the deiscription
of them all ; my genius soon
soared beyond their capacity.
'Twas but last night, I per-
formed my master-piece in
the third — an hour ago 1 at-
tempt \h& fourth — and proved
a bungler.

Fie SCO. And how do you
describe that class ?

Moor, {animated.) They
are men {with warmth) who
press right onward to their
objecty cutting their way
through danger. They strike
at oncey and by dieir first sa-
luta^ save him, whom they
approacbi the trouble of x^

turning

i52

ANALYSIS 09 THZ

zwetttei ersparcQ. Unter uns^
Man neont sie nur die £xtra-
pofit der Uotle : wean Me*
phistofeles etncD Gelust be-
Jcommt^ brauchts nur einen
Wink, nod er hat den £ra-
ttsx Boch warm*

FiESKo. Du :bift ein hart-
gesottener Sunder. Einen
sokhen vermiszt ich langst,
Gbb mir deine Hand. Ich
will dich bei mir behalcen.

MoHR. Ernst oderSpasz?

FiESKo. Mein voHiger
Ernst, und gebe dir locx^
Zecbinen de$ Jahrs.

MoHR. Topp Fie^ko ! Idi
bin euer, und zum Henker
£ihre dasPrivatleben. Braucht
mich vfozu ihr woUt. Zu eu-
rcm Spiirhund, zu eurem Par-
forceh^nde9 zu eurem Fuchs,
zu eurer Schlange^ ^u eurem
JCuppler undHenkersknecht.
Herr zu alien Kommissionen,
mirbei I»eibe ! z;u keinerehr-
lichen -^ dabei beoehme ich
mich plump 3¥ie Holz.

FiEsco. Sci unbesorgt.
Wem ich - ein ZfOmtn j^cben-
kjCn will} lasz.ichs durchkei-
nen Wei/ uberliefern. Seh
«liO gkjch naergcn durch

Genua

turning thanks for a second.
Among ourselves :they are
called the swiftest mess$iogctii
of hell : and wb^n ifieel^etmb

1

is .hungry, ^t the first hinty
they send his victims to him
smoaking m their blood.

FiEscQ. Thou art 4
faardjeucd wretch. — .Siicrh a
tool I have .long w^iH^d-
Give me thy hand. I will
take thee into ra^y service.

Moor. Do you spoak io
earnest or in jest ?

FlEsco. Most positively
in earnest, aod I'll pay thee
yearly a thousand sequins*

Moor. Done, Fiescof— -
I am your's — and may the de-
vil take my private life — ^Em-
ploy me in what ever you will.
— rU be your setter, or your
bloodhound — ^your fox, your
viper — ^ your pimp, your
hangman. Employ me, Sir,
in all commissions ; but, for
God's sake ! let them not be
honest ones--^in those! am.^
stupid as a block.

FiEsco. Fear not : when
I make a present of a, laktf
I never make a wolf the mes-
senger. Go thou through
Genoa to-morrowy and sound
^ the

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

153

Genoa, und untersuche die
Witterung des Staats. Lege
dich auf Kundschaft wie man
von der Regierung denkt und
vom Haus Doria . fliistert,
sondire daneben, was meine
Mitbiirger vonmeinem Schla-
TaflFenleben und meinen Lie*
lesromanen halten. Ueber-
schwemme ihr Gehirne mit
Wein, bis ihre Herzensmei-
nungen uberlaufen, Hier
hast du Geld, spende davon
unter den Seidenhandlem aus.

MoHR. (sieAt ihn bedenk-
Itch an, ) Herr !

FiEsKo. Angst darf dir
nicht werden. £s ist nichts
ehrliches. — Geh, nife deine
ganze Bande zu Hiilfe. Mor-
gen will ich deine Zeitungen
horen. (er geht ab.)

MoHR. (/Am«flr^,) Ver-
laszt euch auf mich. Jetzt
ist cs fruh um vier Uhr, —
Morgen um acht habt ihr
so viel neues erfahren^ als in
^ zweimal siebenzig Ohren
gcht.

the temper of the people.
Narrowly inquire what they
think of the government, and
of the house of Doria — ^whac
of me, my debaucheries, and
romantic passions. Charge
their heads with wine, *until
their secret sentiments flow
out. — Here's money — lavish
it among the silk-manufactu*
rers.

Moor, {hdks at . him
thoughtfully.) Sir I

FiEsco. Be not- afraid —
(here is no honesty in the case.
-T-Go ; summon your whcde
band to thy assistance. To-
nwrrow I will hear thyre-
pon. (exit.)

Moor, {calling after him.)
Rely on me. It is now four
o'clock. — In the morning, by
eight to-morrow, you shall
hear as much news as twice
seventy spies can^ furnish.
[exit,)

CHAP.

154

ANALYSIS. OF THE

CHAPtfeR V.

OF THE VERB.

The verb is not only one of the most cssein-
tial, but also the easiest and simplest partof speec:li
in the German language, if properly explainec3 ;
and the method I am about to adopt will, I trust,
sufficiently prove my assertion, and convince tl:^^
student of its peculiar similarity to the English.

I shall arrange the whole under the following
heads, viz. Auxiliary — Regular — Irregular-^Neu-
ier-^oTTipound^-^ReJiective — Impersonal Verbs.

I. Of Auxiliary Vekbs.

Verf>s called auxiliary, which are indispensa-
bly required for a complete conjugation, are three^

The first is habe7i, to have, which serves for the
Formation of the Preterperfecty Preterpluperfedi
and second Future Tenses^ in the active voice.

Seyn, to be, forms the Preterperfecty Preter-
pluperfect^ and second Future of some neuter verbs,
and likewise helps to compose those tenses in the
passive voke.

IVerden^Xo become, signifies, 1 . a future event, x
whether in actings beings and suffering. Thus it ex-
presses the English auxiliaries of the Future Tense,
shall and will : With this qualification it produces all
the Future Tenses. — 2. It denotes the commence-
inent of a certain state or condition, therefore,

^ when

GBRMAVr LAKGtlAOe*

Ui

vrl^cn joined with a noun, it 'answers the English
to become. , By the above qualification it may be
employed in forming the passive voice.

The foundation of the German verb depends
upon the Present and Preterimperfect of the /n^«
caiive, the Infinitive Moody and the Preterite Par-^
ticiple.—l shall place them at the head of every
^erb.

Conjugation of the First Auxiliary.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Haben, to have.

PRESENT TENSE.

Ich habey I have.

PRETERPERFECT.

Ich hattCy I had.

PRETERITE PARTICIPLE.

Gehabty had,

»

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present Tense.

Singular.
ich habcy I have.
du hasty thou hast.

er, (siCy es^) haty he,
- (she, it,) has.

Plural.

xvir habeny we have.

ihr habety or habty ye, or
you have.

siehdben, they have.

1

Singular,

ich habCy I may have.

du habesty thou mayest
have.

ery (sicy eSyJ habCy he,
(she, it,) may have.

Plural.

wir habeny we may have.

ihr habety (ye,) you may
have.

sie habeny they may have.

* Sie and es, she and it, ran through all the tcnsca and
the third ponon -of the tiDgalar, of all the verbs.

X 2

156

ANALYSIS OF THS

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Preterimperfect.

Singular.
ich hatte, I had.
du hattestj thou hadst.

erhatte, he had.

Plural.
tvir hattcTiy we had.

ihrhattety (ye) you had.

sie hat ten, they had.

Singular.
ich hdtte, I might have.

du hdttesty thou mightest

have.
er h'dtte^ he might have.

Plural.

wir hdtten, w^e might
have.

ihr hdttety (ye) you mighi
have.

sie hdtterty they mighi
have.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular.
hahe du, have thou.
habe er, have he.

Plural.
kabet ihr, have (ye) you.
haben sie, have they.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

, Present. haberij to have.
Preterperf. gehabt haben, to have had.
. Future. haben werden, to be about to have.

PARTICIPLES.

Present, habend, havmg.
Preterite, gehabt, had.

THE COMPOUND TENSES

Are formed, as in English, by adding the aux-
iliaries, before-mentioned, to the Infinitive or Par-
ticiple. Se^n^ to be^ and haben, to have, are al-

"^ ways

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 197

ways joined to a Participle ; werden, to become,
to an Infinitive. By way of illustration, I shall give
the compound tenses of the foregoing auxiliary
haben.

THE PRETERPERFECT

Is compounded with the Present and Parti-
ciple Preterite of haben ; as,

ich habe gehabty I have had.

du hast gehabty thou hast had, &c. &c,

PRETER PLUPERFECT

Is compounded with the Preterimperfect and
the former Participle ; as,

ich hatte gehabty I had had.

du hailest gehabty ,thou hadst had, &c. &c*

FUTURE

Is compounded with the Present ofwerden, and
the Infinitive of habe?i ; as,

ich werde habeUy I shall have.

duwiJ'st haben y thou wilt have,, &c. &c.

CONDITIONAL

Is compounded with the Preterimperfect Sub-
junctive of zverden, and the Infinitive of habeii ; as
ich wiirde haben, I should have.
du wiirdest haben y thou should'st have, &e.

According to this simple mode are formed the
compounds of the subsequent auxiliaries, and all
the other verbs, regular or irregular. There is but
one thing to be observed, viz. that the compound
Preterperfect and Pluperfect, of the following aux

iliaries

I5S ANALYSIS OF THB

iliaries^ are compounded with the tenses of seyjty
instead oi haben; •

ich bin gezvesen, I have been, &c.

ich bin ^ezwrden, I am become, &c.

Before I proceed with the conjugation of the
second auxiliary, I shall make a few remarks,
which are of the utmost consequence, and appli-
cable to the subsequent auxiliaries, as well as to
all verbs, regular or irregular.

All verbs in general, may be employed in four
different manners, viz.

1. Affirmative; as, ich habe^ I have.

2. Negative ; — ich habe nicht, T have not.

3. Interrogative; — habe ich ? have I ?

4. Negative and-l_ j ^ . ^ .j^^ ^ ^^^^^ „^jp
Interrogative ; J

The following are the principal negations in
German, which are put after the verb ; as, nichU
not ; kein^ no ; nichtSy nothing ; niemals, never ;
niemand, no one, nobody, no person.

Examples. 4ch habe nicht, 1 have not.
ich bin nicht, I am not.
ich habe kein Geld, I have no money.
ich habe nichts, I have nothing.
ich habe niemals^ I have never.
ich sehe niemandy I see noboby.

If it is a question, the personal pronouns arc
put after the verb ; as,

bin ich ? am I ; bist du I art thou ? . ^

A mix*

CERMAN LANGUAGE.

159

A inixture of the former ; as,
lichnicht? aminot? histdunicht? 2xi\^o\\ViOi'i%LC.

The relative particles are, esy davoriy daftn\ da-,
^ darumy daruber^ darauSy damity day dabei,
rauy hindurchy Sic. all these .particles are put after
J verb ; as,

ich habe eSy I' have it.

zck habe es nickt, I have it not, &c.

When it is a question the particles are put
er the personal pronouns ; as, *

habe ich es ? have I it ?
habe ich es nicht ? have I not it ?
ich habe davoUy I have some of it.
habe ich davon ? have I some of it ?

Davon is put after a negation ; as,
ich habe nicht davon, I have none of it,
habe ich nicht davon ^ have I none of it ?

This is the same with the particles da, darin,

9 as,
ist day he is here.

ist nicht day he is not here.

er da ? is he here ?

^er nicht da f is he not here ?
^laszt each daraufy rely upon it,
^dihrGeldesbenothiget? are you in want of money ?
f er einen Sohn ? has he a son ?

er hat einen y yes, he has one.

? vieU sind ihrer ? how many are there of them ?

sind ihrer sechSy there are six.

sind andere, there are others, &c. &c.

- Con-

160

ANALYSIS OF THE

Coiijugalion of the Second Auxiliary.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Seyiiy to be.

PRESENT TENSE.

Ich biuy I am.

PRETERIMPERFECT.

Ich war^ I was.

PRETERITE PARTICIPLE.

Geweseriy been.

INDICATIVE MOOJ). SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD<

Present Tense.

Singular.
ich bin J I am.
du bist, thou art.

er ist, he is.

Plural.
wirsindy jve are.

ihr seidy (ye) you are.

sie sindy they are.

Singular.

ich seyy I may be.

du scyesty or seysty tho""
mayest be.

er seyy he may be.

Plural.

zvir seyeuy or seyn^ w
may be.

ihr seyedy or seydy (ye/
you may be.

sie seyeiiy or seyuy they
may be.

Preterlmperfect. ^

Singular.

ich wary I was.

du war est y or tuarsty thou
^ wast.

er wary he was.

Plural.

wir waren, we were.

ihr warety ox warty (ye)
you were*

siexoareuy they were.

Singular.
ich w'drcy I might be.

du wdresty thou mightest
be.

er wdrey he might be.

Plural.

wirwdreuy wemigjbtbe.

ihr warety (ye) you might
be.

sie wdreUy they might be.

OJiUlMAir XAS9^0A€te.

3di

IMPERATIVE •MOOI>.

Singular.
Uy be thou,
r^ behe.

Plural.
seydihr, be (ye) you.
setfu lie, be tjiey.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

esent. seyn, to be.

eterperfect. gezvesen sejfn, to have been.

iture; seyn werden, about to be.

PARTICIPLES.. .

Present, seyend, being.
Preterite, gewesen, been

Conjugation of the Third AuxiUarjf*

\ •

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Werderi^ to become.

ESENT TENSE.

verdcy I become.

PRETERIMFERPECT* t

Ich wardy or wurde, I
became. .

PRETERITE PARTICIPLE.

Geworden^ or zoorden, become.

DICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present Tense.

Singular.
erde^ I become.
irstj thou becomest.

rd, he becomes.

Singuht.

ich werde^ I may become.

du werdest^ thou mayest
become.

ervotrde^ht may become.

INDI*

168

ANALYSIS OF THE

INDICATIVE MOOD. • SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,

Present Tense. .

I ♦

Plural.
wirwerdejtj we become.

«

ihr^werdet, (ye)' you be-
come.

sie zverden, they become.

Rural.
wir werderif we may be*

come.

ihr werdet, (ye) you maf
become.

^ie werden, they may be-
come.

Preterimperfect.

Singular. . Singular.

icli wurde, I might be

idi ward, or wurde, I be-
came;

du wardst, or wurdest,
thou becamest.

er ward, or wurde, he
became.

Plural.

wirwurden, we became.

thr wurdet, (ye) you be-
came.

sie ivurden, they became.

come.

du wiirdest, thou mightest
become.

er wiirde, he might be-
come.

Plural.

wir zviirden, we might
become.

ihr •wUrdet,[yt) you might
become.

sie wUrden, they might
become.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular. I Plural.

zoerde du, become thou, j werdet ihr, become (ye)

you.

• werden sie, become they.

zverde er, become he.

^N-

( .

GERMAN^ LAKGUAGX, 163

INFINITVE MOO0.

Present. werden, to become.

Preteiperf. gezvorden, or warden seyn^ tq have become^

Future. tvcrden zverden, to be about to become.

PARTICIPLES.

Present, zverdend, becoming.
Preterite, geworden, or zvorden, befome.

- Observations on the Auxiliary Verbs.

Many verbs in the English are used as auxili-
aries, which in German are not required. It Js
true, they have formerly been introduced under
that denomination, but modem grammarians ne.
longer consider them as useful, being merely com-
bined with other verbs, which they govern in the
Infinitive Moods but if they were admitted as help*
ing verbs, their number might be still increased. For
that reason, I have adopted, only those that are real
auxiliaries, by the means of which a complete con-
jugation can be performed ; consequently the three
foregoing ones, which have been given at full
length, alone come under this description.

Those which have been formerly considered
as auxiliaries, are

Jch magi I niay.
The application is nearly the same as in En-
glish, It has been exhibited under the head of the
Irregular Verbs, , together with the subsequent ones.
I here^treat of its varipus; significations, in particular^

Y 2 trhich

IM AKALYSZS OF THE *

which is briefly AU : sie mag lachen, er magwei-
neriy she may laugh, he may cry ; ich mag dieses
Brod nichty I do not like this bread ; es nwchte sidt
ereigneuy it might happen 'y mogen sie Austem / da
you like oysters ? — -nein^ ich mag keine, no, I do
not like them ; idi mag nicbis mehr^ I do not like
any mQre, ike.

Ich ivilly I will.

This verb is not, as in English, merely confined
to denote futurity, as the latter is always and solely
expressed by the auxiliary werden. WoUen sie aus-
reiien ? will you take a ride (on horseback) ? was
ztioUen sie trinken ? what will you drink ? ich mil
mi Fusze gehen^ I will walk ; tvie viel woUen sie
geben? how much will you give? woUen sie di^
Giitigkdt haben^ aitfmich zu war ten? will you have
the kindness to wait for me ? tme zmllen sie diesen

V

Tag xubringen ? how will you spend this day ?

Ich soil, I shall.

This verb is only used in German to form a
^ind of indefinite Future ^ ex. gr. sollte sich der
Wind andern, so wollen wir absegeln, should the
'^ya^iphange, then we will set saif^ weiin dass^Seyn
solltCy if that should be so ; soli ich ihnen vorlegen ?
shall I help you ? sie sollen es iibermorgen haben, you
shall have it the day after to-morrow it(;^^ solldas^?
lyhat does that mean ? was soU ich, du, er, or sie ?
what shall t, thou, he, or she.* Ich

^« ■ ■ ». . f . I ■ III II ■ II ^ I I ■» I .. ■ I I I f 11 4 ^

« 1lf& neet with floahy flttdbi pfarace*, of Ihe Uttar.nrtjL
- »• ' •s . in

GERMAN LANGUAGE. t6S

Ich kann, I can. ^

• * d"

It answers also to the English, I may, I know,

I understand ; as, sie kohnen das haben, wetin sii

ttroUeTty you may have that, if you like ; kofmen sit

dculsch sjrrechen ? do you speak German ? kami ich

micK dandufverlassen ? may I depend upon it ? das

koimen sie sehr leicht bekommen^ that you may easily

get; wir khnntn nichteher speisz^n, we eannot dind

Sooner, &c.

Ich darf, I dare.

With the negative, it answers the English must
noty implying a prohibition ; but it never denotes
courage^ nor cfiallenge^ nor defiance^ as tcy dare in
English. In German it is generally joined with the
infinitive, and frequently understood ; as, sie dUr-
Jen 7iur befehlen, you^^ need but command ; darfich
das thun ? dare I do that ? sie durfen es nicht thun,
you dare not do it, &c.

Ich musz, I mustv

This is much the same as the English in its
meaning ; as, ich musz es thiin^ I must do it ; ich
mmizte es sagen, I was obliged to tell it ; icK man
mmn Brief schreibeuy I must write a letter j m

•mm

fmissen erscheinen, they must appear, &Cr

ich lasse, I let.

"Which serves in English as an auxiliary verb,

f*

•I**

im common conversatioai after soil j as^ wa$^ soil ich(mdclim.

169 ANALYSIS OP THB >

for forming the Imperative Mood ; in German it
has seldom the same construction. It has, how-
ever, nearly the same signification in most of the
Engli^ phrases^ a few excepted, ex. gr. das laszt
§iek nicht ertragen^ thac is not to be borne, or it is
intolerable ; woUet ihr mir die Wature nicht lassen f '
will you not let me have the merchandise ? lassen
sie mich gehen^ let me alone ; lassen sie das siehen,
let that alone j iasset ihn herein kommejiy let him
come in.

Sojne farther Remarks on the Auxiliary Verbs.

1. The English frequently join the auxiliary
to be^ VI ith the Participle Present ; as, lam writing,
I was xvriting^ &C. This combination of the aux-
iliary is unknown to the German language, in
which the definite time is not distinguished from
the others. Ich schreibe, I write, or I am writing ;
ich schrieb^ I wrote, or I was writing, stands for
both.

2. The English verb do, marking the action or
time with greater energy and distinction ; 3S, Ida
love J and which is also necessary in English, in
interrogative and negative sentences, is become ohr
solete in German. We, now ^nd then, hear it
among the lower classes of people ; as, ich thie
ihn schreibejiy I do write to him ; ich that liebejiy
I did love ; thun sie mir erlauben^ do permit me, &c.
This mode of speaking is totally wrong and vulgar,

3. The Preterirpperfect in the third auxiliaiy,

werden^

/

GERMAN LANQUAGI^. 197

werdeuj of the Indipative, the ^rst Bixd third person
are wurdcy which is only used in common Iife« but
watd in sublime writings. The second persoa
wardsty is rather too hard and unusual.
</. 4, The Participle Preterperfect is always /e-
mrderij whenever the verb expresses . a complete
predicate 3 as, ich bin krank gcwordcn, I have (be »
cpme) been ill. However^ it loses its additional
particle, when it becomes an auxiliary ^ as, ich %im
gescklagen tvorden, I have been beaten,

II. Of Regular Verbs.

Regular verbs are those, which are coriju*
gated according to certain established and inva-
riable rules. They retain their radical vowel
through all their moods, tenses, and persons^ forming
their Preterimpcrfect in ie, and their Preterparti-
ciple in et, or simply t. The Imperative singular

takes sometimes an e, for the sake of the sound,

•

Most of the German^ verbs are regular, and
consequently one specimen of conjugation will be
sufficient. According to the perspicuous exhibition,
which I am about to lay before the student, he will
readily and with pleasure perceive, how. similar the
construction of the German verb is to the English.

General Rules y respecting the Regtdar Verbs.

1. The Prcterperfect and Pluperfect is always
comppunded with haben, but if it be ^ neuter \txb
of a particular description, \vith sei/n, and the Pre-
terite

16S AKALVSIS OP mt '

terite Participle ; the Future and Infinitive, witfcf
tverden.

2. The Jirst and third person plural of the Pre-
sent Tense are always like the Infinitive, and vke
versa. The Jirst and third person singular ctf the
Preterimperfcct are alike. This rule holds good
in all the verbs both regular ^nd irregiriair.
; 9. The Preterite Participle has every where the
syllable ge prefixed to it, except in compound
verbs, which are inseparable, and a few others,
forming their Infinitive in iereuy or iren ,• as hand"
thiereuy to handle ; triumphiren, to triumph ; re-
gieren, to govern, &c.

4. The radical vowels, as I have observed be-^
fore, are never changed ; and a verb that is con-
sidered as regular, would be incorrectly used, by
transforming a into a, as many have erroneously
done in ich frage^ I ask ; fragst, frigtr, instead of
fragst, fragt, &c.

5. The e before st^ in the second person Pre-
sent Indicative in the singular ; before t in the
third person singular, and second person plural;
likewise before t throughout the Preterimperfcct,
and before the same letter in the Preterite Participle,
is generally dropped in colloquial composition. In
solemn speech, however, it is sometimes retained,
particularly if it produces no harshness of sound.

6. In verbs that have the letter / or r in the
last syllable, the e of inflexion, after those letters,
is always omitted, even in the Infinitive; as,

traiiern^

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

169

trauern, to mourn, for traueren; dauern^ to last, for
daueren j sarnmeln, to collect, for sammeleriy fifc\

As there is but one conjugation of the regular
verbs, I shall exhibit a general scheme for the,
others in the following representation :

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTiyE MOOD.

Present Tense.

Singular.

1st. person, e^ zsyich lo-
be, I praise.

2d. esty or sf.

3d. ■ ety — t.

Plural.

1st. person, en.

2d. ■ ety or t.

3d. " ■ en.

Singular.
1st. person, e.

2d.
3d.

est.

e.

Plural,
ist. person, ew.
2d. I et.

3d.

- en.

Preterimperfect.

Singular.
1st. person, etc, or fe.

2d. etesty — test.

3d. " ete, — te.

Singular.
1st. person, ete.

2d. etest.

d.

3

— — ete.
Plural.

Plural.
1st. person, eten^ or ten. j 1st. person, eten.

2d. etet, —tet. 2d. etet.

3d. — — eten,' — ten. \ 3d. ■ ^n.

Singular.
2d. person, e.
3d. ■ ■ ■ _ . ■ e*

IMPERATIVE.

Plural.
2d. person, et^ or /.
3d. I en.

IN-

1^0

ANALYSIS OF TBE

INFINITIVE.

Present, en.

PARTICIPLES.

Present, end.
Preterite, et^ or t.

CONJUGATiok
iff the Regular Active Verb loben, to praise.

INFINITIVE MOOD,

Loben, to praise.

PRESENT TENSE.

Ich lobe, I praise.

PRETERPER-FECT.

Ich lobete, or bbte,
praised.

PRETERITE PARTICIPLE.

Gelobety or gelobt, praised.

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present Tense.
Singular.

I

ich lobe, I praise. ^

du lobest, or lobst, thou

praisest.
f r, fsie, esj lobet, or lobt,

he, (she, it,) praises.
Plural.
tvir tobetii we praise*
ihr lobetj or lobt, ye, or

you praise.
siehben, theypraisfe«

Singular.

ich lobcj I may praise.
du lobestf thou mayest

praise.
er, fsie, esJ lobe, he,

(she, it,) may praise.

Plural. .

ivir loben, we may praise.

ihr lobet, (ye,) you may

praise. .
sie lobeUi they may praise.

IN-

G£RMAN LANGUAGE.

171

INDICATIVE MOOD, SUBJUNCTIVE MOQD;

Preterimperfect.

Singular.
iclh lobete^ or lobte, I

praised.
du lobtest, thou praisedst.

er lobtCi he praised.

^ Plural.
ivir lobteiiy we praised.

ihrlobfety (ye) you praised.

sie lobtcHy they praised.

Singular.
ich lobetCy I might praise.

du lobeiest, thou mightest

praise.
erlobetCy he might praise.

Plural.
wir lobeten, y^e "light

praise.
ihr lobetet, (ye) you might

praise. ,

sie lobeten, they might

praise.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular. Plural.

lobe du, praise thou.
lobe er, praise he.

lobet ihr, praise (ye,) you.
loben sie, praise they.

The compound tenses are formed, ^s before-
mentioned, either with one of the preceding
auxiliaries, haben, seyn, Werden; as, ich habe gc*
lobet, or gelobt, I have praised, &c. &c.

The only difference between the Indicative
and Subjunctive Mood is, the third person in the
latter of the Present Tense -, as, er lobe, he may
praise, instead of er lobet.

z2

IN-

172

ANALYSIS OF THE

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Present. loben^ to praise.

Preterperf. gelobt haben, to have praised.

Future. lob€?i werdeny to be about to praise. .

PARTICIPLES.

Present, lobend, praising.
Preterite, gelobety or gelobt ^ praised.

PASSIVE.

The passive voice ^ as before-mentioned, is
conjugated by means of the third auxiliairy, xcer-
den^ and the Preterite Participle.

r

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Gelobt iverden, to be praised.

* INDICATIVE MOOD.

Present
. Singular.
ich xverde . gelobt J I am
. praised, &c.
du wirst gelobt.
er wird gelobt.

Plural.
wir werden gelobt^ w^e

are praised, &c.
ihr werdet gelobt.
sie zverdeii gelobt.

I

Sl^BJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Tense.

Singular.
ich xverde gelobt, I may

be praised, &c.
du werdest gelobt.
er xverde gelobt.

Plural.

xjoir xvcrden gelobt, we

may be praised, &c.

ihr werdet gelobt,

sie iverden gelobt.

Pre-

G£RMAN LAUFGUAGE.

ns

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Preterimperfect.

Singular.
ich ward, or wurde ge-
lobt^ I was praised, &c.
du wardst, or wiirdesl

gelobt.
'■ er zvardy or wurde gelobt.

Plural.
wir tmirden gelobt , we

were praised, &c.
ihr wurdet gelobt.
sie zvurden gelobt.

Singular.
ich iviirde gelobt, I might

be praised, &c.
du wurdcst gelobt.

er wurde gelobt.

[ Plural.

wir wiirden gelobt y we
might be praised, &c.
ihr wUrdet gelobt.
sie wUrdeji gelobt.

IMPERATIVE MOOD-

Singular.
werde du gelobt^ be thou

praised.
xverde er gelobt, be he

praised.

Plural.
xverdet ihr gelobt, be (ye)

•you praised.
wer den sie gelobt, beith^y

praised.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Present, gelobt werdeyi, to be praised.
Preterperf. gelobt worden seyn, to have been praised.
Future. iverden gelobt werden, to be about to

be praised.

In the passive voice, worden is used in pre-
ference to geworden, for the sake of avoiding
the addition of ge, which would be a very disr

' agree^

174 ANALYSIS OF THE

agreeable repetition; as, gelobet worden seyrij to
have . been praised, instead of gelobet gewordm

■

III. Of Irregular Verbs.

It is a fact, that in the earliest formations
of speech, most of the verbs were irregular, but
have assumed a regular construction from the pro-
gressive improvement of language, as may be seen
by comparing the original number with the Pre-
sent. They do not now exceed 156; and even
many of them, although the irregular inflexion
be retain.ed, may, without any offence, be con-
jugated in a regular manner. Many others, also
have for many years past, been rejected as irre*
gular, and are now used as regular. ,

Happily, our modern writers hsive a propen-
sity for reducing anomalies, whenever they can in*
troduce rule and system ; which will ultimately
tend to the improvement of the German lan-
guage.

For the present I shall content myself with
giving an alphabetical index, consisting of three
different classes, viz.

1. Of those verbs, which have still the ge-
nuine irregular inflexion.

2. Others, which are sometimes used as ir--
regular, but may be formed ad libitum.

3. Those which are quite expunged from the
irregular list, and have been inserted among the
regular verbs.

It

GERIViAN LANGUAGE. 175

It may be observed, that many of the com-
pound verbs are irregular, whereas their derivatives
are quite regular, and vice versa j and that several
Tenses, in the subsequent alphabetical list of ir-
regular verbs deviate, in some measure, from the
established custom, and may be inflected in two
different ways ; although either of them are the
same, yet it will be proper to notice them here.

The subsequent verbs make their Freterim-^
perfect either way, viz,

befefden, to command, Preterimp. befahly or

befohL

empfehleriy - recommend ; ■ empfahl^ —

empfohl.

schivoren^ - swear s schzvor^ —

schtvur.

stehlen, - steal ; ■ stahlj —

stohl.

The Imperative of the subsequent verbs is
used in both ways, viz.

fechtejiy to fence ; Iviperal. Jichty or fechte,
schereuy — shear ; ■ schier, — scliere.

There are perhaps a few other anomalies in
some of the annexed list of irregular verbs, but they
need not be noticed, because they better follow
the regular course.

Nota. Those Tenses, which are left blank
in the following table, are a sign, that they follow
the regular course. . .

176

ANALYSIS OF THE

A LIST .OF THOSE VERBS, WHICH MAY BE

Infinitive Mood.

T. bedingen, to make conditions^

2. befehlen, fo command - - -

3. befleissen, fo apply oneself- -

4. beginnen, to begin - - - -

5. beissen, to bite - - - - -

6. bergen, to conceal - - - -

7. berSten^ to burst - - - -

8. besinnen, to recollect - - -

9. betriigen, to deceive ^ or cheat-

10. biegcn, to bend - - - - -

1 1 . bieten, to bid - - - - -

12. binden, to bind- - - . .
J 3. bitten, to fiegr - . . . .

14. blasen, to bloiv - - - - -

15. bleiben, to remain - - - -

16. brechen, to break - - - -

17. bringen, to 6n;/^ . - . .
lis. durfen, to ^^r^- - ™ - -
19^ denkeiii* to ^/i/;rA - - - -

20. dringen, to urge - - • -

21. empfangen, to receive - - -
22*. empfehleh, to recomfnend - -
iJSS empfinden, to perceive - -

24. erbleichen, to groto pale - -

25. erkiiren, to choose - - - -

I Pr^J. Indicat.

I ich bedinge
I — befehle -

— befleisse

— beginne

— beisse -

— berge -

— berste -

— besinne-

— betriigc-

— biege .-

— biete -

— binde -

— bitte -

— blase -

— bleibe -

— brechc «

— bringe -

— darf- -

— denke- -

— dringe -
-^— emp^ge*

— empfehle
— • empfiode

— erbleiche

— erkiire -

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

177

rSIDERED IN GERMAN AS TRULY IRREGULAR,

ond Person.

Preterimp.

befiehlst •

birgst
birstest

• blasest -

darfst

Imperat.

- empfangst

- ^mpfiehlst

ich bedung

— befahl-

— beflisz

— begann

— bisz -

— barg •
T— borst -

— besann

- betrog

— bog -

— bot -

— band -

— bat -

— blies -

- blieb -

- brach -

— brachte

- durfte-

- dachte

- drang-

— empfing

- empfahl

— empfand

— erblich

- erkor -

befiehl -

birg -
birst -

brich -

■«i

Pret, Partic.

empfiehl

bedungen,

befohlen.

beflissen.

begonnen.

gebissen.

geborgen.

geborsten.

besonnea.

betrogen.

gebogen.

geboteh.

gebunden,

gebeten.

geblasen.

geblieben.

gebrochen.

gebracht.

gedurft.

gedacht.

gedrungen.

empfangen.

empfohlen.

empfunden.

erblichen.

erkorcn.

A a

17S

ANALYSIS OF THE

Infihilive Mood.

Pres. IndicaL

26. erloschen, to become extinct -

ich erloscb^

27. erschrecken, to he frightened-

— erschrecke

28. erwsigen, , to consider - - -

— erwage-

29. essen, to eat - - - - -

— esse - .-

1

30. fahren, to drive a carriage -

— fahre -

31. fallen, to fall - - - - -

— falle- -

32. fangen, to catch

— fange -

33. fechten, to fence ^ or fight- -

— fechte -

34. finden, to find . - - - -

— finde -

35. fliegen, 7o^j/ - . - - -

— fliege -

36. fliehen, to rim atvay^ . . -

— fliehe •

37. fliessen, to flow -->•--

— fliesse -

38. fressen, to devour . - - -

— fresse -

39. frieren, to freeze - - - -

•

— ffiere -

40. gahren, tofemient- - - -

— gahre -

4 1 . gebahren, to bring forth - -

— •' gebahre

42. geben, to give - - - - -

— gebe -

43* gebieten, to command - - -

— gebiete -

44. gefallen, to please - - - -

— gefalle -

45. 5'ehen, to gOy or walk - - -

— gehe -

46. gelten, to estimate^ or cost -

^— gelte -

47. geniessen, to enjoy - - - .

— geniesse

48. gewinnen, to gain, orzvin -

— - gewinne

49. giessen, to pour - - - - -

— giesse -

50. gleichen, to resemble - - -

— gleiche -

51. graben, to dig -^ - - - -

— grabe -

52. greiffen, to seize, or lay hold of

— greiffe -

53. halten, to hold - - - - " -

— h^lte -

SEftMAH LAKGUAGE.

ieconii Person

Pretcrimp.

Imperaf.

Prct.Partic

ich ritt -

gcritten.

— roch -

gerochen.

— rang -

gerungen.

— rann -

geronnen.

— rief -

gerufen.

iu saufst -

— sofF -

gesaffen.

— sog -

gesogen.

— schuf -

geschafFen.

— schied

geschiedcn.

— schien

geschienea.

^ schiltst -

— schalt

schiit -

gesciioltec.

— schierst -

— schor -

schier -

gcschorcn.

— schob -

gcschoben.

— schosz

geschossen.

— schund

geschunden.

-- schlafst -

— schlicf

gcscfalafen.

— schtagst-

— schlug

geschlagcn.

— schlich

geschlichen.

— schliff-

geschliffea.

— schlosz

»eschlossei!.

— schlang

jeschlungen

— schmisz

5cschmlssen,

— Echnitt

geschnitten.

— schrieb

geschriebcu.

— schrie -

—^

geschrieen.

— schritt

geschritten.

~- schwor

geschwOTcn.

— schwieg

geschwiegcn.

AHAXVS13 OP THE

58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
€i.
65.
66.
67.
68.,

72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.

Infinitive Mood.

hangen, ta hang - - .
heben, tc heaix, or lift up

heissen, to bid, or name -

helfen, to help - - - -

konnen, to be able - - -

kennen, to knoxv - - -
kiingeo, to sound, or rij;g

koinmen, to come - - -

kricchen, la creep - - -

lasseo, to let, or permit -

laufen, to run - - - -

leiden, to silver - - - -

leihen, to lend - - - -

lesen, to read - - - -

liegen, to lie-, or rest - -
lugen, to utter a falsehood-
mogen, to be permitted

meiden, to avoid - . -

melken, to milk- - - -

messen, to measure- - -

raiissen, to he ohUged - -

nehmen, to take - - -

pfeiffen, to whistle- - -

preisen, to praise - ~ .

quellen, to spring forth -

rathen, to advise - - -

reiben, to rub - . . -

reissen, to tear - - - -

Pres. Indict.

ich hange -

— hebe -

— heisse -

— helfe -

— kann -

— kenne -

— klinge -

— komme-

— krieche-

— lasse- -

— laufe -

— Jeide -
■ — leihe

— lese - -

— liege

— lijge -

— mag

— meide -

— melke -

— messe -

— musz -

— nehme -

— pfeiffe -

— preise -

— quelle -

— rathe -

— reibe -

GEKMAN LANOUAGE.

181

•ond Person.

JPreterimp.

Imperat.

PreLPartic.

hangst -

ich hieng

gchangen.

— hob -

gehoben.

■

— hiesz -

geheissen.

hilfet- -

— half -

hllf -

geholfen.

kannst -

— konnte

gekormt.

— kannte

gekanot.

— klang-

gekJungcQ,

kommst-

— kam -

gekonimen.

— kroch -

gekrochen.

]assest -

— liesz -

!asz

gelassen.

laufet -

-lief -

gelaufen.

-Htt -

gelitten.

— lieh -

geliehen.

liesest -

— las -

les- -

gclesen.

-lag .

gelegen.

— log -

gclogen.

magst -

— mochte

gemocht.

— mied -

gemieden.

— molk -

gemolken.

missest -

— masz -

misz -

gemessen.

muszt -

— muszte

gemust.

nimmst -

— nahm -

nimm -

gcnommen.

— pfiff -

gepfiffen.

— pries -

gepriesen.

quillst '

— quoll -

quill -

gequollen.

rathst -

— rieth -

gerathen.

— rich -

gerieben.

— risz r

gerissen.

ANALYSIS OF THE

■ Infinitive Mood.

Pres. Indicat

»2. reiten, to ride on horseback -

— reite -

83. riechen, to smell- - - - -

— riechc -

S4. ringen, to wrestle - - - -

— ringe -

«5. rinnen, to run, or leak - -

— rinne -

86. nifen, lo call - - - - -

— rafe

87. saufen, to drink like a brute

— saufe -

8S. saugen, to suck- - - - -

— sauge -

89. schaflen, to create - - - -

_ schaffe -

90. sehelden, to separate - - -

— scheide-

91. schcinen, to shine, appear or seem

— scheine -

92. schelten, to chide - - - -

— schelte -

93. schercn, to shear - - - -

— schere -

94. schieben, to shove - - - -

— schiebe -

95. schiessen, to shoot • - - -

— schiesse-

96. schinden, to fiai) - - - -

— schindc"

97. schlafen, to sleep - - - -

— schlafe -

98. schlagen, lo beat - - - -

— schlage -

99. sehleichen, to sneak • - -

— scbleiche

lOa schleifTen, lo ^rind, or sharpen

— schleifFe

101. schliesserij to lock, or conclude

— schliesse

102. schlingen, to devour - - -

— schlinge

103. schmeissen, tofiing - - •

— schmeisse

104. schpeiden, to cut - - - -

— schneide

105. schreiben, to write - - -

— schreibe

106. schreien, to ay - - - -

— schreie t

107. schreiten, to stride - - -

1— schreite-

108. schwaren, to/ester - - -

— achware

W9. schwe'igen, to be silent - -

— schweige

'

SERMAK LANGUAGE.

183

Second Person

Pretcrimp.

Imperat.

Ptet.Partic

ich ritt -

geritten.

— roch -

gerochen.

— rang -

geruTigciL

— rann -

geronnen.

— rief -

gerufen.

du saxxhX. ~

— soff -

gesoffen.

— sog -

3;esog>en.

— schuf -

■

geschaffen.

— schied

geschieden.

— schien

geschienen.

— schiltst -

— schalt

schilt -

jesclwlten-

— schierst -

— schor -

schjer -

geschoren.

— schob -

geschcibeii.

— schosz

geschossen.

— schund

geschunden.

— schlafst -

— schUef

__

geschlafen.

— schlagst-

— schlug

geschiagen.

^- schlich

gesch lichen.

— schiiff-

gwchliffen.

— schlosz

jeschloBsen.

— schlang

5eschlungen

— schmisz

— .1

jeschmissen.

— Echnitt

^eschnitten.

-— schrieb

geschrieben.

— schrie -

geschiiecB.

— schritt

geschritten.

^- schwor

geschworen.

— schwieg

gescbwiegen

ANALYSIS OF THB

Infinitive Mood.

Prcs. Indicat.

110.

schwellcn, to twdl, - - -

ich schwelle

111.

schwimmen, lo swim - - -

— schwimme

112.

ichwlndeni to shrink - - -

— schwinde

113.

schwingen, (o swing - - -

— schwjnge

114.

schworcn, to swear - - -

— schwore

115.

schen, (o see - ' - - -

— sehe- -

116.

sieden, ta boil, - - - - -

— siede -

117.

singeiij lo sing' - - - -

— singe -

IIS.

sinken, to sink- - - ~ -

— sinke -

119.

sinnen, to meditate - - -

— sinne -

120

sifzen, to sit - - - - -

— sitze -

121.

sollen, to be compelled - -

— soil- -

122

speien, to spit - _ - .

— speie -

123.

spinnen, to spin - - - -

— spinne -

124.

sprechen, to speak - - -

— spreche-

125.

springen. to leap - - - -

— springe -

126.

stechen, lasting, or prick -

— steche -

127.

stehen, to sCaiid - - . -

— stehe -

128.

stehlen, to steal - - _ -

— stehle -

129.

steigen, lo mount, or ascend

— steige -

130.

sterben, lo die- . - . .

— sterbe -

131.

stieben, loji/ of with a jerk.

— stiebe -

132.

stinken, lo stink - - - -

— stinke -

133.

stoszen, ta push - - . .

— stQsze -

134.

streichen, to sivcep, or rub alojig

— streiche-

135.

streiten, to contend, or combat

— streite -

136.

thun, to perform - - - .

— thue- -

137.

tragen, ta bear, carry, or ivear

— trage -

GEHIIAN LAHGUAGJl;

- Y

tamaa

185

Sectmd Person.

du schwillst

— siehst

mm0>-m»^mm^.

sollst- -

Sprichst -

stichst -

stiehlst -

stil'bst -

wmifmt

— stoszest-

•*• tragst

ichschwoU sehwill
— schwamm

— schwand

— schwang

— schwdr
sah - Isieh

sott -

— sang -
-^sank -

— sann -

- sasz -

— sollte -

- spie -

— spann-

— sprach

— sprang

— stach -

- stand -

— stahl -

— stieg -

- starb -

— stob -

— stank -

— stiesz -

— strich -

— stritt -

— that -

— trug . I

sprich -

stichl -

stirb -

PreL Part.

geschwoUen.

geschwommea

geschwunden.

geschwungen.

geschworen*

gesehcn.

gesottcn.

gesungen.

gesunke;z.

gesofinen.

gesessen.

gesoUt.

gespicen.

gesponnen

gesprochcn,

gesprangen.

gestochen.

gestanden.

gestohlen.

gestiegen.

gestorben,

gestoben.

gestunken. ^

gestosten.

ge$trichen

gestritten.

gethan.

jgetragen]

186

AVAI^TSIS OF THB

Ifffinitive MoodL

1S8. trefien, to hit j touchy or mark
1 39, treibeoy /(i ^'i;^, or carry on
140* treteoy to tread * - - -

141. triegeoy or trugen^ to deceive

1 42. trinken^ to i/niiA: - - - -

143. vcrbergen, to conceal- • -

1 44. wacHsen, to grow, or vegetate

145. waschen, to wash f - * -

1 46. weicben^ to yieldy or give way

147. weisen^ to show ^ or point out

1 48. wissen, to i:mw£) ♦ - -. -

149. werben, to sue, apply ^ obtain

150. werfen^ to throw ^ - - -

151. wiegen, to weighs - • -

152. wollen, to te willing - - -

153. wioden^ to wind, turn - -

154. ^ihen, to accuse of- - -

155. zkhen, to draw, or pnU^ -

156. zwingen^ to force ^ compel -

^r^/. Indicate

ich trefie -

— treibe •
-r- trete -

— triege -

— trinke -

— verberge

— wachse *

— wasche -

— weiche •

— wekc -

— weisz -

— werbe -

— werfe -

— wiege -

— will -r ,

— windc -

— zeihe -?

— ziehe -

G^HMAN LAKGUACE.

187

Second Person.

Preterimp.

du trifist

— tritst-

I

MUM

verbirgst
wachsest
waschest

weiszt
wirbst
wirfst

■«•«<■«•«

traf •
trieb -
trat -
trog .
trank -
verbarg
wuchs
wusch
wich -

wies -
waste -
wafb -
warf -
wog -
woUte
wand-r

«

zieh -
2og •
zwang

triflF

tritt

verbirg

wirb -
wirf -

tt^i^immmam

Pret, Part.

getrofFen.
getrieben,
getreten.
getrogen.

getrunken,

verborgen,

gewachsefn,

gewaschen,

gcwichen.

gewiesen.

gewuszt,

geworben.

geworfen.

gewogen,

gew6llt.

gewunden,

gezieben.

gezogen.

gezwungen<

Bb 2

188

ANALYSIS OF THS

Verbs, formerly Irregular y but frequently Used ds

Regular.

backen, to back.
bewegeriy to put in motion .
bleichetiy tol)leach, whi-

ten,
braien, to roast.
brennen^ to burn,
dingetiy to hire.
dreschen^ to thresh.
erschaUeUy to resound.
fallen^ to fold.
fechten, to plait.
fragerij to ask. -
gedeiheuj to prosper.
gelingefiy to succeed ;

which is only used in

the third person.
genesen, to recover from

illness.
gescheheriy to happen,

occurs only in the

third person.
gleiten, to glide.
hangen: to hang, is the

both are often mis-
taken for one another.

haueriy to hew or cut.

hieifferiy or kneipen, to
pinch.

kreisckeriy to scream.

laden, to load.

mahlen^ to grind or paint.

nenneriy to name.

pf^egeuy to foster, or che-
rish.

rennetij to run, or rush.

fchmelzeUy to melt.

schnauben, to snort.

schrauben, to screw.

seiideriy to send.

spalten, to split.

spriessen^ to sprout.

zvdgen, to weigh.

wendeUy to turn.

zerstieberiy to be sud-
denly scattered. (See
stiebe?i.J

transitive for hangen ;

All the verbs beginning with ver, and all
other compounds in general, if irregular, are ih-^
fleeted according to the simple verb, which I have
shewn in the foregoing list. Others, which I have

not

GERMAN LANGUAGE. , 189

ilol noticed at all, are, of course, together with
their compounds, considered as regular.

y^jRBS that have been formerly used as Irregular ^
but are twzv always formed as Regular.

frageuy to ask.

glimmen, to glimmer.
jagen, tochase^ drive fast.
kreisseUy to be in liquor.
loschen^ to extinguish.

rdchen, to avenge.
salxeuy to salt.
schallertj to sound.
trieffhuy to drop, distill.
webeuy to weave.

IV. Of Neuter Verbs.

Verbs, expressing an independent action,
that is to say, an action without reference to an
object ; or denoting merely a state of being, or
resting, come under the denomination of Neuters s
as, setzeUy to sit down 5 liegeUy to lay down, gehen^
to go ; stehen, to standi reisen^ to travel.

It is very difficult to draw a precise line of
demarcation between Active and Neuter verbs ;
for those, which are commonly used as actives,
may also be made use of as neuters ; as, schlagen,
to beat y saeriy to sow sfeed ; schreibeUy to write ;
lesen, to read, &c. &c. may mean, / am in a state
of solving y writing y &c. without a relation to a
particular object. On the other h^nd, such as in
general have the character of Neutersj may occa-
sionally assume the quality of Actives ; aS, ich
spaziere — eine Meile, I walk — a mile ; ich reite
— ein Pferd, 1 ride — a horse, &c.

I should

IdO AKALTSIS Ot THE

I should have little to say of Neuter Vcrta,
were it not necessary to remark, that some of them
take in the Preterite Tenses, the auxiliary seyn, to
be ; whereas in English to have is used. HencCi
many of my scholars have, by an adherence to the
idiom of their own language, been led into gram-
matical errors ; to obviate which, I shall particu^
larly describe those verbs, and add some examples.

The following are joined with the auxiliary
hapen.

}. All neuter verbs, by which the subject
may be thought more active than passive, and
consequently all proper actives, if they stand as
transitive ; as, die Uhr hat geschlageriy the clock has
struqk ; der Gartner hat gesaetj the gardner has
sowed, &c.

2. All neuters, denoting the production of a
sound, and the finishing of an action ; as, der Wind
hat gebraiiset, the wind has been boisterous; der
Baum hat ausgebliihet, the tree has ceased to
bloom, &c.

3. Those which suffer a Present Participle,
(but not those of a Preterite one) as, dursten, to be.
thirsty 3 blilzen^ to lighten ; dampfen^ to steam, &c,

4. Those denoting a change of place, (and
not those which have no relation of place, which.
require seyn) as, wir haben den .ganzen Tag ge*
spnuigeny geritten, gereist, &c. we have all day

,loag jumped, rode on horseback, travelled, 8cc.

5. All which are used impersonally and red-

pro-

GERMAN 1.ANGVAGE. 191

procajly ; as, es hat gefroren^ it has frozen ; es fiat
mir geahndety I have foreseen ; ich habe mich niiide
gegangeuy I have tired myself by walking.

Xhe following Neuters are joined with the
auxiliary seyn.

1 . Those which denote a change or transition
from- one condition or state into another ; as, aus-
arteriy to degenerate ; Pret. Part, ich bin ausgeartet;
erbtasseuj, to grow pale ; begegnen, to meet a person ;
geneseUy to recover, &c.

2< Such as express motion with locality, i. e*
motion with relation to place or distance ; the
place or distance may either be named or un»
derstood, in which case seyn is to be joined t6
the verb ; as, ich bin nach Paris gereisty I have
travelled to Paris ; meine Mutter ist nach Bath ge-
fahretty my mother is gone to Bath.

In the former the locality is expressed ; in the

following it is merely understood, as in verbs com-

, pounded with Jocal particles, ex. gr. abreiseny to

depart ; anlangeriy to arrive ; durchsegelny to sail

through^ &c.

Motion^ however, may al$Q be conceived as
tnere action, without the association of place or
distance; then the verb is joined with haben^'^x^
x^ with the former s as, ich hake grfidireny I faavie
been driving (a carriage); er hat getanziy he hsis
lieen dancing ; ich habe gffsckmpmmeny I b^ve been
$wi]»niiDg.*^But, a^ soon ^s the manner of moti^i
\% expxe^(9^ »^ fyst^ slow, fee seyn again serves

MS

}92 ANALYSIS OT TflE

as the auxiliary ; as this could not well be imagiiif d
without the idea of space, ex. gr. wir sind langsam
gegangen^ we have been walking slowly; wir sind
geschwinde ge/ahreni we have been driving quickly;
sie sind spatzieren gerilten^ they have taken an air-
ing on horseback, &c.

3. Sejpi is always joined with the following \
verbs, for they can never admit haben $ as, faikn^
to fall ; folgerty to follow ; gelicn^ to go ; kommcih
to come ; zveichen, to yield ; — likewise, beg€gne»$
to occur; bleiberiy to remain; geliiigen^ to succeed;
gesch^hen, to happen.

4. It sometimes occurs that a neuter vcrl>
adopts either sej/n, or haben, according as the sig-^
niiication is more active or passive ; as, ich din, o

kabe gdandety I have landed ; ich bin, or habe ein^
gekehret, I have stopped (at an inn), &c: In suchp^
doubtful cases, seyn, is more preferable, for habere
^ems to me to be provincial.

V. Of Compound Verbs.

This chapter comprizes verbs that are com-
pounded with prepositions, and such invariable
words as are styled particles in German. Scrnie
of them remain combined in all cases, and never
quit their position, consequently may be looked
upon ^s genuine or inseparable compounds j whereas,
others are frequently separated, and are not deemed
genuine, i. e. the particle or preposition, at the
beginning, may either be separated firom th? verb
or not. l./n-

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

193

IfiSeparable compound verbs are those begin-
ning with

^3

ent; •
en

hinter ;
misz ;

T)€r ;

verab ;
vernach ;
verurC;
voll >• '
wider ;

zer J —

as, bcleberiy

to animate ;

— empfangen, .
tp receive ;

— entwqffhen,
to disarm ;

— erjinden^
to hnrent}

— grfaUen,
to please j

— hhUergehen^
to deceive >

— miszrathen^
to dissuade ;

— urtheilen^
to judge;

— " ver^ehreuy

to consume ;

-^ verabreden,
to concert ;

— vemachldsiigeny
to neglect;

— • verunreimgen^
to soil;

— volkdehen^
tp execute ;

— zoidersprechen,
to contradict ;

zerstdreriy
to destroy;

from leberty
to live.

fangen, ^

to catch.

■ wqffnen,
to arm.

, to find.

—r— faUen,
tofaU.

— — geken,
to go.

rathen,

to advise.

— — tkeilefi,

to divide.

■ ' ■ ■ ■ zehren,
to waste.

— ^ redeuy

to speak.

^— — lassefi^
to leave.

reinigen^
to clean.

Ziehen,
to draw.

sprechen^
to speak.

stdren^ ,
tostir> '

cc

Ob-

194

ANALYSIS OF THE

Observation.

None of thc| foregoing verbs evpr admit a
separatioh of the prefixed syllable^ nor receive the
augmentative -one ge, in the Pteterite Participle ;
vsrhich is also the case> with a very few excep-
tions, with other compound yqrbs, "which have
short syllables.

2. The separable compounds are very nume-
rous. Their prefixes are for the most part prepo-
sitions, consequently are not so closely connected
with the verb, as the former j for that reason thejr
are oft^ri separated frorfi it, by a long series oF
word*^ , Tbey are composed with

» » t

I • »

ab i .

ans

^^ifs

aus s

bet ^

herbei s

vorbei s

dar

dabei >

as, abschreiberiy
to copy ;

— ^ amnelden,
to announce -,

— au/stehen,
to rise ;

— atisdrikketty.
to express ;

r— beimessen,
to impute ;

*— herbeirufen^
to call near;

— — .: vorbeigehen,
to pass by }

— darsfellen,

to represent ;

m^ dabeisteheny
to stand by s

from

schretben,
to write.

melden^
to mention.

steheriy
to stand.

driicken,
to press.

messen,
to measure.

Tufen.
to call.

geherij
to go.

stelleriy
to put.

steheuy
to stand.

da-

davon s as,
(lurch s —

ein

iiberein s
fehl s
fort;
fiir;
gleigh^i

heim s

^inheim j

her;

fierahj
heron s
heraus s
herein s
hin;
hinab ;

GSIMAN LANGUAGE.

davonlatifen, fit)m

to run off 1

durcMesen^

to read tlp'ough ;

, eifffuhren^
to introduce :

iibereiTikommen, .
to agree j

fehlschlageriy
to miss ;

fortmacheTif
to make haste ;

furbittcriy
to intercede ;

gldchkommen^
to be alike ;

heirnsuchen^
to visit ;

anfieimsteUen^
to refer to j

hersagen,
to recite ;

herabsetzen,
to lower ;

herarifuhren,
to bring on ;

herausholen,
to fetcji out ;

keteinrufeni
to call in s

hiasinken$
to sink down ;

hinablassen^
to let down y

c c 2 '

195

laufen^
to run.

lesefiy
tp read.

fihren^ ,
to guide.

kofrimen,
to come.

schlage/h
to beat.

. machen,
to make.

bitten,
to beg.

Jcommen, .
to come.

suchen^
to seek.

steU^n^ •
to place.

^^sagen,
to say.

setzetir •'
to set. ^

fUhren,
to lead.

to fetch.

.mfen,
to call.

sinl^en,
to sink.

lassen,
to let.

hin*

196

ANALYSIS or THE

hinaus ; ^s,

hinunters

los ;
rait ;
nach ;
nieder ;
ob ;
iiber ;

nmj

unter s

voll ;

vor s

uegs
wieder

zu;

zurilck s

to

hinauswefferif from
to fling out ;

hinunterspringen,
to leap down ;

tossprecheuy -

to absolve ;

mitbringeny
to bring with ;

nachlaiifen,
to run after

niederfalleny
to f^ll down s

obliegen^

to be incumbent on

uberfliesseriy
to overrun ;

vrnkehretij
to return ;

untersinkeny
sink to the ground;

vollsaufejiy
to intoxicate;

vorstelleuy
- to represent ;

wegkommeny ,
to disappear ;

xoiederbringen^
to bring back ;

zuschreibeuj
to attribute ;

xuriicksendeny
to send back ;

werferiy
to fling.

springetiy
to leap.

sprechen;
to speak.

brhigen.
to bring-

laiffcTh
to run.

fallen,
to fall.

liegen^
to lie.

flies icih
to run.

kehren,
to sweep.

sinken,
to sink.

— r- saUfen,
to drink like a brute <

steUenj^

to put.

■ kommen.

to come.

•— — briT^erty
to bring.

schreiben,

to write.

^enden^
to send*

Re.

german language. 197

Rematiks.

1 . These compounds preserve their ge in the
Preterite Participle, where it; is placed between
the preposition and the verb ; thus : abgescfwieben^
copied ; hsgelasseriy released, &c.

2. It is the same with the particle xw, in
the Infinitive ; as, abzuschreiberiy for to copy ; los-
zulassen, for tarelease ; wiederzukommeny for to come
back again, &c.

3. The separable prepositions are always
placed after the verb In the Present and Preter-
imperfect Tenses ; as, ich sckreibe ab, I copy ; ich •
schrieb aby I copied, &c.

4. The following particles are sometimes used
separably, and sometimes inseparably ; as, durck^
uruy Uber, unter, voU^ wieder. Their separation or
non-separation gives the verb quite a different sig-
nification, ex.gr.

ich durchgehcy I peruse ; ich gehe durch^ I desert,
ich untcrstehe mich, 1 venture ; ich stehe unteVy I

stand under cover, &c. &c.*

»

VI. Of Reflective Verbs.

When the action, expressed by a verb, w?-
turhd to the subject from which it proceeds, the'
verb is called Reflective y or Reciprocal. Almo^

every

■. \

n ii r II

* Practice will easily shew how these particles tnay be
applied.

19S ANALYSIS OF THE

every verb in German, implying action/ is capable
of this reflecfion ; nevertheless, there are several
that are never used without the reciprocal prc^
nouns, and w^hich may be called, in the strictest
sense of the word, true reflectiyes. Before I pro-
ceed to display them, I must first mention, that
most reflective verbs govern the reciprocal pro-
nouns, michy dich, sichy — .unsy euchy sichy in the
Accusative case, few in the Dative, and one only
admits of bo^q ; thus :

With the Accusative,
ich erbarme michy I have compassion.
ich besmie michy I recollect.
ieh unter^tehe michy T dare, &c.

With the Dative,
ich bilde ndr eiriy I fancy.
ich gelraue mivy \ venture.
ich masze mir any I arrogate to myself, &c»

Both cases,
mir deuchty or mich deiichty methinks.

Remarks.

1, All reflective verbs are joined with the
auxiliary hahen.

2. The reciprocal pronoun is not to be se-
parated from its verb in the Present and Preter-
imperfect. In the Indicative, Conjunctive, and
Imperative Tenses, where the auxiliary is used^
the pronoun is annexed to it, while the verb, itself
is placed at the end of the sentence ; as,

er

GERMAN LAKOTtAOfi. 199

er h^bUet sick mit teercr Hcffitung^ iie comforts him-
self with vain hope.

€rhat sick mit leerer Hqffmng getrostet^ be has com-
forted himself with Vain hope.

3. There are some active and neuter verbs^
which, when used as reflectives have a particular
and energetic signification, ex. gr.

sick aus dem Athem laiifen^ to loose the breath

by running.
sick miide tanzcjiy to dance oneself tired.
sick aus einern Handel her auslugen, to extricate one-
self out of an affair by means of lies.
sich arm sau/e7i9 to get poor by means of drinking.
Sick xu Todte saufen^ to perish by means of drinking

too much.

4. The German language contains some re-
flectives, which * are composed of several other
particles ; as,

sick auf eine Sache etzvas einHlden, to be proud of

having performed something.

^ich Preisz gehen^ to give oneself over as a prey,

or to surrender oneself, &c.

The first of these is regular, the last irregular ;
but as such modes of speech occur very seldom, the
student will easily become acquainted with these
few anomalies, especially when he has acquired
fte principal parts of German speech.

5. Some verbs are only used as reflectives
b' k particular signification 5 as,

sick hrufen, to appeal to. - •

sich

20O AKALYSI& OF TUt

Sich hdehken, to hesitate.
sick hiitenj to beware, &c.

6* Others are, in the same signiiicatioR^ Qsed^
as simple verbs, ana as reftectives ; as,
irren and $ich itren, to be mistaken.
schenen — * sich scheuen^ to be shy of a thing.
%anken — sich %anken to qoarreL

VII. Of Impersonal A^erbs.

When the subject of a verb is expressed so in-
deffnitely, that it even remains undecided,^ whether
it be a person or any other object, it is then called
an impersonal verb, which is to be expressed .by
the third person singular of all tenses, with the in-
definite pronoun es ; as, es donnerty it thunders \
es regnetj it rains ; es hat geschnczei, it has snowed,
&c* The subject which is son^eiimes ea:pressed hf
man, one, or they> instead of es, does not consti*
tute an impersonal The impersonal merely de-
pends on the manner, by which the subject is
expressed; for that reason many active and neuter
verbs may be used as impersonal In a limited sig-
nification, those only can be called true iniperjwnals,
which^have generally no relation with a definite sub-
ject > as, es thauety it thaws ; es rajet, it i&rimy ; es
frierty it freezes > eshggelt, it hails: more particulau^ly
so, if they are reciprocal ; as, es schzoindelt pUtj, I
son giddy ; es scMdfert michy I am sleepy. Some-
times es is left out ; as, mich schld/ert, mich hun^
gerty &c. They have neither a Passive, nor Impe-
• rative

GERMAN LANGUAGE. ' 201

rative Mood ; and very seldom a Participle. How-
ever the Passive of other verbs miy be used im-
personally ; as, es wird gesagt^ it is said, or they
say ; es wird geschossen, they are firing guns, &c.
but in that case, even neuter verbs may obtain a
passive signification ; as, es wird gegangeus they
are vralking ^ es wird geritten^ they are riding (on
horseback) ^ es tvird gereisety they are travelling, &c.

CHAPTER VL
Of the Participle.

Participles, as far as relates to their declen"
sions, do not differ from adjectives ; but as there is
something peculiar in the use of German Partid-
pies, I am therefore necessitated to treat of thj^m
separately in the Syntax.

CHAPTER VII.

Of Prepositions.

The prepositions compose in the German lan-
guage , a very important part of speech, and con-
sequently require a nic^ discrimination ; so that if
tiie student wishes to attain correctness in the
idiom of that part of speech, he must, not ima-
fide that it will be sufficient literally to .translate

D d pnglish

S62 ANAtYSIS Of tMK

feiiglish phrases into Oennan,but he must take feto
fconsiderjilion the pecuiiar nature of every exprw-
^lon and its peculiar signification.

To facilitate this part of Speech, I have deemed
it essentially iiecessary only to mention, in this
place, the primary English signification of those
' jprepositiohs which govern difi'erent cases, «id
placed the various other meanings in English wiA
their respective exemplifications, by which means
the attention being directed, to those words, with
which they are joined, the student will clearly see
the manner of their application. The above di-
rections should be carefolly fioted ; for the same
. prepositioji which governs, in one instance^ a Ge-
. nitive case, may bear quite a contrary meanings in
different phrases, in other c^es.

The prepositions in German are either radical,
as, ab, an, in j or derivatives, as, zimchen, gegetiy
auszer, &c. or compounds, as auszerhalb, inndrhalb,
&c. and often they are borrowed from other parts
of speech, as laut, krajt, &c.

They very often supply the place of those
deficient cases, which could not be expressed in
the declension. The student should understand,
lAiat ti)e greatest part pf die syntax is finined on
the pxiop^ies of die picpositions, wl^ch ajpe inflexi-
ble and indeclindbile^ aad mostly placed before
iiOiuis 3 though in miajiy instances they iti« jofixird -
to verbs.

However, their priiicq>al power is, to igmern

different

GSRMAN LANGUAGE. 208

diSere&t cases, as for instance : the Genitive^ or
the Dative alone s or both together ^ and sometimes
the Dative and Accusative together^

The student will find each preposition cara*
fyS^Y arranged, together with their peculiar sigr
nifications and applications \ and under th^ head <;^
their governing case I shall notice all (sxception^
to the established rules, and afterwards conclude
the yvhole, with some general remarks^. >

tltB|>0SIT10N9 GOVERNING THU GENITIVB.

Anstatt or, statt. — ^ Both are indiscriminatelv
used for each other. The first means, literall^^
in the place of, like the English insteai s the Utter
is an abridgment of the former, and as a prcposi-
tion» is the same as the English stead. It often has
iilso a substantive signification, and denotes a place.
We find dnslatt of):en separated ; as, anstatt^ or
'ttdll des Komgs tear sein Minister (fa, itist^d '<lf
the king, his minister was present ; an des Vateft
statt y instead of the father ; statt meiiier, deiner,
seiner, &c. instead of mine, thine^ his, &€. ; 4im
Kindts statt annehmeny to adopt, &c.

DiesseitSy on this side; — ^as, diesseits deis^WtHh

to d 2 seffy

<■■■,. ■ ■ f ii~ '-1-ri-iwi, itf . ■

^ The 2^glar mast excuse those instances where in the
JeogKsh IviiSKfibti I lunre sometiines literally ifbllowbd iSk
phrase of the German, as it is done wifli a View that teldl^

204 ANALYSIS OF THE

sitrs, ' or des Fhsses. on this side of the water or
river.

Halben, or kalbery on account of. — It de-
notes a motive, and is always placed behind the
case it governs. The first is preferred, when an
article precedes the noun ; the latter, when with-
out it 5 as, ich that es dcr Fraindschqft halben^- 1
did it on account of our friendship ; Alters hcLlber,
on account of age.

It occurs abbreviated in deszkalb, on that
account ; weszhalby on which account ; and in the
fpUowing compound prepositions : auszerhaW, with-
out, on the outside of ; inncrhalb\ within, in the
Inner part of s pberhalby above, on the upperside of;
nnterhalb^ below, on the lower side of.

JenseitSy on the other side ; — as, jenseits des
Flussei, ovf. the other side of the river.

Kraft, by the power, or virtue of; — as, krqft
meines Amtes, by the power of my office s krqft
4es Vertrags^ by virtue of the contract.

LmU, according to ; — as, laut des koniglicheu
£iefehls, according to. the king'§ order.

Mittelsty or vermittelst. — Sigi^ifies : by tl^f
means of. The latter is more in U3e than the first ;
as, vermittelst deines Be^jStandes, by the means pf
your assistance.

Urn - willen, for the sake of ;— :as, um Gpttes-
PfiUeuy for God's §ake ; %{m ihrer Ehre-willen^ for
|iie sake of your honour.

' U^achtet^QX fhngeu^t. •— < Signifies ; Dotr

withi

GEltMAN LANGUAGE* £03

withstatiding ; the* first is more proper than the
latter ; as, ungeachtel alter Hindemis^e, notwith-i
standing all impediments.

Unweity not far from ;— as, mizveit der Kirche,
not fiir from the church.

Vermoge. — Signifies : by dint of, by the power
of, by means of ; as, vermoge der Uebung^ by dint
of practice ; vermoge des Fleisses, by means of in-
dustry, &c.

Wdhrend, during;— as, wahrend meiner Ge^
fangenschafty during my imprisonment.

Wegeny because of, &c. — Ich that es meiner
Mutter wegen, I did it, because of my mother ; er
fprach mit mir wegen des Pferdes^ he spoke to ni$
concerning the horse, &c.

Remarks on the foregoing Prepositions.

1 . The two following compound prepositions,
in Betseyn, and in Gegenwart^ signifying both, ia
presence, must be noticed here, because they oc-
cur frequently ; as, in Beiseyn def Todhter^ in pre-
sence of the daughter ; in Gegenwart der Mutter^
|n presence of the mother, &c,

2. When the preposition halben is precede4
by the pronouns ichy du, er, we substitute a / in-
stead of the letter r in the Genitive of meiner^
(kiner, seiner s ' as, 7nein€thaU)en^ deinethalben^ set-
^ethaWen, for my, thy, ' his sake.

8. In the Genitive phiral of the former two
poQOuns we do not reject the letter r, but

we

t06 AKALTSIS or THE

we add a^ / to it s as^ unserthalberif eurcthalben,
forour, yoqrsal^e; ihrethalbenf signifies either for
her, or their sake.

4. fFegen is put indiscriminately, either before
or after the regime ; as, zpegen def Unkosten^ ox
der Unkosten tvegen^ on account of the expense.
It h employed, the same as halhen, with the pefr
sonal pronouns ; a3, meinetwegen, seinetzvcgcn^ ihr
retwegen.

i. In um - wiUen^ the um is always pi^f first
and wiUen-nfttr the regime. It is employed wift
the personal pronouns like halben ^d zvegen,

6. Ungeachtetj, is placed either before xyt ^Sutt
its regime : as, dessen uvgeachlet, notwithstJinding
thi§.

PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE 'l^ATIVE CASE',

Ati&j out pf ;-rras, aus dcm Beit^ out of bed 5
aus Furchty out of fear ; er that es aus eigenem Anr
trieb, he did it from his own impulse.

Juszer, without of, &c. &c. ;-r-as, auszer den^
HaiiS€3 out of the house \ misi^r allem Zzvejfetf^
without doubt ; er ist answer sich, he is deprived of
(its senses ; auszer Ordnung^ auszer Stafide^ out of
-order,, out of condition ; auszer den Offkieren k(f:
wen auck verscfiied^ne angesehene £^aujleute, beside^
the officers, there came ^Iso several eminent jxkc^r
phants.

Bei, upon, by, 8cc. &c. ;~as, dr ist beim "^anzcy
jbe is at a dancing party j bei meinem Mq/i^^'mfaf

m

CEItMAK LAir60AGE.. 207

ttly liMse ; fcr tneiner Ehre, upon my llonour, er
MiAm mich bei der Handy he took me by the hand ^
hei etrnfti Freuridc fruhstiickeny to breakfast with
Xk friend ; bei miry with me ; bei dem Himmel^ by'
heaven ; beiJupitery by Jupiter, &c. &c.

Entgegen; towards, against, &c. ; — ^as, dem
Winde entgegeuy against the wind ; ich gieng ihm
^ntgegeriy I went to meet him ; das ist meiner Mei-
nung entgegeiiy that is against my opinion.

GegenubeVy over against, opposite to,&c. ; — as,
er sasz mir gegenUbeVy he was sitting opposite to
me; dem Garten gegenUbery opposite the garden.
It is sometimes separated thus : gegen wir ubery ge^
gen ikm Garten uber.

Ldngsty along ; — as, Idngst dem Ufer hinsegeluy
to sail along the shore ; langft dem Wegey along the
road*

Mity with ; — as, er kam mit seinem Freundy
lie came with his friend ; viit ihm gekeny to go with
him.

■

Nachy after, &c. ; — as, er kam nach miry be
Caime after me i nach den Umstdndeny according to
WCumstances ; nach dem Gesettse, according to
law ; einer nach dem anderuy one after another ;
\mieiner Meinung nacky in my opnion ; wann reisen
K$ie nach der Sckweitz ? when do you set out &r
• Swisserland ? dem Strome nach, following the stream ;
nach meinem Todte, after my death ; nach mekr
' Mukey after much trouble. *

Nachsty or zundchst^ next ^'-^os, mihst melnAn

Bruder

208

ANALYSIS OF THE

Bruder bist du mir der LiebstCy next tQ my brother,
I like you best ; nlichst dent Bette^ next to the bed.

Nebsty or benebst, together with, &Cv — The
latter is provincial ; as, meineFreunde nebst tmrymj
friends together with me ; die Mutter nebst ihreHi
Kinde, the niother besides her child.

Sammty together with. — It is becoming ob-
solete ; as, samjnt seinem Gefolge, together witji his
household.

Seit, since ; — ^as, seit dem ich ihn keniie, since I
know him ; seit langer Zeit^ a long while since j
seit dem Kriege, since the war.

Voiiy from, &c. ; — as, ich komme vonmeinem
Bruder, I come from my brother j^^miT/W von
zzvei Jahren, a child two years of age ; von der
Seite angreifeuy to attack by the flank ; der Brief
ist von ihm geschrieben^ the letter is written by
him, &c.

Zuy to, &c. &c. 'y — as, komyn zu miry come ta
me ; zu Londouy at London ; zu Wasser, by water;
zu viely too much y zu Fusze, on foot ; mack die
Thiir zUy shut the door s fahre zUy drive on, &c.

Zu/olgey according to, in consequence of;: — as»
ihrem Befehl zufolgey according to your order, &x.

Zmvidery against, in opposition to. — Is always
put after the case ; as, der Verordnung zjtwider,
against the order ; dem Wohlsiande zuwidery against
decency.

Zwischeriy between. -^ Zwischen mir tmd iknif
between me and him, &c.

Jte.

aERMAK LANGUAGE. 209

f

Remarks on the pteceeding Prepositions^

1 . Instead of the preposition aus, we meet so-
ftietimes with vor ; as, er starb vor Kummer, he
died for grief.

2. Auszer governs also the Genitive, in one
instance^ as, auszer Landes^ abroad.

S. In the phrase, von Alters her ^ of old; the
preposition i^on admits the Genitive.

- 4. Zufolge, is always placed after the case. It
is sometimes, but not often, joined to a Genitive
case, which it preceads , .as, zufolge Hires Befehles,
in consequence of your order.

The foll6wing peculiar phrases, belong also
under this head :

er ist bei viir, he is with me.

bleiben sie diesen Abend bei uns^ stay this eVening

with us.

6^1 Hqfey at court.

nach Deutschland schreibeuy to write to Germany.

nach Hause gehen, to^ go home.

sich nach Morgen zoenden^ to turn towards the east.

dieser Weg geht nach dem Waldcy this way leads

to the forest.

nach der Wache schicken, to send for the watch,

or guard.

den Mantel nach dem Winde hdngen (a proverb),

to accomodate oneself according to circumstaiices.

er wofmt zu Paris, he lives at Paris.

xu Bettegehen, to go to bed.

£ e aus

ilO ANALYSIS OF THE

ans Eilelkeity out of ^ vanity.
aus Fiircht, out of fear.

FREPOSITiaNS GOVERKING THE ACCUSATIVE CAil.

Durchy through, &c. ;— as, ich habe diesen Brief
durch einen Reisenden erhalteriy I have received this
letter by a traveller ; durch alle Jahrhnndertey
through all centuries ; durch einen Schusz getodteU
killed by a shot ; ynkten durch d^n Wald, through
the middle of the forest ; durch den Gebrauch abge-
nuizt, v^orn out by use ; durch Sturm erobert,
taken by storm.

Fiir, for ; — as, ich kaufie dieses Buchfur meine
Tochter, I bought this book for my daughter ; ich
danke ihnenfUr das Geschenky I thar^ you for your
present; ein fur allemaly once for all ; Wortjur
Worty w^ord by v^ord ; Tag fur Tag, day by day.

- Gegen, to, towards, against, &c. ; — as, gegen
den Wind segeln, to sail against the wind ; gegen
Morgeny towards the east; er wandte sick gegen
viichy he turned himself towards me.

Ohncy without ; literally : not with ; — as, ohne
meine Einzvilligung, without my consent-^ ohne alien
Zweifely without doubt ; ohne mich, without me, &c.

Um^ round, aboutj Sic. ; — as, ttm die Siadt
spatziereuy to walk round the town ; es ist urn ihn
g^scheheuy it is over with him ; er hat micknm mein
Geld betrogen^ he has cheated me out of my money ;
eine Woche uni die andere, every other week ; um
sechs Uhr^ at six o'clock ; trni Geld spiehn, 4o play

for

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 211

for money ; umfiinfJahre alter^ older by five years ;
ehier tan den andeniy one after another ; dJe Woche
ist urn, the week is over ^ er zeigt es wns Geld, he
shows it for money ; um und u?n, round about, on
all sides.

Wider, against, in opposition to ;— as, wider
seinen Willen, against his will.

Remarks on the foregoing Prepositions.

1. The preposition fury for, must not be mis-
taken for that of vor, which signifies before.

2. Gen, instead of gegen^ is, an abbreviation of
the latter, and occurs but in few phrases ; as, gen
Himmel,. towards heaven s Nord gen Ost, north by
east.

3. Sonder. instead of ohne, is onlv used in
poetry; as, sonder' Geist, without spirit; sonder
Zxveifel, without doubt.

4. The preposition zvider, against, must not be
confounded with the adverb wieder, again.

PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING ALTERNATELY THE GE-
NITIVE AND DATIVE.

«

Those which govern the Genitive case, I have

fiiBy explained under their proper head. I shall

Aetrfore exhibit tho^e, which require a Genitive,

when preceding their case, and the Dative, when

placed after it :

Examples.

Auszer Landes, or auszer dem Lande, or aiiszer^

halb Landes, or auszerhalb dem Lande, out of tb^

E e 2 ^ Goun-

212

ANALYSIS OF THE

country, abroad ;. in wrA«/6 des Hauses^ or 'irmerw
halb dent Hause, in the ihner part of the house j
pherhalb des Berges, or oberhalb dem Berge, upoa
the mountain ; unterhalb des HiigelSy or unterkalb
dem HiigeU *below the hill ; zufolge ihres Befehls,
or ihrem Befehl zufolge y acco?ding to your com?
mand*.

PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING ALTERNATELY THE DA-
TIVE OR ACCUSATIVE CASE.

The following govern the Accusative^ w^hen
a motion to a place is intimated 3 and the Dative^
when they denote a rest.

Any has various significations in English,
Examples with the Dative case. An dem
XJfer des RheinSy on the banks of the Rhine i an
einem Orte zvohneny to live at a place \ an der
Thiir ste/ieny to stand at the door ; an mfinem
Platzey in my place ; es liegt am Fenster^ it lies
on the window ; mein Vater arbeitet an einem Bu •
chey my father is engaged in writing a book ; metne
Schwester starb an einer Auszekrung^ my sister died
of a consumption j arm an Freunderiy poor ' in
friends ; grosz an Ruhmy great in fame 3 schwach
an GedachtnisZy weak in memory ; man kennt da^
Silver an dem Klange, the silver is known by. its
sound, &c.

Example^

* The' preposition Vdngst, if very seldom put with the
frienitive cose ; it most frequently requires the Datiire.

SERMAN LANGUAGE. 213

Examples with the Accusative case. " An Tnei*
nen Brtider schreiben, to write to my brother ; ick
werde das G^^d an meinen Oheim absckicken, I shall
send the money to my uncle 5 an em Ding glauben^
to believe in a thing ; sick tfw etwas erinnerny to re-
member a thing ; bis an den Morgen, until the mor*
ning ; bis an das Meer^ as far as the sea ; bis an
das Ende, until the end, &c. &c.

Atif, upon, &c. &c.

Examples with the Dative case, Ich sitze atif
dent Stuhlcy I sit upon the chair ; sie 'ist aiifdem
Landry she is in the country > auf dent Thurme ste^^
ken^ to sjand upon the steeple ; avfder Jagd seyn,
to be at the chace ; aiifder Gasse heruni gehen, to
walk about the street ; sie ist aufdem Balle^ she is
at the ball ; mein Bruder befindet sick auf der Uni^
versiiaty my brother is at the university, &c.

Examples with' the Accusative. Auf den Berg *
fteigen, to mount upon the hill ; setze dich auf
4en Stnhly sit down upon the chair ; aif den Mast
Aeigen, to climb the mast ; aufeinen Baum kletterfi,
to climb up a tree; auf den Boden zverfen^ to
throvtr upon the ground ; auf den Ball gehen, to go
to the ball ; auf etwas sein Auge richten, to fix his
view upon something ; auf jemanden warten^ to
wait for some-body ; qu^e Mahizdt auf zxjuiilf Per-
sonen einrichten, to prepare a dinner for twelve
persons; soviel Wein auf deuManuy so much wine
upon the man \ bis auf Tausend ziihlen, to count
^ thousand; er zixisz es auf em Haar, he knows

It

214 AKALYSIS OP THE

it to a hair^ bis auf sechs TlialeVy up to six dol-
lars ; auffranzosische Arty in the French way \ ax^
diest Weise, in this manner ; auf jene Arty in that
vray ; zvie heisztdas auf English ? How is this cal-
fed in English ; auf den Dienstag^ on next Tuesday;
wir haben ' Vorrath auf viele Monathey we have a
stock for many months ; nehmeii sie es auf einmal,
take it at once, &c.

Hinter, behind, &c. &c.

Examples with' the Dative. Er steht hinter
miry he stands behind me ; hinter dem Vorhange
steheny to stand behind the curtain.

With the Accusative. Sich hinter die TTiiir
stellaty to place oneself behind the door ; hinter die

Wcthrheit kommeny to fall short of truth.

«

Iny in.

With the Dative. Sie liegt in dem BettCy she
is in bed ; er ist in seinem Bette gestorbeny he died
in his bed ; in dem Zimmery in the room ; i^ dem
KeUery in the cellar, &:c.

"Vfi^htht Accusative. In Gesellsthaff gekeny to
go into company ; bis in did Nacht spieleuy to play
till night ; bis in das llausy as far as the House;

NebeUy near, &c. &c.

With the Dative. Siesasz neben twir,she was
ttttingnear me.

With the Accusative. Er setzte sich neben
mick, he took hk place near me ; ^ stelkte. sick

neben

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 215

neben die Mauer^ he placed himself near the wall ;
seize dich neben mich, place thy$erf near me, &c. .

UehePy over, Sec.

With the Dative. Es hdngt uber der Thur^ it
ha^gs over the do6r ; es schwebt iiber viir, it hovers
over me ; iiber dem Lesen einscldaferty to fall asleep
while reading ; iiber der Arbeit das Essen vergessen^
to forget eating while at work ; iiber Tische, wliile
at table ; dieStadt liegt iiber dem Flusse^ the. town
is seated at the other side of the river ; gegen dem
Hause iiber, opposite the house.

With the Accusative. Den Tag icber, during
the day; Uber die Thiir legen^ to place over the
door ; Uber Hals und Kopf^ over neck and heels ; >
uber mein Vermbgeuy beyond my powers; iiber
Junfzig Jahre, above fifty years ; bis iiber die Ohren
in Schidden steclieny to be over head and ears in debt ;
uch Uber etvoas freuen, to rejoice about something;
Uber den Vor%ug streiten^ to dispute on account of
rank ; heute iiber vierzehn Tage, from this day a
^rtnight j iibers Jahr, during the year, &c-

Untery under, among.

; With the Dative. Ich schliefunter dem Baumc^
I slept under the tree ; es herrscht eine Sew^
; v/ifer dem Hornviehy there is an epidemic among
the cattle ; unter dem Arme Iragen^ to carry under
the arm; unter der bank hervorziekeny to throw oat
from under the bench ; unter dem Joche leben, to'
live under the yoke ; er steJit unter mir, he is in-
ferior

216 ANALYSIS 6F THE

ferior to me ; du bist weit unter ihm, thou art far
inferior to him; unter zehn Tage werd^ ich nicht
fertigy I shall not have done before ten days y unter
der Larve der Freund^chaft^ under the ma$k of
friendship ; einer tinier ihueuy one among them \
unter dcm Lesen ehischlafeuy to fall asleep while
reading.

With the Accusative. Legen tvir uvs unter
den Baum ? shall we lay ourselves under the tree ?
sich unter das Wasser taucheny to dive under watery

r

ein Land xvnter Wasser setzen^ to put a country un-
der water ; unter Segel gehen^ to set sail ; sich un-
ter die Zuschauer mengen, to mix among the spec-
tatOFS; jemand unter seine Freunde rechnen^ to
eount some one among his friends.

For, before^ &c.

With the Dative. Der Feind ist vor dent Thor^
the enemy is before the gate ; vor der %eit kommtn;
to come before the time appointed ; vor einigen
Jahreny several years ago ; vor diesem^ formerly ;
vor der Handy before hand y sich vor etxvas fiirchteny
to terrify for something i vor Hunger sterben, to
die for hunger. .

With the Accusative. * Etwas vor die Thiir
tverfe?2, to throw something before the door ; vor
den Spiegel treteny to go before the looking glass ;
die Pferde vor den Wqgen spanneny to put the horses
before the carriage.

Zwi"

GERBHAll LANdUAOE. 217

%tdschtny between, &c.

With the Dative. Er sdsi zmschdn rrtit Ufid
ihtn^ ht was sitting between hitti and rtle ; siwi^chta
d^n beideti Garten tiegen, situated bfetWeen the tw(?
gafdehs; zwischen Ostern und P^fin^steny between
Easter and Whitsunday ; zzviscken d£n Parteyeil
Schiedsrkkter sei/n, to be arbiter between th6
parties.

With the Accusative, tltivas zwischen die Blat-
ter tegefU to lay something between the ledveS ;
iieUe dich twischen sie und mich, place thyself bfc-
tw^eti her and me.

GEKSRAL HfiMARKS ON TrflE PRlFOSlTlONS.

i . Some prepositions coalesce with thS dejiniti
atticfe, A^hich is generally done for the sake of con-
venience arid brevity. (See ah alphabetical liit 6f
fhem exemplified under the head of Articles.)

2. The frepositiohs may also be put before
adverbs, as in English, viz. vonhier^ from hence ;
v6n dopt, from yonder 3 Vdn oberi, frdrii above ; von
icfit^, fforii b^Iow, &c. &c.

3. Ih^t^d of pYon6^t\s ddmimstraitve, ralatvcti
ftid interrogative y the local adverb hitr^ here s da,
theW ; tbOy where ; are j6iried with prepoSif kms ; t9,
kiermiiy hiervoTiy daftiiU daneb&Uy dctfausy dttt-wbif^
v&tbeyy tvdrany &c.

4. The preposition ifiy is sometimes forn/ied
t^ith an advetb which pfecedes it 5 as, es ist darin^
it is in it ; hereiny here in it, &c. Wh6n it iigmfie«

F f iniOy

218 ANALYSIS OF THE

iiito^ it is made ein ; as, dareiu, into it j hinein, into
it, &c. We find these adverbs occasionally sepa-
rated frotn the preposition ; as, da liabe ich mcht an
gedachty for,, daran habe ich nicht gedachty I have
not thought of that ; da huten sie sich vovy for, da^
vor hiiten sie sich, beware of that ; da hat er keine
Neigung zu, for, daxu hat er keine Neigungy he has
no inclination for that, &c.

In all such instances, I should advise to keep
the prepositions united ; except in the following
instances, where the separation is more proper ; as,
da sey Gott vor^ God forbid, instead, da Gott vor
sey, which God forbid.

5. The preposition aufy considered as an ad-
verb, answers to the English up. Sometimes it pre-
ced^s the conjunction daszy that, and signifies a
design or purpose ; as, auf daszy in order, or for
the purpose that. It is used as an inteijection, to
animate and courage ; as, aufy folget niivy come
follow me.

6. The preposition untery in two instances,
governs also the Genitive case ; as, unter dessen, in
the mean time ; unter Wegesy on the road.

It would be indeed superfluous to make any
more remarks on the prepositions, after having se
sufficiently dwelt upon the subject. There are
many other contractions of the former kind, but
tiiey are vulgar, inelegant, or.provincial. There-
fore what remains to be said on that subject, I
shall elucidate in the Synta^^*

CHAf-

GERMAN LANGUAGEi 219

CHAPTER VIII.
Of Conjunctions.

Conjunctions are particles by which words
and sentences are connected, which have a rela-
tion to each other. They are either radicals^ ot
(yet not so frequently) derivatives^ or rof pow^ds.

They are as manifold as the circumstances /
which they denote, most of them implying more ^
than one circumstance. On that account they
have been divided, by several authors, into various
classes, which, from their voluminous explanation
have checked the scholar's progress so, that he has
been disgusted with that part of speech ; but if
exhibited in a more familiar manner, it will be
as easily comprehended as any other part of
speech*,

pf 2 To

* Merely for the sake of curiosity, I will previously make
the student acquainted with most of the different classes, 39
represented by several authors. If it were not rather an ob-
ject of speculation^ than of real practical advantage ; I myself
could make the affixed classification still more ample and muU
tifarious. Several authors have adopted for instance the follow-
ing sixteen classes, viz, 1. Copulatives. 2. Continuatives,
3. Circumscriptives. 4. Conditionals. 5. Disjunctives 6. Ad-*
v^rsatives. 7* Concessives. 8. Causal'es. 9. Explanatives.
10. Comparatives. 11. Proportionals. 12. Consecutives. 13. Il«
bUves. 14. Exceptives. 15. Restricti?es» iQ. Exclusives.

Such

2S^ ^N^:j.y5is om the

To facilitate this part of speech, 1 must pre-
viously observe, that the signification of each con-
junction in particular, doQ& pot always answer the
literal meaning of the English, as many of them are
used in a difFer^nt spnse in German to what they
^re in English, and even many are entirely omit-
ted (though understood) in German phrases^ which
appear in the other languages.

This was the same case with respect to the
prepositions. However, the representation of their
multifarious applications which I shall add to every
one of them in particular, will intuitively shew the
student in what manner thev differ from ooe an-r
other, in omitting or expressing them.

I could not display any elegance in the En-
glish exemplification, many being literally, trans-
lated (the same as I have done by the prepositions)
which serves merely to elucidate the phrase.

To clear this part of speech from all further
difficulties, I shall give a list of the most ob-
vious German conjunctions in alphabetical order,
accompanied with the clearest phrases, together

with.

Such a classification cannot be of the least service, to
8ny one^ who does not understand the Latin, and only pazzl^
his brain with expressions, which most appear to hioi fcighly.
ridiculous. As for the scholar^ who is already acquainted ^th
the Latin language, he can do without this classification ; be-
cause the analogy of the phrase will immediately point o^t to
him to what class the conjjinctioa belongs*

with a literal trai^slatiion. By that means the stu«
dent will ^e a^le to ynderst^nd witl^ faciUty the
real 4epartsp^nt tp whi/ch tliey .belong.

I

OF THE MOST OBVIOUS CONJUNCTIONS IK THB

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

Aber, but.

Abel* ich bin ganz anderev Mdntmg^ but I am
quite of a different opinion ; aber ich wiU dieses
nicht haberiy but I won*t have this ; aber werm es
ihm miszf alien sollfe, but if he should dislike it;

9

aber Himmeh was entdeckt mein Auge cm Ufer im
Sande / but heaven, what discovers my eye on Ac
shore in the sand 3 aber er zvar nicht da, but he,
, was not there.

Allein, but.

Er ist ein guter Menschy allein was hi^t ihm
da^ he \^ a good nian, but what use is. that to
him > ich wollte gern^ allein er konnt^ nicfU^ I was
willing, biit he cquI^ pot.

Alsy aff, &c. &c.

So roth ab eine Hose, as red as a rose ; siiszer
<i^« ffonig, sweeter than bony ; ich, ak Nerr von
vmnem Ii(iy^e^ I, as faaster of my hou^ ; als uA
in Berlin ank am, when I arrived in Berlin; siebe-
sitzet sowohl Tugend als Verstand, she possesses
virtue as well as uadeprstaadkig.

Also,

t29 ANALYSIS OF THE

Also, also, &c. &c.

Ich will es also kabe?i, I will have it so ; sprach
dein Herz also ? did thy heart speak thus ? er erbt
alles, also audi das Gut^ he inherits every thing,
consequently, also the estate ; also bkibt es dabei,
it remains therefore so ; die viekn GeschSfte notliigen
mich alsoy much business therefore obliges mc.

Auch , also, &;c.

Der Reichthumi die Ehre^ auch das Vergniigen
Sind eitely riches, honour, also pleasure are vain;
wenn wirja sagen, so sag lev auchja, when we say
yes, he also says yes ; er ist auch ein solcher, he is
als6 such a one j eiji solcher ist er auch, such a one
he is also ; ein redlicher^ wie auch gelehrter Mann, ^
sincere, and also a learned man ; ein gelehrter, aber
auch gejdhrlicher Mann, a learned, but also a dan-
gerous man ; er hat nicht allein sein Geld, sondern
auch seine Ehre verlohren, he has lost not only his
money, but likewise his honour ; sowohl dieses, als
ituch jenes, as well this, as also that ; es geschehe
auch wenn es wolle, may it also happen when it
will ; zver er auch ist, let him be then whom he '
win.

Aufdasz, in order that, &c.

Auf dasz es uns kiinftig nicht an Mittelnfehle;
in order that we are not in want of means in fliturej

Be/or, before.

Has the same meaning as the English.

Da,

GERMAN- LANGUAGE. 223

Day whenj &c.

*

t)a ich ihn sake, bccvegte sick mein Herz Tor
Freude, when I saw him, my heart was moved
with joy ; da die Sonne aufgiengy da giengen wit
aufs Feld, at sun rise, we went into the field ; da
weder Stolz noch Ehrgeitz dick dazu bewegen, so
ist deifie Absicht tugendhafty since neither pride nor
ambition can move you to it, then your intention is

virtuous ; du lachst, da du dock tveinen solUest,

. , /•

you laugh, when you ought to weep.

DaheVy therefore, &c.

Er tear abwesend daher entstand denji der Ver*
dachty he was absent, thence arose the suspicion ;
€5 ist ?iichts an der Sache, dngstige dick daher 7iicht,
tTiere is nothing of the matter, therefore be nbt
anxious

Damity that, &c.

Ick mclde dir solckes, damit du dick darnack zH
richten wissesty I mention this to you, that you
might know how to regulate yourself after it ;
ich warne dicky damit du dick in Ackt nekmen moch^
testy I warn you, that you might take care of your-
self ; thue es nur^ damit er nicht zu sehr hestrajt
wirdy do it only, that he nlay not be punished too
severely for it. '

Danny alsdann, then, &c.

Wir miissen erst lemen und dann reden, we
must learn first, and then speak j wenn ick dich
sehe dann will ick es dir geben, when I see you,

then

/

tS4 AKALY&tS Of mt

dien I will give it to you {danfiy xeann ich dich sehe,
wHl kk a dir geben^ (ot, when I see yoa, llien I
win gtve, it to you ; dann^ mnd xcamk^ now woA
then*

Alsdatmy has the same meaning » then.

Darum^ for that reason, &c.*

Darum konnte ich nichts sagen, loeil ich nichts
tBMSxte, for that reason I could say nothing, because
1 knew nothing ; die Brucke zvar abgerisseriy darum
kanmtcn wir nicht hzniiberf the bridge being broken
dowD^ for that reason Wd tould not go over.

JDasz, that.

Ich sehe dasz er kormnt^ I see that he comes ;
jc& weisz dasz es nicht recht ist^'^ I know that it is
not right.

Demnachy is obsolete.

Denn^ for, &c.

Er ist irnmer vergnugt^ deh7i er iH fhit dlleith
zttjrieden, he h altvays satisfied, far he is with eV*f<y
Aing content ; efinnere dich deiner Ahnehi ddnii
suf find Beisplelefiir dich, rdmember thyaftcestWs
then they are models fof thee ; iSt tr noch f Atmi
in m&inef Eimamkeit. h&re ich fiichts von ihfh. i#
he still alive ? for in my solitude I hear tiothtn^'df
him ; hat denn ein Narr Verstand f has then a

fool

^ ■ ■ I - ■ l_ J _L«_ ^_L U. _ I r ■ _ I II , II

* When darum is used as aa adverb in GeroEiaDi it sig«
iiifie* in fingii^, oft K^ount of.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 22$

fbpl understanding ? so mag es derm gut seyn, then
it may be so ; so bleibt es denn dabeiy then it re-
mains so ; ich sake denn nicht recht^ unless I see
not right ; £s sey denn dasz er es Idugne^ then it
may be that he denies it ; ehe derni ich sterbe^ before
then I die ; wer ist reicher denii evy who is richer
then he ; nichts denn Geld, nothing but gold ; diesz
hat kein anderer gethan denn du^ nobody else has
done it, but you ; erst wollen wir essen, dann^^ or
4enn spazieren ^getieuy first let us dine, then take
a walk.

Dennoch, nothwithstanding.

Es ist ein Mdrchen^ dennoch glaubst du es, it
is a story, notwithstanding you believe it ; ob
man ihm solches gleich ver bothy so that er es den-
nochy although we have prohibited him, yet he did
it notwithstanding.

Derhalbeny derohalbeny desfdialby or deshalby
Signifies therefore, and on that account.

DestOy so much more, &c.
Ich erwartete ihre Ankunft iiichty imd desto
groszer ist meine Freudcy I did not expect your
arrival, and the greater is my joy 5 je mehr Giitc
er rnir erwiesen haty desto mehr Erkenntlichkcit
hege ichg£gen ihn, the more kindness he has
shewn to me, the more acknowledgment I owe
him. Mie^

'• " I *•*>•

* in this case dann Is preferable.

226 ANALYSIS OF THE

DieweHf because.
Is obsekte in German.

' Dock, yet, &c.

Er hatle versprochen zu kommen, dock er kann
mcht, be had promised to come^ yet be cannot ;
ob er mick gleich sahe, so redete er mich dock nicht
an, althougb he saw me, he, notwithstanding, did
not speak to me ; ich xoill es dir sageuy dock muszt
du mir versprecheriy I will tell it you, nevertheless
you must promise me ; ich will dock zu ihm ge^
hen, I will yet go to him ; zcirfmir dock das nicht
%'ory do not yet reproach me for that ; es ist dock
hqffcnllich nicht s bases ? it is yet, I hope, nothing
bad.

Ehe, or eher^, rather, &c.

Sie zeolite eher sterben als sundigen, she rather

chose to die, than to commit sins ; ehe sie sich in

ihrer Andacht slvren Idszt, eher laszt sie ihn wieder

fortreisen, before she will be disturbed in her piety

sopner she suffers that he may depart again.

Entzveder^ either.

Is always followed by oder^ or ; as, entweder
mit Gezvalt oder List, either by force, or trick.

Falls, in case.

Falls es geschehen sollte, in case it shouU

happen. Fcr*

* Eber is preferable to the.

GERMAK lAlictfAOE. 21^7

FemeTj further.

Ferner ist zu tvissen, furfher ^e ought to
know.

Folglickj consequently.

Du , bist em Mensck, folglich bist du auch
sterblkh, thou art a man^ consequently thou art
also mortal.

Gleichy Immediately.

See obgleichy although.

JIi/ig€gen, on the contrary.

Die Demuih ist iiberaU angenekmy alUs hin*
gegen ist wider den Stolz, humility is every where
agreeable, but every thing on the contrary Is
against^ pride.

For Je, see desto.

Je nachdem, according as.

Jedochi is the same as doch»

If^m, while, because, 3itice.

Indessen, in the mean whili.

Ingleicheriy or imgteichen, likewise.
thA fiht ife pi'tferaWe.

KdtiMt^ ^rce.

j^ottM haile ich eiytige Schritte gethan, so tvich
dfirJBcfikfh I had scarce made a tew steps^ when
V^e giQund yielded under me.

MithH ^f^^%^f^'f (ibnsequtetly.
TliriatKr is^ mo?6 ifetiali

G g 2 [Nachm

•4 '

228 ANALYSIS OF THE

Nachdem, after^

Nachdtm er das gesagt hatte, verschied er, after
he had spoken that, he expired.

Nehmlich, 6r nafimlich, videlicety namely.

The latter is more usual ; as, es kamenihret
dreiy mhmlichi S(c. , there came ' three of them,
namely, &c.

Nicht allein, nicht nur, not only ^ *

Is followed by sondern auch^ but also, as, ^
ich habe es nicht allein geseheuy sondern iauch ge-
hart, I not only have seen, but also heard it.

Noch, nor.

Weder Freude noch Gliick, neither happiness
nor look ; weder Ruhm noch Ehre, neither glory
nor honor.

Nun, now, therefore.

Du hast nicht horen woUen, nun magst du
Jtihlen, you did not choose to listen, therefore you
ought to suffer.

Nur, but, only.

Gih tnir nur ein wenig, give me but a little.

Ob, whether, if.

Obgleich, obschon, obwohl, though, although*

They suffer a separation ; 2s,ober g fetch sake,
although he saw ; ob er schon zti Hause war, though
he was at home ; ob er wohl arm wOir^ so war er
doch ehrlich, though he was poor, l^e w^ yet bfticst.

Oder

GEHMAN LANGUAGE* S29

Oder, or.

Diesz oder jeneSy this or that. -

Sintemaly or sintemalen, both arc obsolete^

So.
Has various significations in English ; as^ zvenn
^nein Vater kommt, so saget ihrn, when my father
comes tell him ; da er in Kolln eintrafy soifandef
die.Stadt in den Ildnden der FeindCy when he ar-
rived at Cologne, he found the toyrn in the hands
of the enemy ; xt'drest du %u Hause gebliebeny so
xmrde es nicht geschehen seyn, hadst thou staid at
home, it wouJd not have happened ; so wokly ah .
auchy as well, as alsp ; so grosz die Gefahren de$
Meeres audi seyn mogeny so konnen sie dock seinen
Entscklusz nicht vertilgeny however great the dan-
gers of the sea may be, yet they could not ex-
tinguish his resolution.

So zoiey as.

SonderUy but.
Is used only when a negative precedes; aSf
nicht duy sondem sein Bruder^ not thou but his
brother.

Sonst^ otherwise, &c.

Bezahle mich, sonst verklag ich dicky pay me,
otherwise I will sue you.

Theils - theilsy partly • partly.

Sein Vemwgen besCeht theils in Geld, theils ia^
GrundstUcken, his patrimony consists partly in
^»eyj paft^, in . estates.

Urn

330 AKAtYSIS OP tRB

Um, for. •

Um zu haben, for to have ; um zu kaufen^
for topurchaise.

Und^ and.

l/ngeacktet, notwithstanding.

VielmehTy so much the more.

Viehvenigcr, so much the less.

Wann, then.
Dann und zoann, now and then*

. " Weder, neither.

Ib sflways followed by noch, nor ; as, weder
or noch sie, neither he nor she.

Weil, while, because.

Teh that es well es mir so gejiel, I did it, t)e-
cause it pleased me thus ; kommen sie, xoeil ich noch
hier bin, come, while I am here.

Wenn, when.

Is synonymous with da s both are differently
jjpplied ; as, wenn ikH ihn sehe, so will ich es ihm
sageny when I see him, I will tell it to Him ; da
er nach House kam, so fund er seinen Bruder^
when he came home, he found his brother.

iVenAgleichy althoiigh.

Wennschon.

Has the same meaning : they may be sepa-

lifted.

Wiliy h6W; &c*

Wie so? how so? wiff' da f Lebett^dei^ Tf^fy

f • ■

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 331

I

as the life, so the death ; wie er es sahy rief er aus.
as he saw it, he exclaimed ; so reich xvie du, as
rich as you.

Wiewohl^ though.
Woy if; it signifies also where.

Wofem, and daferriy if.

Ich will es dir geben, wofeni, or da/em du zu
mir kommen zoirst, I will give it to you, if you
will come to me.

JVohl, well, indeed, &c.

Das ist wohl recht, that indeed may be right;
wissen sic wohl ? do you perhaps know ?

Zumahl, especially.

Ich kann es dir nicht geberiy zuinahl da du es
mcht verdienesty I cannot give it to you, especially
as you do not deserve it.

ZzvaVy indeed, &c.

Is generally followed by abe?^ alleiuf dock,
dennochy and similar disjunctives*.

With respect to the government of the. coa-
junctions, see the Syntax.

CHAI^

* Obzfvar sometinaei occurs with the power of olgleict

2S2 ANALYSIS OF THE

CHAPTER IX.

Of Interjections.

Interjections express the sudden and violent
sensations of the mind, and may be considered
as words of a very extensive meaning. They are
inserted in most sentences, but should only be
placed as the result of exquisite feelings. There
is no established rule for them, because they never
can be governed by any other word, and they
are in their construction the most simple, and
with respect to their application the least subject
to art of all other parts of speech.

They must be considered as the first ele-
ments of language ; being indeed the sounds of
nature herself, extorted by our internal or exter-
nal feelings, and may be looked upon as animal
sounds instinctively uttered to make our sensation
known, 'fhey are of the earliest origin ; uncon-
nected with the association of ideas, and only
produced by immediate impulse.

They are the basis of all speech, and as diver-
sified as the organs' of sound can be. They have
been in the course of time gradually combined,
and formed into, what we call, words s the im-
'provement of which has made many of the pri-
«itive interjections obsolete, they being better
^calculated to convey our perceptions. Many, how-
ever, are still used in their primitive staite, especi-^

ally

GERMAK LAK6TTAGB. , S39

ally by the lower classes of people, among which
are the following:

ah ! ha! expressing joy.

sa ! hey ! heysa ! > noisy joy.

juch ! juchhey ! immoral joy. ^

ol oh! — _-— — admiration.

ah !' ach ! oh weh ! — — — complaint, sorrow,

and grief.

Pf^y i fil ■ disgust and abhor-

rence.

ha ! holla ! > a call.

ho ! hum I ^ a surprise.

ah ! , ha ! — ^— — — either surprise, or

satisfaction, when
something unex-
pected is discovered.

platz ! —_ — — to make room.

husch ! ■ ■ a quick disappearing.

knaks ! ■ on any thing falling

to the ground and
breaking.

plump ! '■ a falling into the wa-

ter, an imitation of
the sound it made.

All the foregoing interjections can scarcely
be denominated words, and ought not to be Con-
founded with those simple sounds, introduced by
the modem writers, and more or less used in com-
position even by the 'higher class of people. (See
the Syntax of real interjections used as words.)

H h PRAC-

0S4

ANALYSIS OF THB.

PRACTICE ELUCIDATING THE PRECEDING
, SECOND AND THIRD PARTS OF SPEECH*.

_

%

DIE R-ffiUBE^, 1

THE ROBBERS.

•

FliNFTER AUFZUG.

ACT. V.

Er3l$r Auftritt.

Sane I,

(Aussicht von vielen Zim-

(A view of several apart*

mern.)

ments.)

Franz, (im Schlafrock
kereingesiurzt. SogUich Da-
niel,)

Francis, fin a ntgk^
gown^ rushes in^ followed hj
Daniel.)

^ Franz. Vcrratbcn, tct-

Francis. Betrayed! be*

rathen ! Geister ausgespieen
aus Grabern. — Losgeriittelt
dasTodtenreich aus dcm ewi-

trayed ! Spirits rush from
their graves ! The kingdom
of death, let loose from its

gen Schlaf, bi iiHt wider mich

eternal sleep, thunders in my

Morder ! Mordcr ! Wer regt

cars ! murderer ! murderer \

sich da ?

Who is ihere ?

DASlEL.CangstlichJ Hilf
Himmei ! — Seyd ihrs, gc-

Daniel, (anxiously,)
Heaven help us ! — Was it

$trenger Hcrr, dcr so grasz-
lich durch die Gcwolbe

you, my noble master, whoso
shrieks re-echoed so horribly

schreiety dasz alle Scblafer

through the passages, that all

auffahren ?

started from their beds in the

Franz.

utmost terror ?

Francis

* This extract is taken from the chef d^ceuvre of Schillec
called the Rohhcru

The scene represents^ in a frantic manner, all the horrors
of the last day of judgment, uttered from the mouth oif i^
guilty crlg^inai ^d p.arricide»

GEHMAH LANOtTAdE;

ids

. Ft AUK. Schlafer! wcr
lleiaKt eucji Khiafen ? Essol]
niemand schlafen in dieser
Stundc. Horst du? Alks
«oIl auf scyn — in Waffcn —
allc Gewehre geladcn. —
&ihst du sic dort im Bogen-
gang hinscbwebea ^

Daniel. Wen gnadiger
Hcrr ?

F&Airz. Wen ? Dunj-
kopf! Wen? So kalt, so
Iter fragst du, wen f Hat
michs doch angepackt wie der
Sdiwindel ! Wen ? Esels*
kopf J Wen ? Gcister und
Teufel ! Wie wcit ists in
der Nacht ?

Daniel. Eben jetzt ruft
der Nachtwachter zwei an.

Frakz. Was! willdie-
se Nacbt w'ahren bis an den
jungsten Tag? Horst du
keinen Tumult in der Nahe ?
kein Siegesgescbrei, keln Ge-
xauscb galloppirender Fferde?
Wo ist Xa, . * der Graf will
icb sagen ?

Daniel. Icbwdsznichty
aein Gebieter.

' Franz. Du weiszt nicbt ?
Ou bist auch unter der Rotte?

Icb

Francis. From their
beds ! wbo bids you sleep ?
No one shall «leep at thi*
hour. Dost thou hear ? All
shall fee awake — in arms — •
every gun shall be charged.—
Didst thou not see them lurk-*
ing among the trees in yon-
der avenue?

Daniel. Whom, gra-
cious Sit ?

Francis. Whom, block-
head ! wbom^? So coldly, so
indifferently dost thou ask
whom ? It has seized me like-
a giddiness ! Whom ? stu •
pid dolt I whom ? Ghosts
and devils ! *— What is the
hour of the night i

. Daniel. The watchman
has just called two.

Francis. What ! will
this night last till doomsday ?
Hearest thou no tumult hear ?
no cries of victory ? no tram-
pling of horses ? Where i$
Char. . . the count, I would
say?

Daniel. I know not,
master.

Francis, Thou knowsC

not ? — ^Thou too art one of

Hh2 this

es4

ANALYSIS OF TH&.

PRACTICE ELUCIDATING THE PRECEDING
SECOND AND THIRD PARTS OF SPEECH*.

DIE R-ffiUBCT,

FliNFTER AUFZUG.

Erstir Auftrltt.

(Aussicht von vielen Zim-
mern.)

Franz, (im Schlafrock
keretngesturzt. Sogleich Da-
niel.)

. Franz. Vcrratbcn, tct-
rathen ! Geister ausgespieen
aus Grabern. — Losgeriittelt
dasTodtenreich aus dcm ewi-
genSchlaf, biiillt wider mich
Morder 1 Mordcr ! Wer regt
sich da ?

DAsiEL.CdngstlichJ Hilf
Himmei ! — Seyd ihrs, gc-
$trenger Hcrr, dcr so griisz-
lich durch die Gcwolbe
schreiety dasz alle Scblafer
auffahren ?

Franz.

THE ROBBERS.

ACT. V.

Sane I,

(A view of several apart^
ments.)

Francis, fin a nigit"
gown^ rushes in^ followed hy
Daniel.)

Francis. Betrayed ! be*

trayed ! Spirits rush from

their graves ! The kingdom

of death, let loose from its

eternal sleep, thunders in my

cars ! murderer ! murderer \

Who is ihere ?

Daniel, (anxiously,)

Heaven help us ! — Was it

you, my noble master, whoso

shrieks re-echoed so horribly

through the passages, that all

started from their beds in the

utmost terror ?

Francis

* This extract is taken from the chef d*oeuvre of Schillei
called the Rohhcri.

The scene represents^ in ' a frantic manner, all the horrors
of the last day of judgment, uttered from the mouth ol i^
guilty crlo^inai ^d parricide*

GEHMAH LANOtTAdE;

ids

. T±Aisiz. Schlafer! wcr
lletsKt eudi Khiafen ? EssoII
niemand schlafen in dieser
Stundc. Horst du? Alks
«oIl auf scyn — ^in Waffea —
alle Gewchre geladcn. —
Sahst du sic dort im Bogen-
gang hinschwebea ^

Daniel. Wen gnadiger
Hcrr ?

F&Airz. Wen ? Dunj-
kopf! Wen? So kalt, so
leer fragst du, wen f Hat
michsdoch angepackt wie der
iSdiwindel I Wen i Esels*
kopf J Wen ? Gcister und
Teufel ! Wie weit ists in
der Nacht ^

Daniel. Eben jetzt ruft
der Nachtwachter awei an.

Franz. Was I will die-
«e Nacbt wahren bis an den
Jungsten Tag? Horst du
keinen Tumult in der Nahe ?
kein Siegesgeschrei, kein Ge-
rausch galloppirender Fferde?
Wo iBt Xa. . * der Graf will
ich sagen ?

Daniei.. Icfawdsznicht,
mein Gebieter.

' Franz. Du weiszt nicht ?
Ou bist auch unter der Rotte?

Francis. From thcit
beds 1 who bids you sleep ?
No one shall «leep at thi*
hour. Dost thou hear ? AH
shall fee awake — in arms — •
every gun shall be charged.—
Didst thou not see them lurk-*
itig among the trees in yon-
der avenue?

Daniel. Whom, gra-
cious Sir ?

Francis. Whom, block-
head ! whom^? So coldly, so
indificTeotly dost thou ask
whom ? It has seized me like-
a giddiness 1 Whom ? stu-
pid dolt I whom ? Ghosts
and devils ! *— What is the
hour of the night i

. Daniel. The watchman
has just called two.

Francis* What ! will
this night last till doomsday ?
Hearest thou no tumult hear ?
no cries of victory ? no tram-
pling of horses ? Where it
Char. . . the count, I would
say ?

Daniej,. I know not,
master.

Francis, Thou knowst

not ? — Thou too art one of

Hh2 this

««

«S6

ANALYSIS OF' THE

Ich Will dir das Herz aus den
Rippen stampfen ! mit dei«
iiem verfluchtcn : ich weisz
nicht ! Was ? auch Betder
wider mich verschworen?
Himmel, Holle ! alles wider
mich verschworen?

Daniel. Mein Gebieter!

Franz. Nein ! ich zittre
nicht ! Es w^r ledig ein
Traum. Die Todtcn stehen
jioch nicht auf. — Wer sagt,
dasz ich zittre und bletch
bin I Es ist mir ja so leicht,
so wohl.

Dani£L, Ihr seyd tod-
tenbleich, eure Stimme ist
bang und lallet.

Franz. Ich habe das
Fieber, ich will morgen zur
Ader lassen.

Daniel. O ihr seyd
crnstlich krank.

Franz. Ja freilich, frei-
lich ! das ist alles — und
Krankheit verstort das Ge-
him, und briiiet telle und
wunderliche Trauqie aus. —
Traume bedcuten nichts, —
nicht wahr Daniel ? Trau-
me kommen ja aus dem
Bauche, und Traume bedeu-
teu nichts, — * Ich batte so

cben

tbis^ gang ? 1 will stapp thy
heart through thy ribs ! with
your damned : / kn9w not.
What? beggars too have
conspired against me ? Hea-
ven ! hell ! all conspire a-,
gainst me ?

Daniel. My master !

Francis. No ! I do not
tremble ! It was mci-ely a
dream. The dead do not
rise yet. — Who says that I
tremble and look pale ? No,
no I I am calm, quite at my
ease,

Daniel. You arc pale
as death, your voice is hol-
low and faultering.

Francis. I have some-
thing of a fever. I will be
let blood to-morrow.

Daniel.. You arc cx-i

tremely ill,

Francis. Yes, indeed I
that is all — and illness destroys
the brain, produces strange
and maddening dreams. «-^
But what are dreams. —
Is it not true, Daniel, that
dreams arise merely from in-
digestion ? they signify no-
thing ; I had a horrid dream.

\ ,

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

237

«ben eincn lostigcn Traum.

(tr sinkt $ tnmdchtig nieder,)

Daniel. Gott ! was ist
das I Georg ! Konrad ! Bas-
tian ! Martin ! So gebt doch
nur eine Urkunde von euch.
frutt€lt ihn), bonehmt doch
Veraunft an ! So wirds hei-
Oeh, idi bab ihn todtge-
mackt. Gott erbarme sich
melnet- 1

YKXVi7s,(verwirrtJ Wcg !
weg I was riittelst du micb
8O9 scbcuszlichcs Todtenge-
rippe ? — Die Todtcn stehen
noch nicht auf. —

Daniel. O du ewige
Giite ! er hat den Verscand
verlohren.

' Franz, (richtet sich matt
auf.) Wo bin ich ? — Du
Daniel ? was bab ich gesagt ?
merke nicht darauf ! ich babe
eine Liige gesagt, es sey was
es wolle. — Komra ! hilf mir
auf ! Es ist nur ein An-
stosz von Schwindel — weil
ich — weil ich — nicht ausge-
l^hlafen habe.

Daniel. Ich willHiiife
rufcn, ich will nach Aerzten
rufcn,

FHANZ. Bleib ! setze dich

neben

(be sinks down in a swopnj^

Daniel. Heavens fwlul
is this ! Georjge I Conrad !
Bastian ! Martin I Shew
but one sign of life ! (shaket
him.) Preserve but your rea-
son ^ It will be said I have
murdered him. Lord have
mercy upon me !

Francis, (disturbed.)
Away ! be gone ! why dost
thou shake me thus, horrible
skeleton; — The dead rise
not yet.

Daniel. Oh, eternal
goodness! lie has lost ^$
reason,

Francis, {raises himself
faintly.) Where am IP-^-
Is it thee, Daniel ? what
have I said ? regard it not !
I have spoken a lie, be it
what it will. — Come, help
me up ! It was but a fit of
giddiness — - because 1 — be^
cause I have not had my
sleep out.

Daniel. I must call for
assistance : I will call physic
cians.

Francis. Stay. Sit down

here

238

JkKALYSIS OF THE

neben mich auf diesen Sopha.
— So, — du bist ein geschei-
t^r, eih guter Mann. Lasz
dim ersahlen,

Daniel. Jetzt nicht, em
andermal ! ich will euch zu
Bette brin^en* Ruhe ist euch

*

besser.

Franz. Nein, ich bittc
dich, lasz dir erzahlen, und
lache mich derb aus I Siehe
mich deuchte^ ich hacte ein
konigliches Mahl gehalten,
und mein Herz ware guter
Dirige, und ich lage berauscht
im Rasen des Scloszgartens,
und plotzHch, — plotzlich,
abcr ich sage dir, lache mich
derb aus !

Daniel. Plotzlich.

Franz. Plotzlich traf cin
ungeheurer Donne^ mein
schlummerndes Ohr ; ich
laumelte bebend auf, und sie-
he, dawarmirs, alssaheich
den ganzen Horizont in feu-
riger Lohe, und Berge, und
W alder, wie Wachs im Ofen
zerschmelzen, und eine heu.
lende Windsbraut fegte von
hinnen Meer, Himmel und
Erde.

Daniel. Das ist das leb-

hafte

here upon tiut 8ophft.««>*So-^
thou art a discreet^ a goo4
man. Let me relate it to tbfc.^

Daniel. Not yet, an-
other time. I will take you
to bed. Rest is beat for you*

Francis. No, I pray
thee, let me talk' to thee, and;
do thou laugh heartily at met
Hark ! methbught I held a
princely banquet, all, all beat
bliss about my heart ! and I
laid me down in my gar*
dens of pleasure, intoxicated
with delight ; but I entreat
thee laugh thou heartily at
me.

Daniel. Suddenly.

Francis. Suddenly ! a
monstrous thunder struck on
my astonished ear ! I stag«
gered trembling up : and be-
hold ! methought, 1 saw the
whole horizon outflaming in
a fiery blaze ; and mountains^
and cities, and forests, all melt-
ing as wax before a furnace: /
and a howling wind*storm
swept before it the seas, the
. heavens, and the earth.

Daniel.' That's indeed

GEHMAK LAH6ITA0E.

259

lafte Koiititfei vom juogsten
Tag.

Frakz. Nicht wahr ? das
ist tolles Zeug ? Da trat
flmr hervor, der hatte in sei-
ner Hand cine chcme Wage,
St hielt er zwischen Auf-
gang und Niedergang, und
sprach : tretet herzu, ihr Kin-
der des Staubes ; ich wage
die Gedanken!

Daniel. Gott crbarme
sich meiner !

Franz. Schneebleichstun-
den alle ; angstlich klopfte
die Erwartung in jegHcher
Brnst. Da war mirs, als hort
ich meinen Namen zucrst ge-
nannt aus den Wettern des
Bergcsy und mein innerstes
Mark gefror in mir, und
meine Zahne klapperten laut.

Daniel. O Gott ver-
geb euch !

Franz. Das that er
nicht ! Siehe, ploizlich er«
schienein alter Mann, schwer
gebeugt von G^ni» angebis-
sen den Arm von wiithendem
Hunger ; aller Augen wand-
ten sich scheu vor dein Man-
se ; ich kannte den Mann \
er schnitt eioe Locke von

sei-

a living picture of the day of
judgment;

Francis. Pshaw ! Is
it hot absurd nonsense?
There came forward oney
who had in his hand a bra-'
zen balance, which he heii
between east and west, and
said : approach, ye childreii
of the dust ; I weigh your
thoughts.

Daniel. Godhavemercy
upon me !

Francis, All stood aghast
and pale as snow, expecta-
tion beat anxiously in every
breast. When methought I
heard a voice amidst the storm
pronounce my name ; the
marrow congealed within my
bones, and my teeth chat-
tered with horror.

Daniel. Oh, God for-
give you !

Francis. That he neve?
can ! — Behold, quickly there
appeared a venerable old man^
bent down with sorrow, hi»
arm gnawn through hunger i
all eyes turned away in dis^
gust from the view of bim*^
[ knew him. He cut off one
of his venerable silver loipkf»i

and

240

ANALYSIS OP THE

•einem silbemen Hauptbaar,
warf sic bin — hin— uod— da
hort ich eine Stimme schal-
Icn aus dem Rauche des Fel-
sen : Gnade ! Gnade jedem
Sunder der Erde und des Ab-
ounds ! du alleia bist ver
vrorfen ! {tieft Pause.) Nun
warum lachst du nicht ?

. Daniel. Kann icb la-
dien, wenn mir die Haut
sch^udert \, ^raume kom-
men von Gott.

Franz. Pfui docb, pfui
doch ! sage das nicht ! Heisz
micb einen Narren I einen
aberwitzigen, abgeschmack-
tcn Narren ! Thue das, lie-
ber Daniel, ich bitte dich
drumi spotte mich tiichtig
aus !

Da n I £ l. Traume kom-
men von Gott. Ich will fiir
euch beten. {ab.)

Franz, (allein.) PJJbeU
weisheit ! Pobelfurcht ! — Es
jst ja noch nicht ausgemacht,
ob das Vergangene niche ver-
gangen ist, odcr ein Auge
•ich fiodet liber den Sternen,
*-Hm ! hum ! wer raunte
mir das ein ? Rachet denn
droben iiber den Scernen ei
ocr ? — Nein, ncin ! •— Ja,
. . ja !

threw it away fromhim^
«-At this moment I hcM
a voice sound from die
darkest part of the rock:
Pardon I pardon to every mir
ner on the earth and sndet
the earth 1 thou alone art
rejected! (a dap pauu.)
Well, why do you not laugh \

Daniel. Can I laugbf
when all my powers of semB
shudder thus ? Dreams come
from God.

Francis. Pshaw 1 pshaw!
don't say that ! call i!ne a fool,
a child, an idiot ! Do so,
dear Daniel, I entreat yoU|
but laugh at me.

Daniel. Dreams come
from God. I will pn^y for
you. {exit,)

Francis, {ahne.) Vul-
gar superstition ! vulgar stu-
pidity ! It is not yet deter*
mined whether there be a fu-
turestate,whetheror not there
be a searching eye above the
stars. — Ah ! what ! who in-
spired me with that thought?
Is there an avenger on high ?
— No, no ! -^ Yes, yes f

fright-'

GERMAN LANGUACS.

241

ja I furchterllck zischelts um
nuch : richtet droben einer
fibor den Steraen ! Entge-
gen geben dem Racher iiber
deo Stemen diese Nacht
aoch { Nein ! sag ich — elen-
der SchlupiWinkely hinter den
akh deine Feigheit versteken
will — Ocdyeinsam^ tauVists
droben iiber den Sternen —
Wenns aberdoch etwas mehr
iK^re ? Nein, nein, es ist
nicht ! Ich wills, es istnicht !
WeiHis aber doch ware?
.Weh mir, wenns Aachge-
fltahlc worden ware ? wenns
dir vorgezablc wiirde diese
Nacht noch I — Warum
tchaudert mirs ao durch die
Knochen 7— sterben I warum
packt mieh das Wort so? Re*
chenschafc geben dem Ra-
cher iiber dea Sternen — und
Venn cr gerechtist— wenn
er gerecbt ist.

Daniel, (hmmt augst-
lichj Gnadiger Herr, es
jagt ein Trupp feuriger Reu*
ler die Steg herab, schreien
Mprdjo, Mordjo — das ganze
X)orf ist in allarcn.

FraN2. Geh, lasz alle
Glockeii ^usammcn lanten^
l^bs soil in die Kircbc -^

auf

frightfully they hiss around
me like serpents : There is
one above the stars who
judgeth ? — What ? to meet
this great avenger this, very
night ! No ! do I say —
Miserable subterfuge ! be*
hind which thy cowardice
would hide itself — Desert^
and solitary, and inanimate
is all above us — But shoukl
there after all yet be some-
thing? No, no, there is not!
I will have it so, there is not!
— But if indeed there be ? —
Woe to me if my action$.
should be called over before
the judge this very night !—
Why do I shudder thusi —
To die! .Why does thir
word torment me ? To give
^ari account to the judge wl^p
sits on. high — and if he be
just-^ah ! if he be just {

Daniel, {enters in great
agitation. ) My giacious
lord, a troop of horsemen are
galloping up the pathway,
crying murder! murder J
The whole village is in alarnp.

Francis. Go, let all the
bells be chimed ; let all to
church ; let ^11 fidl Upon their

%i ieneet

S42

A^ALtSlS OP rvtR

atsf die Knie&llen. alles •—
bctcn ffir mich — alle Gcfan-
gene sollen los seyn und le-
dig'; ich will den Armen al-
Ifes 'doppelt und dreifach wie-
der gebcn ; ich will — so geh
doch — » so ruf doch den
Beichtvater^ dasz er mir mei-
ne Stinden hinwegsegne. —
Bist du noch nicht fori .^

{Das Getiimmtl der Rdu^
ber %ifird h or barer.)

Daniel. » Gott verzeih
snir meine schwere* Siinde !
• wie soil ich das wieder rei-
men ? Ihr- habt ja immer
•das licbe Gebct Uber alle
Hau&er hinausgeworfen^ habt
mir so oianch. • . .

Franz. Nichts mehr da-

yon. — Sterben ! siebst du ?

■ sterben ? Es wird zu spat.

(man hort die Rduber tobenj

Bete doch ! bete J

Danibl. Ich sagts cuch
immer— ^. ihr vorachtet das
Vicbe Gebct so — aber gebt
Acht, gebt Acht ! wcnn die
Nbth an Mann geh ty wenn
tuch das Wasser an die Seek
geht. » . .

RjEUBER. (auf der Stra-
' ^ze.J Sturmt ! -schlagt todt I

brccht

knees to pray for itinef/ AD
prisoners shall be libeitatetfw
I will restore to the poor:
double and threefold ; I wiO
— go then — call the cotiki-
soTy that he may absolve nit
of my sins. •— Art thou not
yet gone ?

(The tumult of the robbers
increases »J

Daniei.* God forigifcf
me my sins i what am I to
make of all this ? Yoti hsiife
heretofore constantly scorned
the very thought of prayer,
you have often said to me...^

Francis. No more of
that. — To die ! seest thou ?
to die ! It is too late. fT^
robbers are heard sisuiing.J
Pray then, pray ?

Daniel, I ahvays told
you, you despised prayer t6o
much ; but take heed ! take
heed ! When trouble comes
upon us — when the s6ul*is
overwhelmed within u^. '."t .

RoBBERSr (hi the street./
Stoim! kiD! bre^ iAt*I

see..

bracht eitt f Ich sehe Licbt,
ion mmz er scyn.

Franz, {auf den Knieen.)
Hore mich beten, Gott im
Himmel ! — £s ist das erste-
roal.— Erhore mich Gott im
Hlmmel !

K^UBER. {laufen Sturm
und werftn Feuerbrdnde in
seine Sale,)

FvLK-tlJs. {biteU) Ich bin
kein gemeiner Morder gc*
we8en> mcin Herr Gott I —
habe mich nie mit Kleinig-
keiten abgegeben, mein Herr-
gott !

Daniel. Gott sey uns
gnadig! auch seine Gebete
werden zu Sttnden.

{Esjlieggn Steine und Feu-
erhrdndc. Die ScheibenfaU
len.)

. Franz* Ich kann nicht
beten, — Hier, hier ! ('auf
Brusi und Stirm schlagend J
Alles so 6d •— so verdorret.
{steht auf.y Nda ich will
auch nicht beten.

Daniel. Jesus Maria!
hclft — • rettct — das ganze
Schlosz steht in Flammen !

Franz. Hier nimm die-
lOEJ Degen. Hurtig, jag mir

\ ihn

GERMAN tANOVAQE* S4S

9

1 see ligjis i be must be there.

Francis, {upon his knees*)
Hear my prayers, God ill
heaven I Ic is the first time.
God in heaven, hear me !

Robbers. I they scale the
rampart yOnd throw firebramU
into his saloons A

Francis, (^rfl/5.). Jhavc
been no common murderer,
my God ? I have not com-
mitted petty crimes, gracious
God!

Daniel. God have mer-
cy upon us ! his very prayers
become sins.

{They throw stones and
firebrands* Tlic windows art^
broken.)

Francis. I cannot pray^
— Here, here 1 {beating his
breast and forehead.) AIJ^
> my hopes are blasted : all is *
lost, {rises.) I will pray
no more.

Daniel. Jesus Maria I
Help-^save — the whole castle
is in flames !

Francis. Here, take this
sword ; plunge it into my body,.
I i 2 that

244

AVTAtTng OF TUX

jbn hinterriiks in den fianch,
datz niche diese Buben kom-
\ men und treiben iliren Spott
mit mir.

{Das Feuer nlmmi uber-
hand.)

, Danie^. Bewahre ! be-
wahre ! Ich n^ag niemand zu
friih in den Himmel fordeniy

▼ielweniger zu friih

(if antrifiMt.)

F9.AV7. (ifun grasz tutc^-
stierenJf nach einer Pause.)
-*-ln die Holle willst du s^*
gen I Wirklich ! ich wittere
so etwas. — Sind das ihre hel-
l^n Triller ? Hor* ich euch
zischen ihr Nattern des Ab-
^uhds ? — Sic dringen hcrauf
. — belagern die Thure — wa-
rum zag ich so vor dieser
bohrenden Spitze? Die Thii-
M kracht — stiirzt — unent •
rinnbar. {er sfringt in dig
YlamnuH.)

duit dieae yiUains may not
treat me with scorn aad^
rision^

{The fire increases.)

Daniel. God forbid !
hold ! I will 6cnd no one
before his 'time to heaveo«
for less to. . • . {be runs off.)

Francis, {follows Un^
with a ghastly grin, after a
pause.) — To I^qll tboq
wouldst have said ! -^ Alas !
I perceive something like it.
-7 Are iliese the cries of hdl|
Do I hear youy ye hissing
serpents of the infernal re*
gions ? — T Hark ! they aic
pressing up the stairs— ^y
are surrounding the d6or««-'
Why do I tremble thus be-
fore this pointed sword ?^
HaJ tlie door falls in •-r,
bursts open — inevitable, (hf
leaps into thejlamis.)

SEP,

GEHMAN X>ANGUAO£. fifS

mmmmmmmmsBtmn

SECTION THE THIRD.

SYNTAX.

The mutual influence and relation, which the
dlflerent parts of speech bear to one another, is
called syntax. It consists principally of two parts^
concQrd and government.

Concord. is the agreement which one word ^
has with aj^other, in gender, number, case, or
person.

Government is that power which one part
of speech has over another, in directing its moodj
tense, or case.

To produce the agreement and right dispo-
sition of words in a sentence, rules are necessary.
IJut it has already been observed, that the Ger- -
man and English idioms have a great affinity with
each other, excepting some inflexions, peculiar to
the former J therefore I shall particularly dwell
Upon those instances in which there is some va-
riation, and al$o take notice of the conformity
of both languages. In order to elucidate such .
wles, appropriate exercises are necessary to fami-
]^aiize the student with the organization of the lan-
guage.

246 AJJALYSIS OP THE

•

guage. To each rule I have added adequate
examples* with a litteral translation. ^ t)ie«nd

of the syntax. I have joined one complete En*
glish exercise, recapitulating practically every
part of Speech, and explaining by way of notes
all the difficulties which may occur in translating
English into German.

Thus exercised, it will be no difficult task,
by the help of a good dictionary, to assist himself
without. any further aid.

CHAPTER!.

OF THE COMBUjTATlON OF WORDS,

m

Two or more nouns, &c. in the singular tium*
ber, joined together by one or more copulative cori^r
junctions, must have verbs, nouns, pronouns, &c;
agreeing with them in the plural number. The
following rules apd observations will at once con-
vince us of this, and at the same time display
aberrations from it.

/• Of the Article with the Noun.

The definite article, exists merely for the s^to^
of appellatives J proper names do not reqyir^. if.) '

Excepts 1. The names of mtionSf mountflinhi

forests, seas^ und^rivers. , .. \ .

a. Per-

: 5$EitAiAN LANGtfXGE. "247

2. Personal names, when they are appellative,
or when we speak of them with disdain.

- 3. When proper names are declined with
•fhe irtide.

1 . To proper names belonff also those of the
different parts of the world, and the name of Goi>y

• tignifying the Supreme Being. If it stand as ah
appellative, it requires the article ; as, der t^6tt
der Uebe, the god of love.

With appellatives the article - det demotes tfte
whole species, as a thing existing by itself; las
tkr Mensch ist sterMich, man is mortal. It likewise
denotes an object already known, from the whole
specieiB ; as, der Fremde ist wieder da, the stranger
is again here.

In the following instances it wdilld be wrong
to prefix the article: viz. 1. If the sUbstarifiye
sufficiently defines itself, by ahy -pre viotis tiurnc-*
rals or pronouns; 2. or if it be in the Vocative ;
3. after an apposition ; 4. before .tKe titles of
renowned men ; 5. in many titles of books; and
t8. when several substantives follow eacH other,
Itidroore especially in affecting discourses. Jn

• ilrfibst all the above mentioned cases", the omissioh,
or the addition of the article, has such a striking
affinity with the English, that it would be' 5U-

'p^-ftuous to dwell longer on a rule which the
student will so easily discover irt the annexed
practice.

The indefinite article denotes: 1, an indefinite

tj^ing, from a whole species ; as, ddsas'x'einVogd^

' there

1248 AMAiTSI$ OF TH£

there was a bird sitting. 2. The same indefinite
thing like the representative of the whole species ;
as^ ein Mensch istein schwaches GeschSpf^ man is a
feeble creature. 3. The species; as, wdch tin
Mensch! what a being ! es ist ein Fremder, he is
a stranger. 4.. Before proper names, .when thcjr
stand as appellatives ; as, cin Plato unserer Zeit,
a Hato of our age.

Exceptions. When a plurality is expressed by
<mcf word, no article is required ; as, ichsekeMen-
schfn, 1 set mtn.

In some instances the indefinite article may
be put alone, the substantive being understood;
. es, was JUr einer, what kind of a. . . . ; hier ist
einesy here is one.

The articles, as in English, are sometimes pro-
perly omitted, and when used, they ought to be
justly applii^d, according ,to their distinct nature.

»

II. Of Nouns joined together.

RjTLE I. When two or more substantives oc-
cur in one phrase, and have the same object re-
ferring either to a verb, or any other part of
spNBCch, they are put in the same case i as, diesffr
Mensch ist entweder ein Dumkopfoder ein Schurktf
this man is either a blockhead, or a rascal ; Gliici,
' Verstand iind Tvgend sind sdten beisammeny fortune,
understanding and virtue are seldo.n united.

Rr&XE. II. One substantive governs another

in the Cienitive c».se, si^ui.y.ng possession^ qua-

^ Jity,

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 2W

lity, &c. ; as, dcr Vater dieses hubschen Kindes ist
eifi armerTagldhneTy the father of this handsome child
is a poor day-labourer ; die Reitze dieses schonen
Madchens haben ihn verfiihrty the charms of this
h^ndsope maiden have seduced him ; zwei Drittel
der Einnahme sind fur die Artrien ; two-thirds
of the receipts are for the poor.

Except words of measure and quantity ; as,
ein Glas Bier^ a glass of beer 3 cine Heerde Sckafe,
a flock of sheep, &c.

However, when the substantive that follows
words of measure or quantity, are joined with a
pronoun, then the Genitive is expressed ; as, seeks
Ellen dieses Tucfies, six yards of this cloth ; aiid so
does also the adjective, which renders the Geni-
tive sometimes necessary ; as, eine Kompagnie guter
Soldaten, a company of good soldiers.

Rule IIL The Genitive and Dative cases
are generally supplied by the preposition von.
This happens,

1. When no article is used ; as, der siid-
Kche Theil von Frankreich, the southern part of
France 3 also, .

' 2. When quality, condition, proportion, &c. ,
are expressed ; as, ei?ie Frau von Verstundei a Vfo-
man of understanding y ein Herr von hoher Ge-
burty a gentleman of high birth ; von altem Adel,
of ancient nobility -, eine Reise von zwei hundert
Meileny a journey of two hundred miles ; ^in Schiff
von drei hundert Tonne n, a ship of three hundred

xk ' tons;

260 ANALYSIS OF THE

tons ; eine Surnme von zwei hundert Tkalern, a sunt
of two hundred dollars ; eifie Frau von siebenzig
Jahren, a woman of seventy years ; and,

3. Von is used before the indefinite article,
to denote character ; as, sie ist ein Muster von einer
guten Toch'ery she is a pattern for a good daughter;
when

4. It denotes the property that things are made
of ; as, ein Ring von Gold, a ring^ made of g9ld.

The preposition aiis, is sometimes employed
instead of von y as, ei?te Blume aus unserm Garten^
a flower out of our garden.

It is sometimes indifferent, whether vomy i. e.
von dem, be used ; as, er ist ein Freund vom House,
or des Ilauses, he is a friend of the house.

Sometimes von is not at all expressed ; as,
eine Reihe Obstbdumey a row of fruit trees ; die
Stadt Paris, the city of Paris.

The moun substantive is sometimes changed
into an adjective ; as, eifie steinerne Briicke, instead
of eine Briicke von Stein, a stone bridge. -

Sometimes we unite the two substantives,
which determine one another ; as, die Gartenthiir,
the garden door, for die Thiir des Gartens, the door
of the garden.

One substantive may also terminate another ;
as, die Gebrdiiche der Bamhner des NordpolSy the
customs of the inhabitants of the north pole.

The following phrases belong to a flowelry
stile 5 as, des Volkes Rache, the people's revenge;

unsers

GERMAN LAKGUAGE. 251

unsers Zeitalters verdorbene Sittm, the corrupted
manners of our age, &c.

///• Of Numerals.

The following substantives, although accom-
panied by a number, are never put in the plural ;
as. Buck, a quire ; Fusz, or Schuh, a foot ; Loth,
an ounce ; Maasy a measure ; ManJi, a man (when
collective) ; Pfund, a pound -, RisZy a ream of pa-
per ; Ufir, an hour ; Zolly an inch.

To denote the date of the month, we always
make use of the ordinal numbers ; as, den zweiten
vergangenen Monaths, the second of last month j
das Kind zvard den sechsten August gebohren, und
ist den zwolften December gestorben, the child was
bom the sixth of August, and died the twelfth of
December.

After the ordinal and cardinal numbers, the
substantive may be put in the Genitive ; or with
the preposition vo7i, aus, unter, an, in the £)ative,
ex. gr. drei der schonsten Statuen aus Rom, three
of the handsomest statues from Rome ; xwanzig
%)on ihnen wurden gefangen, twenty of them were
made prisoners ; zwei aus ihrer Mitte wurden ab-
geschicicty two out of their centre were deputed;
nur xwolf unter vier zindzwanzig waren gut, only
twelve out of twenty-four were ^ood.

Observation. When a personal pronoun is
placed instead of a noun, the Genitive is put
before the number ; as, e^ spielten unser fieben,

Kk2 , nnd

252 ANALYSIS OF THE

tinddreinur gewanneny seven of us were playingi

and only three gained.

Fractional numbers are put before nouns of
quantity ; as, zxoei und ein halb P/undy or dritthalb
Pfundy two pounds and a half 5 drei undeine viertd
Elky three yards and a quarter ; seeks und drei vier-
tel Zentner, six hundred pounds and three quarters;
'we also say, ein achleb Zentner, the eighth part of
a hundred pounds.

Years and hours are reckoned by the cafdinak;
as, im Jahr ein tausend acht himdert und einSy zwei^
dreiy &c. in the year one thousand eight hundred
and one, two, three, &c. ; es ist einy zzvei, drei, &c.
Z7/fr, it is one, two, three, &c. o'clock.

Remarks. In reckoning the hours, we may
put the neuter of the cardinals without expressing
the word Uhr, clock ; as, es ist einsy it is one
o'clock ; wenn es acht schlagt, when it strikes eight ; ,
hat es zwei geschlagen ? has it struck two ?

The following are peculiarities : ein Viertel .
auf dreiy a quarter past two ; drei Viertel auj
%xvolf, a quarter to twelve; haW acht, half-pas*
seven.

IV. Of Pronouns.

Rule !• Pronoujai|.v^jmust agree with their
substantives, (especially^ the possessives and demon*
slratives) in their gender, number and case ; but
the relatives only in gender and number. The
two first are placed before the substantive to which
they belong ; the relative after it.

Rule

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 253

Rule II. When the personal pronoun is
followed by a substantive, or the word selbst^ or
selbsteUy or by several verbs belonging to the same
person, we do not repeat the same personal pro-
noun 5 as, ichi dein Freitndy gebe dir den Rath^ I
give you the advice as a friend 3 er will es ihr
selbst einhandigen ; he will give it her himself ;
well du nichts arbeitesly und bestandig miiszig gehst
so kannsl du zu nichts gelangen^ as long as you do
no work, atid are always idle, you (jan gain nothing.

We sometimes repeat the personal pronoun
after the relative, in such cases as the following ;
?Ar, die ihr Faullenzer seyd^ ye who are idle fel-
lows, &c.

Rule III. When the subject of the third
person and the case of the verb denote the same
person, we make use of the reflective pronoun sichy
instead of hirrij or ihn ; as, sie hat sich daran erin-
nert^ she has recollected herself ; er spricht nur im-
mer von sich, he is always speaking of himself j er
hat mich Z7i sich kommen lassen, he has ordered me
to call on him.

If the reflected pronoun sichy is at the same
time reciprocal, we may substitute einander ; as,
sie lieben sich, or sie lieben einander, they love one
another.

Rule IV"". When the action of the verb does
not relate to the subject of the phrase, 1. e. when ^
the verb is not reflected, we employ the pronoun
in the third person 5 as, er erzUhlt viel Gutes i)on

ihm.

254 ANALYSIS OF THE

ihrrty von ifir, von ifinen, he relates much good of
him, of her, of them; er hat mich zu ihm (dem
Fremden) gefiihrty he has conducted me to him
{viz. the stranger).

Some Peculiarities.

When the English speak of an inanimate ob-
ject, they always make use of the neuter ^iV, which
is not the case in German, for they have distinct
genders by which tliey apply the pronouns accor-
dingly ; a few examples will make it clear to tlje
student, ex. gr. das ist ein schoner Stock, this Is a
handsome stick ; ja, er ist sehr schon, yes (he) it is
very handsome ; zvo haben sie ihn gekauft} where did
you buy (him) it ? zvie gefdllt ihnen diese Uhr, how
do you like this watch ? sie ist sehr schouy (she)
it is very handsome ; das Leben ist sehr kurz, abet
es vergeht tvie ein Trauniy life is Very short, but it
vanishes like a dream ; das Pferd ist sehr schon aber
es friszt nicht genvgy the horse is very handsome,
but it does not eat enough.

The pronoun ich, is sometimes employed thus :

mein halbes ich, literally, my half self.

mein ander ich, — ^ my other self;

The Dative mir and dir, in a familiar or iro-
nical style are used thus : du wirst mir schon singen,
thou wilt soon sing, depend upon it; du bist mir
einfeiner Kerl, thou art a fine fellow ; ich lobe mir
den Hochkeimer, I prefer old hock ; das mag dir ein
Spasz getvesen seyn ! that must have been good
sport for thee ! So

^ GERMAN LANGITAGE. . 25?

So we find the plural of the personal thus in-
terposed : das war euch eine Freude / that was a
pleasure ! das war euch ein Fest ! that was a feast
for you !

Rule V. The pronoun possessive in Gennati
ought to be repeated before substantives of dif-
ferent genders ; as, seine Gesiindheit iind sein Leben,
his health and his life ; sein Weib imd Gesinde, his
wife and servants ; er ist viein Freimd, Rathgeber
und Beschutzer^ he is my friend, adviser, and pro-
tector.

Rui,E VI. Demonstrative pronouns are em-
ployed thus : diesej\ or der^ denote an object pre-
sent or near, of which we speak ; jener^ of an ab-
sent y ox distant on^'^ and when we have to indicate
a third object, we use der; as, dieser Wein ist besser
ahjener, this wine is better than that ; dieser hat
es rund flbgeschlageHy der will auch nicht, iindjener
hat zu vieleGesch of te, this has entirely refused it; that
wiltnpt also, and the other has too much business.
- We frequently add to the demonstrative pro-
nouns the words hier, or das ^s, ichxvillvondiesem
hier, I will have of this; kennen sie den da, or dort^
do you know this, or that (man) ?

Rule VII. Demonstrative pronouns may pre-
cede a possessive, and may also be separated from
their substantives, or by an intermediate preposition ;.
as, dieses mein eigehes Kind vertraue ich dir an,
I entrust this only child of mine to you ; dieses und
voriges Jahr ist es heisz gewesen, this year and the.
- ^ last

256 ANALYSIS OF THE

last ' have been very hot ; diesen und dcnfol§enAs%
Tag rasteten wir, we stopped this day and the fofc
lowing ; diesey meines Freundes liebste Tochter, this
beloved daughter of my friend; diese, einer Be*
loknung zvurdige Tugend, this virtue worthy of re-
compense.

Rule. VIII. The neuters dies, das, jencSy
are sometimes put absolutely, for all cases ; as, das
ist mein Groszvater, this is my grand-father ; das
sind geschickte Leute^ these are skilful men ; das
ist erschrecklichy this is terrible ; er sagte viir dieses
undjenes, he told me this and that ; Ueberbringer
dieseSy the bearer of this ; am sechsten dieses, the
sixth of this.

Rule IX. Derjenige, is always followed by
a relative, thus : derjenigey zvelcher in seiner Ju'
gendy &c. he, who in his youth, &c.

Observations. 1. Soldiery loses the inflective
syllable, before the definite article ; as, sotch ein
Mann und soldi ein JVeib ; such a man, and such a
woman.

^- 2. The Genitive of derselbcf is often put in-
stead of the possessive ; as, das ist ein ges Bitchy
ich kenne den Verfasser dcsselbeny this is a good book,
I know the author of it.

3. Derjenigey weldiery may be put instead of
wer ; as, zver Geld hat, hat audi Freundey he who
has money, has also friends s wer ein ehrlidier Matin
ist, der betrugt niemandeny he who is an honest
man deceives no one. -

Rule

^ GERMAN LANGUAGE. . 25?

- <

So we find the plural of the personal thus in-
terposed : das war euch eine Freude i that was a
pleasure ! das xjoar euch ein Fest ! that was a feast
for you !

Rule V. The pronoun possessive in Germati
ought to be repeated before substantives of dif--
ferent genders ; as, seine Gesundheit laid sein LebeUy
his health and his life ; sein Weib laid Gesinde, his
wife and servants ; er ist viein Frauidy Rathgeber
und Beschiitzer^ he is my friend, adviser, and pro-
tector. .

Rule VI. Demonstrative pronouns are em-
ployed thus : diesej\ or der^ denote an object pre^
sent or near^ of which we speak ; jener, of an ab-
sent y ox distant on^'y and when we have to indicate
a third object, we use der; as; dieser Wein ist besser
alsjeneVy this wine is better than that ; dieser hat
es rund cibgeschlageny der will auch nichty nndjener
hat zu vieleGeschaf ley this has entirely refused it; that

N

wilt not also, and the other has too much business.
- We frequently add to the demonstrative pro-
nouns the words A/er, or rfa ,• ^s, ichzvillvondiesem
hier, I will have of this; kennen sie den da, or dort^
do you know this, or that (man) ?

Rule VII. Demonstrative pronouns may pre-
cede a possessive, and may also be separated from
their substantives, or by an intermediate preposition ;
siS, dieses mein eigehes Kindvertraue ich dir an^
\ entrust this only child of mine to you \ dieses und
vpriges Jahr ist es heisz gewesen, this year and the.
- \ last

258 ANALYSIS OP

Sohn krank war^ the man, wboie sob- wts ilT;
Frau von dtren Sohn wir redem, tbfe WoAian/'dl
whose son wc speak.

Rule XIV. When the relative refers to Se^'
vcral substantives of different genders, it is some*
times put in the plural ; otherwise it follows (he
gender of the last ; but, whenever we find Our-
^Ives embarrassed in a similar case, we use the iii-
declinable relative so; as, der Garten uhd das Ham
so kh gekauft habe, the garden and the house whidi
[ have bought.

The relative wo refers commonly to a places
and sometimes to a certain time ; zs, ItatienisteSf
wo man Meisltrsliicke der Baukunst Jmdet, Italty i&
the country where we meet with mastetpleces rf
arcliitccture j Londen war es, wo wir uns zum '^-
stenmal \uihen, we saw one anotherfor the first time
In London.

Rule. XV. In answering the inteitogativc
pronouns, the same case must l>e used; as, wer
kommtf—der Fremde^ who comes ?— the sti^gt^r;
wtr ist iUeser Mann ? — ein 1Vei?ikandler, w)ib *i8
this man ? — a wine- merchant ; was sehet ihrf^^
einen Baum, what do you see ? — a tree, &c.

lu otlier cases, we may say : wer hat ihnen
dieses gesagt ? — ick habe es von meinem Bruder er*
fahreny who told you this ?— I h^ard it from mjr
brother.

Rule XVI. When the question is tildsed
by seyn^ with die Gcnidve and Dttifc ; tbdi anMner

is

U mp4^ 9isO by siyn^ witl). the Nominative of th^
pronoun possessive; as^ wem, or wessen ist das Kindf
•— ^ is( mein^ to whom belongs this child ? — it is

min^. )

Observation. We sometimes, in interrogation^
0^ik^ uife of the neuter, in an absolute maimer ; as^
tiQelches ist die beste Auspraihe ? which is the best
pronunciation ? >

The following are peculiarities.: the English^
when they intend to e3cpres8 one individual object;
place the possessive pronoun after the substantive
in the Genitive case ; as, a relation of nubit^ u
Sripndf^ <^ mine, qf yours, of liis, 8(c. The G^ermans
lorUow a different mode, ex. gr. ein Freund. von mir^
a friend of mine ; em Bedienter von uns, . a servant
^f aura.

AUe, iu comippn life;, signifies sometimes that
^ thi^g is completely finished ; as,, der Wein^ isf
aUe, the wine is done ; die Kirschen sind aUe, the
cherries are eaten.

Meinesgleichen, deinesgleichen, seinesgleichen^
'ikresgleichen, enresgleichen, indicate people of an
eqtial situation.

V. Of Adjectives.

Rule It. The adjective is put before the

lubstantive, and must agree ' with it, in gender,

number, and case -, as, die gute Fran und die base,

. the< good ^nd bad wx>n)ari; ;. den secfi^tim dieses Mo*-

. 1 1 2 nalhsy

360 AHALTStS OP TfiS

italh9, the sixth of this month . In the latter phtase
Tag, day, is understood.

Obsetvations. Adjectives expressing the titles
of great men, follow the noun ; as, Karl der Weisc,
Charles the wise.

Adjectives, expressing the qualities of nouns ia
different genders, must be put in the neuter ; as, dtu
Geschickteste ven eiich soil belohnt werden, the most
skilful of you shall be recompensed ; das F<?r-
niinftigstc von euch beiden ist die Frau, the most
reasonable of you two, is the woman ; Keines xion
ihnen wolUe nachgebeuy none of them would yield.

Rule II. When the adjective is plaeed sub-
stantively, it is put in the neuter' ; as, das Erha*
bene, the sublime ; das Netieste, the newest.

In comparisons the English use as, the Ger-
mans render this by so, als, or tvie ; viz. so tapfer
als, or wie Marlborough, as brave as Marlborough,

VI. Of the Verb,

From the subsequent rules it will be seen,
that the government, the construction, and appli-
cation of the German verb (few instances excepted)
is nearly the same as the English ; for the tenses,
moods, &c. have such an analogy with each other,
that they scarcely require any further elucidation*

RtJLE I. The verb must agree with the noun,
in number and person.

Rule II, When a verb belongs to two or

more

kb,

GSRMAK LANGUAGE. S^].

t

more substantives of the singular number, it must
be put in the plural^ as, diewahremidfalscheBe*
scheidenheit sind sehr verschieden, true and false
modesty are very different ; Zorn, Eifersucht^
Hasz und Liebe, sind sehr hefiige Leidenschqfieji,
anger, jealousy, hatred, and love, are very violent
passions.

, Sometimes the verb, belonging to two sub*
stantives, is put in the singular 9 as Pest und Hun-'
ger herrscht irn Lande, plague and faming ravage
the country.

Rule III. The verb is put in the plural
number, with a name of the singular, from mo-
tives of politeness; as, der Herr Grqfhabenb^ohlen,
literally (the Mr.) the CounJ (have) has commanded;
Jhre Excellenz beweiseti mir viele Gute, Your Ex-
cellency shews me much kindness.

Observe, that the Infinitive of the active voice,
after certain verbs, occasionally has a passive signir
fication ; as, lasz ihn nifen, let ^im call ; which
signifies, in English, let him be called ; da* Richter
biesz ihn binden, the judge ordered him to (bind)
be bound ; wir sahen ihn schlagen, we saw him
(beating) beaten. . <^

With respect to the tenses, moods, &c. no
particular rule is necessary, for the great affinity of
J)oth languages is self-evident.

0/

992 AVALTSIS OF THB

«

Of Auxiliaries.

m

The Infinitive of the auxiliaries dUrfen, soUen^

m

konnen mogen^ lasseitj miisssen, wollen, &c. is sub-*
stitutcd for the Preterite Participle, when the Infini-
tive of another Verb precedes them ; as, ich habe
es, nicht thun durfen (for gedurft), 1 was not allowed
to do it; du hdlteit kommen soUen {(or gesoUt J, thou
shouldst have come ; wir hdtten es sehen konnen
(for gekonnt)^ we might have seen it ; ich habe ihn
anhoren rniissen (for ge?misztji I Have been obliged
to listen to bim .

FIT. Tlie Participles.

9

The Germans have two Participles, the Pr^
sent and the Preterite,

The Present Participle is formed of the Infini-
tive Mood, by adding the letter rf; as, from lobetii
to praise, Part, lobend, praising ; from Idchertj to
laugh, Part, lachendy laughing.

lliis Participle- governs the same case as the
verb, and has also the nature of an adjecttve; as,
<^'^ lachendc Fruhling^ the smiling spring ; dertaii-
zende Bdi^^ the dancing bear i das laiifende JahVy
the current yealp*

It takes the form of an adjective ; as, ergui^
ckender Webiy refreshing wine ; stdrkende Speise,
strengthening food ; huidendcs Getrdnke^ cooling
beverage ; ein liebender VatcVy a loving father i

eine

\

mne trUurende Mutter y a mourning motbfer ; eiri xoei^
nendes Kindy a weeping child.

^ * ■ The adverbial form is never put after any* verb ;
more particularly not after the auxiliary sej/n^ to be;

The German Present. Participle cannot be em-
ployed by the auxiliary seyn, tp be, as in English j
ks, / am writings he is readings we zvere walkings
they will be going, &c. Thexe aire ht)wever. a few
instances where, from its significaiiori,* it becomes
similar to an adjective 5 as, sie ist reitzend, she is
charming ; die Noth ist dringend^ the occasion is
pressing.

Participles considered as adjectives admit de-
grees of comparison, by means of additional end-
ings. However, these degrees do not extend to
kU Participles.

Poets occasionally exceed the limits pre-
'scribed by custom, and in imitation of foreign lan-
guages, give a greater latitude to the verbal ca-
pacity of Participles. Allowance may be made for
'poetical licence, but we must not deviate from the
rules of prosaic accuracy.

The most essential quality which Present Par-
ticiples retain, is that of governing cases, and th?9
•is perfectly agreeable to the idioni of the language-;
«as, die alles belebende Sonne, the sun which anittiates
^every thing ^ die tins bevorstehende Gefahr, tlfe
■-danger hanging over us ; das uns veffolgende Ge^
ithieky the fate which persecutes us. The govern-
ing cases must be placed before the Participle ; yit

• ■ *• WO"

264 .ANALYSIS n THE

we find in some instances the case aad Tzi^&i^
pie joined together, and written as one word ; aS|
ein ehrliebender Manny a man that loves hooori
instead, ein Ehre liebeiider Maim.

The Germans use sometimes their Present Par-.
ticiple in a peculiar manner, by prefixing the pre-
position zti ; as, das hoch zu schdtzende Ferdienst,
merit to be highly esteemed.

The Present Participle may in English be con-
verted into a substantive, by prefixing the article ;
as, the xinnting^i the readings &c. whereas in Ger-
man the Infinitive serves for that purpose j as, das
Schreibeny das Lesen. . .

The Preterite Participle.

Preterite Participles either end in t (etj, or
n(en)y and have, -for the most part, the augmen-
.tative ge before them ; as gelobt, praised -, gespro-
cheuy talked. The augmentative ge however is re-
jected by inseparable compound verbs, and those
of ieien, or iren ; a$, regierty governed ; spatzlerety
walked, &c.

The use of the Preterite Participle is twofold,

1. when combined with an auxiliary verb, it con-
stitutes the compound tenses of conjugation ; and

2. as an adjective, it is joined to substantives,
which is very frequently done in German ; as,
geliebte Tochter, beloved daughter y die gepsiesene
Tapferkeity the praised valour 5 ein verachtetes Ge-
sdiopf, a despised creature.

This

G^HMAN LANGUAGE. $65

This Participle as an adjective, is also suscep-
tible of the degrees of comparison, and particu-
larly of the superlative which it takes in its full ex-
tent ; but as for the comparative, it takes it only
on the adverbial form.

VIII. Of Adverbs.

Rule I. Adverbs are generally placed im-
mediately after the verb ; as, wir haben liter keine
Freunde^ w^e have no friends here.

Rule II. Adverbs of time are placed before
all other adverbs ; as, sie zoird morgen hier seyn^
she will be here to-morrow.

Rule HI. ITiose adverbs which denote mea-
sure, weight, age, worth, &c. require the Accu-
sative ; as, zwolf Ellen langy twelve yards long;
acht Pfund schwery eight pounds weight ; sechs Jahr
altj six years old ; vier Thaler werth^ four dollars
yalu

Adverbs, which convey the idea of about, or
merely, with numbers, are rendered thus : u?igefdhr
fiinf-Iahre, about five years ; zxvei bis drei Wochtn,
two or three weeks ; ein Stiicker zehn, about ten
pieces ; ein Ehler drei, about three yards ; an die
xrOanzig, nearly twenty ; bey die fiinfzig, nearly

fifty. .

This manner of speaking, though not classical,
is for the most part used by the lower orders of
people.

Mm IX.

26tf / Al^AtYSrS op THS .

IX. : t)f Prepositions. /

\Vhen oi«e pfepositk^n belongs to mor^ than
6iAt noun^ it must only b6 once expressed, tli^

same as in English ; as, durck Liisti Betrug und
Verratherejfi by intrigue, deceit and treachery.
However, when substantives are combined by
conjunctions, we must repeat the preposition ; as,
cntxoeder duroh List, oder durch GewaU, either by
intrigue or by forc^ ; theils mit Geld, theils ml
IVctaren, partly with money, partly with mer-
chandise.

Two or more substantives of different genders,
when put after a single Preposition, lose their ar-
ticle or case ; as, in Nolh und Tod, in distress and
death ; a^f Todt und Leben, upon life and death ^
Ifei JBrod und Wasser, by bread and wat^.

Sometimes we meet with prepositions immC'
diately following each other, but very rarely ;, aSf
durch mit Geld bestochene Stimmen, votes purchased
with money. This mode of expression should pot,
however, be imitated.

JC. Of Conjunctions.

The conjunction dasz requires the Indie^tk^
when it bespeaks certainty ; and the Conjuneiwe
when dubeity ; as, ich versichere dich dasz ich dein
Freund bin, I assure you, that I am yoilr friend $
er will nicht glaiiben dasz ich sein Freund, sejf, -he
will not believe that t am his friend.

If

If we express a vowy qr a msh, the conjunc-
tion dasz always requires the Subjunctive Mood ;
a^ ach ! dasz dies g^scJicibCf ah ! tbs^t (bw woul4
happen.

The conjunction so is employed to epanect $
sentence^ when the prior xnember of it begins
with a consecutive^ causal, or conditional conjunc-
tion ; aSf wenn es Zeit ist so xv^rde ick k^fmv^Hf
when it is time, I shall come ; da er $ick dfV V^J^
tung naherte^ so f and er die Wdlle mit Feinden be*
setzt, when he approached the fortress, he found
the rampjarts occupied by the enemy.

So i§ not always required after the consecu-
tive and causal, wch as da, als, me, but it is
rswely left out after the conditional cpnjunctions,
Miob^wewi, obschon, ZK^emischon, menriglcich.

When th^ CQnditi<>ngI is npt expressed in (hp
pnm jn^iibf r# but understood, it i^ neccsmry to
ffisSn^ U^e pf S0 m the ^bsd^quent ^ as, hdtfe kh
d^gewumt $Q zcarie ich nickt d^hin gegangen, h^
J \in&9fn thtt, J shpuld npt feavft gone there,
whj^ sfamdi^ for, fmenn ich d^s gemuszt hatfe, }i
I Jwd i»owi) that, CQtmqm^tlf so o^ust JSqI^ow*

If, obgleichj obschon, or a siiinilar word, sig-
«lffying though, although, pmoedes so $ the con-
^n^iondochy yet, or a synonymous one, gen^rallf
liMows 5 as, ^ IT gieich jung ift so hat sr doeh
viel Verstand, although he is young, he has neyey-
4i^f0i mcti^n^rrtaiMling.

M n^2 Tb^

26tf / Al^TAtYSrS op THS .

IX. Of Prepositions. /

\Vhen oi«e pf e^ositk^n bekmgd to mor^ than
em noun^ it must only b6 once expressed, tli^

same as in English ; as, durck Lhti Betrtig und
Verratherejfy by intrigue, deceit and treachery.
However, when substantives are combined by
conjunctions, we must repeat the preposition ; as,
cnizceder duroh List, oder durch GcwaU, either by
intrigue or by force ; theils mit Geld, theils ml
IVctaren, partly with money, partly with mer-
chandise.

Two or more substantives of different genders,
when put after a single Preposition, lose their ar-
ticle or case ; as, in Nolh ttnd Tod, in distress and
death -, avf Todt und Leben, upon life and death j^
ffei JBrod und Wasser, by bread and wat^.

Sometimes we meet with prepositions imnie*
diately following each other, but very rarely y as,
durch mil Geld bestochene Stimmen, votes purchased
with money. This mode of expression should pot,
however, be imitated.

X. Of Conjunctions.

The conjunction dasz requires the Indie^ttke
when it bespeaks certainty ; and the Conjunethe
when dubeity ; as, ich versichere dich dasz ich dein
Freund bin, I assure you, that I am your friend s
er zvill nicht glaiiben dasz ich sein Freund setf, -he
will not believe that t am his friend.

If

If we express a vow, or a wish, the conjunc-
tion dasz always requires the Subjunctive Mood ;
a^ ach ! dasz dies gesofiabCf ah ! tbs^ %hh woul4
happen.

The conjunction so is employed to epanect $
sentence, when the prior member of it begins
with a coDseeutive, causal, or conditional conjunc?-
iion; aSf wenn es Zeit ist so vo^rdc ich k^mw^Ht
when it is time, I shall come ; da er $ick dfV V^jsr
tung ndhertCf so fund er die Wdlle mit Feinden be-
setzty when he approached the fortress, he found
the ramparts occupied by the enemy.

So is not always required after the consecu-
tive and causal^ ^uch as da^ als, me, but it is
l^ely left put after the conditional cpnjunctionsj
Mioh* wem, obschon, wenmchon, mermgleich.

When the cpnditipngi is npt cxpiiessed in thp
pnm m^iiber* biit underst0o4, it i^ necessary to
imke n^ ^ S0 m tiie ^bsequent j as, Imtte ich
44Sgewumt $Q %c<iris igh nicht ddAin gegangen, h^l
J kiM»w4 thtt, J shpuld npt have gone there,
wW^ sfamdt^ for, fmemi ich d^s g^u^mzf hatfe^ }i
I Jwd i»owi) that, cpns^qMi^ntly so n^yst J^l|ow*

If, obgleich, obschon, or a similar word, sig-
filffytng though, although, preoedes so s the con-
jfuietlon dock, yet, or a synonymous one, generally
liMows 5 as, ^ IT gUich )ung ift so hai tr doch
viel Verstandy although he is young, he has neyey-
4i^f0i mcti^tt^rrtaiMling.

M m 2 Th^

268 ANALYSIS OF THE

The negative, nichty not ; in an interrogative
exclamation, gives emphasis ; zvie viele brave Sol-
daten und OJiciere sind nicht in dieser Schlacht
geblieben ! how many brave soldiers and officers
have perished in this battle!

The conjunction dock serves for a similar pur-
pose, in^ questions and exclamations i , as, was sagt
er dock ? pray, what did he say ? war das dock
ein Ldrm, what a noise that was ]

XL Of Intellections.

The interjection generally stands by itself,
without reference to the case of substantives ^ as,
es ist leider / mit uns dahin gekovimen^ alas ! are
we come to that ! es ist uns, Gott Lob ! diesmal
gelungen^ thank God ! we have at length succeeded;
! welch ein Gliick ! o what fortune !

We find the Genitive of the object in several
instances, but this does not happen from the effect
of the conjunction, but from an ellipsis, or a pe-
culiarity of the language ; as, o, der Schande ! o,
what a shame ! pfuiy des garstigen Menscfien ! fie
upon that despicable fellow ! ach ! des armen Kin^
des ! ah ! the poor child.

In some instances we find.it with the Dative;
as, wohlmir ! well is me ! Heil euch ! success. to
you ! Gliick zumjungen Sohne! success to the young
son !

The Accusative is like wise, found after the in-
terjection; as. Of mich UnglUcklichen ! o, unhappy

' mei

dERMAN LANGUAGE. 1269

tne ! We should not, however, imitate the latter
mode of expression.

XIL Of the Arrangement' or Construction of
Wordsy Phrases, Sentences, SHc.

Many grammarians have rather endeavoured
to display an artificial knowledge, in this part of
grammar, than clearly to point out to the student
the real and essential parts of it. During the time
I have professed the German language in this king-
<iQm, I do not remember one among my nume-
rous 'pupils, who ever found the least difficulty in
attaining a knowledge of the just arrangement of
words, &c. but on the contrary confessed, that this
part of grammar was not only the most simple,
but had the most cleaf analogy to the English.
As for perspicuity, and accuracy in writing, which
is much more material, and when studied pro-
perly, of much more, use and profit to acquire ;
the student will find every necessary information
in the subsequent Practice, and particularly in the
Second Part of this work, in which the arrangement
and proper useof word$, &c. are of course properly
explained.

^ti\

PRAC-

\ r

S74 AHALTSis Of nn

^M ]do -Bot despair^ hmferer^" nyoSned tlie
countess* ^ I am the wife of the weaMuest noblt*
^^ man in tfai& oomitiy, yet the wife of the poorat
^ beggar (40) cannot be more wretabed than I
^ am. 'My budnrnd 45 the mort aTuricioiii -and
^ jealoos (41) of his sex (42) ; he is a bui^daa
^^ to me» and ito be defivemd from him boa haaf
^ been ^e object j(45) of my most earnest and fisn*
^ vent wishes ; I have formed many plans foamy
escape (44), but couid never put an^ into ta»
cution ; I have many times (45.) wkIm^ to pro-
cure some poison (40), .in order to get mi df
** him(47); but I xxAild not trust arf . .sBPaaals.
** Th^ are all spies (4&)f and sim^ whom you hatfc
^' just dispatch^ (49), is the most: deteataUe df
her sex(50). i am now nearly twenty yeaiB^
age (51) and not totally {S2) destitute of beauty :

^ mote-

(40) of the poorest beggar, des armsten Bettkrs.

(41) the most avarioious and jealous^ dif^geizigsie und .
tifirnicfitigsU.

(42) of his sex, seines Gischlechtis.

(43) object, Giginstand.

(44) for my escape, s;W mtiner ffmekt.

(45) many times, vieimal^ or '4ft€r$.

(46) to ppocure sosie poison, Gift zu vefic&qffin.
(47} in order to get rid of him, urn ikn k5% twwerden*

(48) spies, Spi^mfT. ^ .'

(49) to dispatch, mbfertfgen.

(50) «f he^sex, ibr^s GescfiheitH.

(51) twenty years of age, zwanzigy^ alt.
(5a) totally, ganzliA.

J

^ moreover^ mjr husband lived wkh that WT6t€b^
^^ (pointing to the murdered chaiiihecHaatd (&S)y
^ and qoasequeady she has done me. every kind
^^ qf mischief {54)9 ^where she could find 1^ leaal
opportunity for setting my husband against me,
J£ oQj one of you {^5) will protect (5&) me, I
^.wiU most wiUinglj s^^ompany him in all hit
<( wanderings (57)^ and contentedly spend the
^^ night under a hed^, and the day in a village
^\ atehouse(5&) ; being tired of my present wretched
^^ situation* I should be glad to revenge myself,
ia following you^ for the perfidy and ill treatment
of m^ tyrannical husband (59). Spare (60) but
^^ my life, and you shall have no reason (61) to
^ r^Bet your humanity ; this castle contains a m^ie
^* of wealth (62), and the greater part of its titea-
a ^f0g ^^ easily discovered, yet there are hoards

Kn2 *^ which

€€
€€

(53) chambermaid, Kammetfrau.

(54) mischief, UnfuiL

(55) if any one of you, in sef<rn einer uffier euch.

(56) to protect, ieschutzgn.

(57) wanderings, JVanderungen,

(58) a village alebou«e, eim Dorfschenke.

(i9) ^f °^y tyrannical husband, m^inti tyrcamschen

Gotten.
(60) to Spare, sch^nenm
(.^i) and you shall have no reason, undihr soUtkeine

Vrsachi haben.
(62) yifsiiishf Rfuhtkum.

276 ANALYSIS OF TBE

*« which you can never obtain (63) without my
•' assistance (64)/*

Whatever excess fellows of diis de8trription(65)
may sometimes commit, still they are men. The
countess'a unexpected address, her undaunted tone
of voice* and her uncommon beauty$ altogether
produced in these monsters (whose hands (66) yet
reeked^with the blood of her domestics) a wonder-
ful effect. They assembled in a ring, and consulted
for some minutes upon the steps to be pursued (67).
The countess, though unguarded, discovered not the
smallest inclination to escape, and scarcely change
ed colour (68), though their horrid threats and im-»
precations continually reached her ears (69), The
leader of the band soon addressed her : he repeat*
edly asked her, whether they might trust her
word? Whether she was resolved to desert her hus-
band and yield (70) to their desires? To these ques-
tions

- ■ » ■ ' ■ ■ ■ ■ ■' ...III " 11 ■ ■ ! W

(63) to obtain, erhalten.

(64) assistance, der Bei stand*

(65) whatever excess fellows of this descriptiont va^t
auch immer fur Ausichwelfungen^ Kerls von sQlchiT
Beschreibung,

(66) whose hands, deren Hande.

(67) upon the steps to be pursued, fiber dUMaaxf^'^
gcln die sie %u mhmen hdtten,

(68) changed colour, veranderte ihre Farbe.

(69) continually reached her wrs, reighten fiesta r^i^ it^
Ohr.

(70) to yield, Gnuge leistert) slch<r^ebeni

LAKGUAGlf. 87T

tions she invariably , answered in the affirmative
Necessity (71) may surely be urged as an excuw
for her conduct (72).

'« Come then," cried the leader, whilst he enoh
braced her, ^^ and make the promised discoveries 4
though we place but little confidence in nor
bles (73), trained up (74) as they are in the paths
•* of debauchery and viqe, we will this time ven-
ture (75) : be assured, however, that were you
stili more beautiful (76) your head shall be the
^ forfeit of your indiscretion, if we discover diat
^* you intend to escape or deceive us."

She immediately seized the light (77) with the
greatest alacrity, and led them through every apart-*
ment; she opened, unasked, every door, and every
'place of security, $he assisted them in packing
up the treasures; she talked and joked with per-
fect good humour, leaped over the murdered bo-»

dies

*€
««

4€

■*i*n

(71) necessity, Notk,

{72) as an excuse for her conduct, als eine Entschul-
digung ihres Betragens*

(73) nobles, Edelleute.

(74) trained up, aufgehracht,
(75; to venture, wagen,

(76) that were you still more beautiful, dasz wenn ihr
noch einmal so schon wdret, *

{77) she immediately seized thclight, sie tr griff io^
gleich das Licfit.

S78 AHALTSIS OF THft

dies (78), that laj in her mj, with spppMnfc nft
diflfeience, and willmgly exposed her* delicate pe^
son to the most fatiguing labour (79)« i

Plate, money, jewels, cloths, and manjr pieces
c(f valuable 6imiture(80), weie aheady prqmiedi
£Mr being carried off ; the signal for Aeir decamp
inent(81) was gtv^o, whea the leader's m^hf
destined bride seising him hastily by tiie anB>
^ did not I befom assure you," exclaimed Ae,
^^ that you should have no reason (8d) to repent
^^ of 3rour good opinion of my honour ? Open tie*-
^' sures (83) you can easily seize ; it sowbecoineB
*' me to discover those which are secreted (84)."—
*' Secreted !" — ^^ Can you suppose," interrupted
she, '^ that in a mansion (85) like this there are
no places of security destined for the conceal-*
^^ ment of property ? Have patience, and you shaO
** have good reason for changing your opi-

" nion.

it

• m>m m

(78) leaped over the murdered bodies, sprang uker die
ermordeten LeichHammem

(79) to the most fatiguing labour, %u dcr trmuitmten
Arheiu

(80) furniture, Hausrath.

(81) decampment, ^r ^«/^rtfc^«

(82) that you should have no reason, dasz ihr keine
Ursache naben soltt.

(83) open treasures, offentliche Schatze,

(84) which are secreted, welcht verb^rgeH sind.
(85} mansion, die Wohnungm

GEaifAH LAKGrACS. fiT9

^'■' fticm («6)/' Sic then directed them to a hidden
^iirin^ (87) in her husband's writing desk, which^
Qpdti the sKghtest pressure immediately flew open^
mad displayed sik immense pieces of bullioia (68).

^ Comet come 1" exclaimed the leader, •* I
•« • HiBW begin to find that you are really worthy
^ of being my mistress(89)/' — "Aye, and your wife
'^ too,''" replied the countess whilst she cmbraoed
kim^ ^y when I have made still (90) greater disco-
*• V€ri^« Yo« were informed^ lam aware (91)i
of my tyrant -^ :absence ; but did you not bear of
si^f: thousand ducats which be^ the day before
y^^day, received from his banker ?''— " No !
** whcift are they ?* *— -" Oh ! perfectly safe(92) and
^^ frt your di^iKwd; and you could never have found
^ limn or the iroo chest (93) which contains them,
^^ if I faad not aasisted you. Follow me ! we have
jCQBbpkted our labours hef'e, let us now com^
mence them under ground. Follow me, I say,
to Ae subterraneous caverns (94)**

•The

I ...

(86) for changing your opinion^ eure Mtinung zu

andern, / " •
^('iy) a hedden sp?il%, tine vtrhrgene Federm

(88) immense pieces of1mlIi6hy grosfse R'6lUnG$ld.

(89) of being my niistress,' fhnne Lielste tSu beyn.

(90) still, naek. "•

(91) I am aware, ick bin vtrsichert^ or gavisz,.
(9i) perifecrty safe, gant pickery

(93) the iron chest, der eistfne Xasten.
"(94) to die sutnerraoeons caveras*' sswm mterirdRsckgn
Gewolbe^

S80 ANALYSIS OP TSX

The murderers obeyed, but <K>t vHtb^ut pi^
caution (95)4 At the extremity of the descent (96)
^ey stationed a sentinel, whom the coufitcss totaiHy
disregarded (97). She continued to march on be«
fore them till they arrived at a closett in a secret
recess in the cavern. '« Here," said she, '* offering
the leader the keys, ^^ unlock the chest, and behold
*^ the reward of your good opinion of me t"

The leader tried the keys, but in vain i be
began to display visible marks of impatience and
mistrust (99). " Let me try," said the countess
with increased impatience, '' if I cannot manage
the business rather more expeditiously: the inorif-
ing will perhaps. . . . (100). Oh ! I now see
why our endeavours failed, pardon the mis-
take ; your visit, though it afforded me infinite
pleasure (101), yet I must confess rather pier-
plexed me (102). I have taken the wrong bunch

« of

(95) without precaution^ o/tne Vorsichu ,

(96) at the extremity of the descent, ^m Hinunier^
gange dis Gewolbes.

(97) to disregard, nicht acbten.

(98) tried the kcys^ preiierte, CfVirsuc/ite die SchlusseU
(99} mistrust, Afisztratten.
(100) the ipoming will perhaps^ der Mprgen konntt

urn gar v'ulleicht (six. uberraschen.)
( loi ) your visit, though it afforded me infinite pleasure,

obngeachtet euer BiSHch mir unendliches Fergnu-

gen vtrunachtim
(102} radicr perplexed me, vielmehr bssiurzu mkh.

€(
it
U
CC
€<
€C

GlRlfAK LANOUAOX. 2S1

^ of kefs ; be patient, and the mistake shall 'soon
« be rectified."

She fled up the staircase like lightnings and
before many moments had escaped^ they heard
her* returning fisitigued and breathless (103).
** Fouisd {104) ! found!" she cried with exultation,
and springing suddenly upon the sentinel ( 1 05),
she threw the poor imguarded wretch headlong
into the cavern. The trap-dopr (106) being once
secured, the escape of the deluded murderers was
efiectually prc^vented : with equal presence of
mind (107), she fled across the court-yard (108) of
the castle, and setting fire to the thatch of some ad*
joining pent-houses (109), she alarmed the neigh*
bourlng villagers : they hurried in crowds to the
castle, and were accosted at the entrance by the
countess. A very few of them was sufficient to
extinguish the flames (110) and prevent their far-^

ther

( 103) fetigucd and brpatbless, trmuiUt- und athtmUs* .

(104) found, gefundem.

(105) scotinel, die Sihildwache.

(106) the imp-doort di€ Failtb'ure^

(107) with equal presence of mind, mit gkicher Ge^
g^mvart des G^iiNSm -

(108) across the court-yard, uberdenHof.

(J09) and «etting fifp to the thatch of some adjoining
pent«bouses, iuu/ sitzie die Struhd&cber finigir
anp'dnzendfn yiihstiUh in. Ftuer.

(no) W(S sufficiefir to exiinguish ihe flames, vf^ren
hi^^Uhini (ife FUmme 2t« Kschin*

00

^12 ANAIrYS^S or 791

^r pofOgresSf The rest repsdred immediately to
the guard-chamber, where they fdund aiam in
abundance (III). They soon furnished f hemarives
ijirith implements of attackj affid besetting «very
avenue (112) to the castle, they seized and coii-
ducted to punishment these unfortunate mi)i?diesiBrs
to * ♦ * for humanity^ mercy and justice^i '

^H^

(ill) where they found arms in abundance, wt sU

Waffen im Ueherfiut% fandin.
(ria) tstiy ZMtVixxtf jeden SchlupfwlnkeK

* I have yet to observe, that from the whole of the preceding
atorfy I haveieen leveral mostbeantifal and valuable engf^viDgs,
executed- bjrohe of the most celebrated engravers, rqnreRnt-^
lag the couDten ui most of the related scenes. Thie two-Iatteri
where she returned, breathless^ from the upper apartment with
the bunch of keys in her left hand, and precipitated herself
dexterously upon the sentinel, who tumbles down the staircase
into the cavern ; and the other, where she runs over the castlc-
y&rd, and setting fire to the thatch of the pent- houses 5 all this,
together with the murderers, who are lastly brought out from
the cavern, and the deceived dead flientinel, who had his scoU
fractured and several of his Hmbs broken, excite a apeetacle^
which will for ever immortalize the artist.

The following interestii^ descrfptioh of a
contested' subject of natural ^history (which con-
cludes the Practice of tlie Sj^tax) is taken from
Gbtberry's Travels in Africa i a work highly in-

teresting

GSftMAM LAN€iJA%E« t^

teristing', and which has kt^lj been tfaifiiAittiA
by Mf. Mttd&rd. '* -^

TitE Cameleon. ■ '

T(ie^cameleon(>l), an animal so lopg cdar
brated (2),. and to which eloquence (3) and poetrjf
hiive attributed (4) the faculty of assummg:(5} th^
palpur pf every object which it approaches (6) ;
which they have so frequently employed to emf
bellish (7) th^ir metaphors^ and which they have
made the emblem of falsehood and imposture (8}>
yet remaii;^ unknowns and it is more than^pro^
t)able(9), thai: the natural history of this sipgur
Iar( 10) reptile^ hfts hitherto been e;^ploared only in »
feint, manner, v

The cameleon of nature 1$ tranquil^ mUd»
^nd peaceable ^ 1 1 }, the varieties (12) of colour,

Q Q ^ . which

(i) At cameleoD, das Kamaleon^
(a) celebrated, beriihrnt.

(3) eloquence, die Beredsamhiu

(4) to attribute, zuschniben^ or heilegen,

(5) ^^ assume, armekmen^

(6) to approach, nakern^ or nah kommerii

(7) to embellish, bereichern^ or versckonern^

(8) jmpq^ture, ckrBetru^.
(^i.) probable, v\;ahfscheif^ticA.
(10) singular, be^onderf^

fif) peaceable, /riVrfjtfwi, or /riedHebcnd^
(la) varieties, Mamntfakirktiiin^

§H ANALYSIS OP TH%

which diif animal undergoes (13), aie the oooier
quences of internal motions, with which he is a^
fectedy and the alternate (14) influence of heat and
coldy of lightandohscurity (15).

The cameleon-man disguises himself (16) be«
Aeath hiht colours (17), only to tyramnse orer, or to
t1n]8e:(l8) his fellow creatures ; while, on the con*
trary^ the lizard-cameleon, ishimself the 8ullerer(19),
fand his varieties of colour extend (20) no farther,
but begin and end with its own feelings.

Classed in the third genus (21) of lizards, die
cameleon is particularly a native of the torrid 2one,
and it is most common in the burning countries (22)
of Aftica ; though it may be seen in great quan*
titles ^23) in the western part of this continent
comprized (24) between Cape Blanco and Gape
Balnias ; it is astonishingly numerous (25) on the

banks

(l j) to ondergOy annehmen^ or untprworfm itjn.
(|4) alternate, wechseUwiise, ox wechseUeitige,

(15) obscurity 9 Finsternisz.

(16) \o i^s^isCy verkUidfn*

(17) beneath &lse cqloursy hinterfalschcFfirbfn*

(18) to abuse, miszbrauchen*

(19) thcsuBFcrer, der Uidende TheiL

(20) to extend, $ich erstfecken,

(21) the third genus of, die dritte Art vph,

(22) burning countries, hgiszeny or brenMndenGigenden,

(23) in great quantities, in groszer JnzahL

(24) to comprize, hegreifen^ einscAlieszenf or enthaltsn,

(25) astonishingly numerous, erstaukind haufi^.

CERMAK LAXroUAOE. Slf

banks of the Senegal (i26)» and it was at the Isle
St. Louis, during the winter of 1786 and 1781|
that (27) I collected a great quantity at once, on
which I made those observations (28) which will
fopn the subject of the following narrations.

One of the most extraordinary characterise
tics (29) of this animal is, that it appears to be com-
posed of a light ossified carcase covered with a
very subtile (30) and tenuous skin, which is as it
were entirely destitute of fl^sh (31) ; and when most
handsome in appearance, and apparently (32) most
^t and beautiful, it is in reality filled only with
lin aeriform substance (33), which it is capable of
imbibing and expelling at pleasure (34) ; hence it
may be cpnceived, that such animals cannot exist
but in the hottest climates, and that exteiuiva

warmj^

{9 6) on the tKinks of the Senegal, an den Ufirn des

(27) of 1786, andi7S;L, that I, imjahr eln tausend sieben

hundert sechs^ und sieben und achtzigy dasz icA»
{28) observations, Benurkungcn.

(29) most extraordinary characteristicsy miszerordenu
Hchsten Ei gens c haft en*

(30) subtile, sanft.

(31) destitute of flesh, des Fleischer beraubt.

(32) apparently, s'lchtbarlich ,

(33) aenform substance, lufiartlgen BestandtheiL

(34) which it js capable of imbibing and expelling at
pleasure, den es nach Gef alien fahig ist^ eniweder
einzusaucheuy oder von sich zu sUszen,

AXALT«I8 OP THS

wanotfi(SS} alone can agree with its singukr

The size, exterior form (36), &c. of this spe*
CMS of lizard, are sufficiently' known to render t
description of them here unnecessary (37) ; Ad
attention and researches of naturalists, dvould be
now confined to its other more obvious pecidiat
lities, and its more rare and dxigu^ pfopcr^
ties (as).

There are many phenomena to be foimd h|
ibe cs^meleon, which have not yet been sufficienb
]y(S9) explained or demonstrated (40) ; such as iti
variation of colour; its absorption and ex|>ulsioa
cf air at pleasure ; its power of living a consider*
able time without taking any kind of nonrisll^
ment|41') 3 and lastly, its possessing certain vidiiid
perfections (42) and advantages (43) which f believe
me found in no other work of creation.

Towards the end of the (44) year 1786, I
collected, at one time, many cameleons of all sizes

and

-»-*-

(35) extensive warmth, ausxtrordentlickt Hi$%f.

(36) exterior form, auszerliche Gestalt.

(37) unnecessary, unnothtg.

(38) properties, Eigenschaften.

(39) sufficiently, hinrelcheneU

(40) to demonstrate, erkldren. »

(41) nourishment, dteNahrung,

(42) perfection, die FoHkommenheiu

(43) advantage, derVorthetL

(44) towards &e end of the, gegtn das Ende dfs.

arml ageS) and I amused myself with observing
Ihem with consideratble attention (45) ; my fifsC
object wa» directed towards the variations of co^
lour which are obsei^able in this lizard^ and oir
the nature and allemalion of these varieties (46).

I was very soon convinced that the camelcoft
does not assume (47) its colour from the iiircum*
ambient {M) objects/ or from those with which it
may be covered, but that the alterations which
Ub natural colour undergoes (49) originates entirely
iji' the painful sensations which this animal in**'
temally experiences, and of which it is singif-?
lariy susceptible (50).

Its natural colour is a fine emerald green.
Such have I always seen it (51), when In a state
of liberty, perched, like a parrot, on the branciV
of some young tree, ornamented (52) with gay foli-
age^ in the midst of which it is- with much dif-
ficulty perceived (53); or when it lazily basks in,
or creeps along the fresh grass.

xTL

(45) attention, die Aufmerksamk^lt.

(46) varieties, Verschledenheiten*

(47) to assume, annehmen.

(48) circumambient, umgebenden.

(49) to yndergo, unterworfen styn\
(50} ta bo su!lce[}|!ible, empfindlick stjn.

(51) such have I always seen' it, s^hqbe Ichesimmer
gesehen,

(52) ornamented, geziert.
(53> to-perceive, ^^oArnehmen.

Mi JJVALTStS Of TRB

. At this tiine> it is not only always of that
ine emerald green colour, but it is also ia its
most healthful (54) and corpulent state. Hence> It
appears to me> that to preserve these tw6 c{ua*
lities (55), a state of liberty > and the power of living
in the grass^ or in the midst of fresh foliage, arc
indispensable (56).

From the moment that the liberty and sev
curityofthis reptile was either constrained or ih-^
temiptedy I could perceive very palpable altera*
tions in the brightness and vivacity of its colour,
and the rotundity (57) of its form.

It may be confidently asserted^ that the ca-
meleon is an animal very timid and fearful, and
at the same time, equally slow and indolent (5&).
Its very subsistence and health, is doubtless Owing
to its colour ; for from this circumstance, it is con-
founded with the grass or leaves in the midst of
which it delights to exist (59). It remains im^
moveable when on the branch of a tree or in the
herbage, and rolls out its glutinous tongue (60),
which resembles an earth-worm, and possesses most

pro-

(54) healtliful, gesundheltsvoll.

(55) ^wo qualiries, %w€i Eigenschafien.

(56) are indispen&ablc, sind unumgdnglich nothwindig.

(57) rotundity, die Dickt.

(58) indolent, trdge*

(59) to exist %u leben.

(60) glutinous (ongue, gefrdsmgi^ or Inhrhtfti Zunge-

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 28Sf

probably some peculiar smell, which attracts the
little insects who form its nourishment ; when the
tongue is thus covered with a sufficient quantity,
it immediately draws it in with an amazing ra-
pidity (61).

This economy is incessantly repeated (62),
and always with success ; for the insects, deceived
by the colour and immobility of the cameleon,
approach without suspicion (63), and are taken in
the snare.

The fine green of the skin of this lizard, in
its healthful state, so completely confounds it with
the tree or the grass in which it is hidden (64),
that it is impossible to discover it, except by
chance (65) 5 this brillant colour also proves its se-
curity against those animals who .would injure it,
but are unable to see or distinguish it ; in fact, it
requires a well organized sight to make this dis-
qovery.

This reptile, therefore, well knows that it is
only when thus confounded that it is able to pro-
cure its food (66)j and escape its enemies ; and

when,

(61) with an amazing rapidity, mit einer erstaunendeit
Geschwindigkeit,

(62) to repeat, wiederholen,

(63) without suspicion, ohne Verdachi.

(64) it is hidden, es verhorgen ht,

(65) by chance, von ohngefdhr.

(66) to procure its food, sick seine Nahrung zuver^

. schaffen.

V n

290 AVALY&IS OP THl

when, therefore^ it is deprived of its Ubierty, md
destitute (67) of these advantages, it becomes fiitt
of apprehension, of fear, and of terr(» i its life is
one continued torment .;[6S), and it sMtains all.tho
anguish of dread : its health visibly declines ^,69),
and the freshness of its natural colour rapidly de-
cays. Thus, w^henever I took a cameleon out of
the grass, or from a branch whereon f 70) itr
was perched, I perceived, in a very short time, not
only an obvious alteration in its colour^ wbicll
began to fade (71), but also a diminution in the
rotundity (7*1) of its body.

If I placed the animal on the arid sand^ or otd
the floorj or in a cage, it immediately became <rf
a yellow tinge, and. insensibly expelled (73) tht
air with which it was ipflated ^74) : it heace 4^-
creased in size, and the smallness of its body be-
came obvious even to the naked eye (75),

If I afterwards replaced it in the grass, or
on the branch of a tree, the fint green colour in

a shoft

•wr-

tall I «l ' ■ < « < i I ^>A^*N

(67) destitute, beraubt.

(68) torment, die Plage.

(69) visibly declines, ^'^rr^//^/, ox verschwindet sichtbsu

(70) whereon, auf iK'elchem,

(71) to fade, schwindcrjy abnehmen^

(72) '-otundity, die Dicke.

(73 ) ^^ expel, ausstoszen, or answer fen.

(74) inflated, angefiilli^ aufgeblaszen.

(75) to the naked eye, dem bloicn Ang^n^

GERMAN language: 291

a shord time returned/ and its body expanded (76)
and assumed its wonted rotundity.

Whenever I kept my cameieons confined in
a cage, and there plagued and tormented them,
I always easily succeeded (77), in exciting a de-
gree of irritation and anger, which they mani-
fested by expiring the air so strong, as to be heard ;
they likewise became thin, and their colour gra-
dually (78) became dull. If I continued to dis-
quiet [19) them, the dull green changed to a yel-;
low tinge -, then to yellow, spotted (80) with red ;
next a yellow brown, spotted with red-brown ;
then a grey-brown, ' spotted with black ; and lastly
from shade to shade, they at length became almost
black, and more and more thin. These are the
Only colours in which I could succeed (8i) in mak-
ing them assume (82).

After having thustormented(83) andkept them
prisoners during a number of days, I set them free.
I carried them to a tree, or into the grass, and
however black and me^igre they were, they quickly

p p 2 as-

(76) expanded, dehnte sick aus*

(77) to succeed, gelingen.

(78) gradually, siufenweist.

(79) to disquiet, beunruhigerim

(80) spotted, flecktu

(81) to succeed, gelingen,

(82) to assume, annehmen*

(83) to torment, plagen.

292 ANALYSIS OF TH£

assumed their green colour^ and their usual state
c( solidity (84).

Reiterated experiments (85) have therefore
convinced me, that the cameleons in a perfect state
of liberty are always fat, and of a green hue ; and
that in a state of captivity, not only their, colour be-
comes changed, but their health also experiences an
alteration v<^6). I have often wrapped them up (87)
in various coloured stuffs, and left them for whole
days together ; after I visited them, I found them
always of that yellow-green, that tarnished yellow;
or that green-black, which they forever assume (88),
when in distress and suffering.

The skin of the cameleon is extremely fine
and delicate, and very soft and cold to the touch.
When examined with a strong lens, on the living
animal, it appeared like that kind of prepared (89)
skin, which is called shagreen.

This epidemais is not shiny (90), but is sin-
gularly fine and elastic. ITie small points or pro-
tuberances of this shagreen skin are, as it were^ im-^
perceptible, and hardly distinguishable by the

naked

(84) solidity, die Einsamkeit,

(85) reiterated experiments, wiederhohltc Versuche,

(86) an alteration, elne Aenderung.

(87) ofien wrapped them up, ofters sle elng(vjick(lu

(88) to assume, annehmen.

(89) /prepared, birciten^ or zuhereiten,

(9u) sniny, gidnzendm

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 289

probably some peculiar smell, which attracts the
little insects who form its nourishment: when the
tongue is thus covered with a sufficient quantity,
it immediately draws it in with an amazing ra-
pidity (61).

This economy is incessantly repeated (62),
and always with success ; for the insects, deceived
by the colour and immobility of the cameleon,
approach without suspicion (63), and are taken in
the snare.

Th^ fine green of the skin of this lizard, in
its healthful state, so completely confounds it with
the tree or the grass in which it is hidden (64),
that it is impossible to discover it, except by
chance {65) 5 this brillant colour also proves its se-
curity against those animals who .would injure it,
but are unable to see or distinguish it ; in fact, it
requires a well organized sight to make this dis-
covery.

This reptile, therefore, well knows that it is
only when thus confounded that it is able to pro-
cure its food (66)^ and escape its enemies ; and

when,

(61) with an amazing rapidity, mit einer erstaunenden
Gescbwindigkeit,

(62) to repeat, wiederhoUn.

(63) without suspicion, ohrie Vtrdachi^

(64) it is hidden, es verhorgen ht,

(65) by chance, von ohngefdhr,

(66) to procure its food, sich seine Nahrung zuver*
. schaffen*

pp

292 ANALYSIS OF THE

assumed their green colour, and their usual state
df solidity (84).

Reiterated experiments (85) have therefore
convinced me, that the cameleons in a perfect state
of liberty are always fat, and of a green hue ; and
that in a state of captivity, not only their, colour be-
comes changed, but their health also experiences an
alteration (86). I have often wrapped them up (87)
in various coloured stuffs, and left them for whole
days together ; after I visited them, I found them
always of that yellow-green, that tarnished yellow;
or that green-black, which they forever assume (88),
when in distress and suffering.

The skin of the cameleon is extremely fine
and delicate, and very soft and cold to the touch.
When examined wi4:h a strong lens, on the living
animal, it appeared like that kind of prepared (89)
skin, which is called shagreen.

This epidemais is not shiny (90), but is sin-
gularly fine and elastic The small points or pro-
tuberances of this shagreen skin are, as it were^ im-^
perceptible, and hardly distinguishable by the

naked

(84) solidity, die Einsamkeit,

(85) reiterated experiments, wiederhohltc Versuche.

(86) an alteration, eine Aenderung,

(87) often wrapped them up, ofters sie eingcwickdu

(88) to assume, annehmen,

(89) /prepared, bireiten^ or zubereiun*
(90) sniny, gldnzend.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 29S

naked eye (91). Though ^t is excessively deli-
cate^ £1163 andpliable^ it has notwithstanding (92)
a considerable degree of tenacity, and is likewise
gifted with a strong clastic property, as well as'
with the power ofexpanding and contracting itself
at pleasure.

It is doubtless (9S) to this contexture, to this
kind of tissue, which theskin of the cameleon has,
that we must attribute (94) its facility in varying
its colour, according to the degree of dilatation, or
contraction which it may experience : in fact, we
may safely ascribe (95) to this, those sudden alter-
nations of colour which so much astonish us.

The cameleon possesses a still more astonishing
faculty (96) than this, of varying its colour, viz.
that of expanding and contracting itself at plea*
sure (97).

What therefore is its peculiar organization,
whence it derives the power, not only of inhal-
ing (98) a considerable quantity of the atmosphe-
ric air, but likewise of keeping, absorbing, and di-
recting

(91) by the naked eye, mit Hoszim Auge.

(92) notwithstanding, nichtsdestowenigor,

(93) it is doubtless, es ist nicht zu hczweifeln.

(94) attribute, zueignen.

(95) ascribe, xuschreiben. . .

(96) astonishing faculty, erstaunende Eigenschaft.

(97) ofexpanding and contracting itself at pleasure, slch
nach Gef alien auszudehnen und zusammmzus^uien^

(98) of iphaling, einzuathmerip

292 ANALYSIS OF THE

assumed their green colour, and their usual state
cff solidity (84).

Reiterated experiments (85) have therefore
convinced me, that the cameleons in a perfect state
of liberty are always fat, and of a green hue ; and
that in a state of captivity, not only their, colour be-
comes changed, but their health also experiences an
alteration \^'66). I have often wrapped them up (87)
in various coloured stuffs, and left them for whole
days together ; after I visited them, I found them
always of that yellow-green, that tarnished yellow;
or that green-black, which they forever assume (88),
when in distress and suffering.

The skin of the cameleon is extremely fine
and delicate, and very soft and cold to the touch.
When examined wi4:h a strong lens, on the living
animal, it appeared like that kind of prepared (89)
skin, which is called shagreen.

This epidemais is not shiny (90), but is sin-
gularly fine and elastic The small points or pro-
tuberances of this shagreen skin are, as it were^ im-^
perceptible, and hardly distinguishable by the

naked

(84) solidity, die Einsamkeit,

(85) reiterated experiments, wiederhohhe Versuche.

(86) an alteration, eine Aenderung.

(87) often wrapped them up, after s sie elngcvjichlu

(88) to assume, annehmen.

(89) /prepared, kreiten^ or zuhereiten^
(9u) sniny, gldnzend.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 292

naked eye (91). Though ^t is excessively deli-
cate, fine, and pliable, it has notwithstanding (92)
a considerable degree of tenacity, and is likewise
gifted with a strong clastic property, as well as'
with the power of expanding and contracting itself
at pleasure.

It is doubtless (9S) to this contexture, to this
kind of tissue, which the skin of the cameleon has,
that we must attribute (94) its facility in varying
its colour, according to the degree of dilatation or
contraction which it may experience : in fact, we
may safely ascribe (95) to this, those sudden alter-
nations of colour which so much astonish us.

The cameleon possesses a still more astonishing
faculty (96) than this, of varying its colour, viz.
that of expanding and contracting itself at plea-
sure (97).

What therefore is its peculiar organization,
whence it derives the power, not only of inhal-
ing (98) a considerable quantity of the atmosphe-
ric air, but likewise of keeping, absorbing, and di-
recting

F I I » ■ I I . ■ ■ . . I ..i-i I ■■ II I I I I -n^j^i—

(91) by the naked eye, mit Hoszim Auge.

(92) notwithstanding, nichtsdestowenigor.

(93) it is doubtless, es ist nlcht zu bczweifeln.

(94) attribute, zueignen,

{95) ascribe, xuschre'iber^. . .

(96) astonishing faculty, erstaunende Eigenschaft.

(97) of expanding and contracting itself at pleasure, sich
nach Gef alien auszudehnen und ZU5ammnizu:^iehen^

(98) of iphaling, einzuathmenp

294 AWALTSIS 09 T««

recting it ; for the air, inspired by the cameiMM}
does not remain in its breast, in its stomach, or in its
intestines (99y ; it spreads and perforates througk
crery part of its body, ^nd this so completely and
so generally, that it is every where fat aiid plump:
at the very extremities of its feet and tail (IQO);
and even its eyes are affected, for they become more
round and projected. (.101).

It must therefore be admitte^(l02), that tJie air
thus inhaled by the camelcon, penetrates, enters,
and insinuates itself into every, even the minutest^
part (lOS) of the body.

It must not be supposed that the camelcon,
when thus^ in a state of embonpoint (^104?)^ looks
merely like a bladder blown up with air. It has
all the appearances of a well distributed and natural
plumpness, and in every part of its body it is equal
and regular.

In its utmost state of contraction (105), and
when it has almost entirely voided the atmospheric

air.

(99) intestines, die Eingtweid^.

(100) of its feet an<i tail, seiner Fiisze und Schwanzes,

(lOi) more round and projected, runder und Aerverstth
szender,

(102) to admit, zulassen,-

(103) even the minutest part, segaY in dem kleinsUn
Theit. '

(104) cmtionpoint, duFette*

(105) contraction, die Zusammenxiehung,

GEKMAN LANGUAGE, 395

air, retaining only a quantity sufficient (106) for
the preservation of its vital faculties, the extreme
tsnuity of its body is truly astonishing. The ex-
traordinary appearance which it j.resents is greatly
augmented ( 107) when the animal moves, and par-
ticularly when it convolves ; for it then looks like
an empty saek twisted up 108).

This faculty of expanding itself, so ns to ap-
pear absolutely full and adipose ; of remaining in
tbia state fot whole months, or only for a few hours,
as it pleases (1Q9), and then contracting itself, so
as to present a mere fleshless body ( 1 10) ; with
the ^i»e of its back pointed, and the flesh of
its sides actually united, and apparently but of
one piece, is doubtless (111) one of the tnost
extraordinary circumstances which is to be found
in the natural history of the cameleon ; and the
cause of which, though but Ihtle known (112),
seeni^ worthy of the utmost, attention and research
which naturalists can bestow. •

In

^fcji*^ K >«

(io6) sufficient, hinrelchend,

(107) -is greatly augmented, ist groszeniheih vermehrt.

(108) an empty sack twisted iJp, ein leerer %usammen-
gehundencr Sack.

(109) as it pleases, nach Gefallen^ ortvii es ihmgefallt.
(no) a mere fleshless body, eimn bloszen Jleischlosen

Korper.
(in) doubtless, zwelfehohne^ ox ehne Zweifel.
[Ill) little known, wenig bekannt.

296

AKALYSIS OF THE

In the year 1786, being then at Isle (113) St,
Louis, I made the following experiments : I was
at that time in possession of seven, which were aD
in full strength. I confined five of therh sepa-
rately (114) in a cage of iron wire, covered all over
with fine gauze, the texture of which was too
compact (115) to admit any insect to enter.

On the first(l 16) of November, 1786, 1 began
ray experiment j and visited four times (1 17), in the
space of four and twenty hours, my unhappy cap-
tives (118) doomed to perish by famine (1 19). In
a few days they became thin, and assumed that
grey-black colour which is the certain indication
of their distress. But when they had attained a
greater degree of exility, they remained iti a fixed
state during a month ; so that I was unable to
perceive any sensible diminution ( 1 20) in their
strength during that time ; except, when I ob-
served them, they opened their mouths, and expired
the air very strongly against me. These expirations
were easily felt, and became even audible (121).

During

13)
14)

15)
1 6)

17)
i8)

19)

20)

(121)

at the isle, aufder Insel.

separately, besonders,

compact, dicht.

on the first, den ersten.

four times, vicrmaL

unhappy captives, ungliukUche Gefangenen,

to perish by famine, Hungers %u sterben,

any sensible diminution, elnige slchtbare f^^rrin-
gerung,

even audible, sogar korbar*

G£RMAN LANGUAGE. 297

During the first six weeks, they used to run
all over the cage, but after two months they
never quitted the bottom of their cage. , Their te-
nuity had now become excessive ; their weak-
ness (122) and languor was very obvious ; their skin
was almost black (123); and I also observed a great
slowness in the motion of their eyes. They still
preserved the faculty of expanding (124) themselves,
though at the most not more than half as much as
usual They all died by degrees, by the 23d of Fe-
bruary, 1787, except one, which was still alive the
24th, but so weakand emaciated(125), thati thought
the period of its existence was also at hand (126).
I liberated it the same day, and carried it to the go-
vernment garden, where I placed it among the
foliage 'y in fifteen days it regained its colour and
strength, and, during the month of April, it ap-
peared to me to be in total possession (127) of its
health and strength. At the ^ end of this month
it eiscaped, and all my endeavous to recover it (128)
were totally ineffectual.

The

(122) their weakness, ihre Schwdche.

(123) their skin was almost black, i/ire Haut war bei-
nahe schwarz*

(124) the faculty of expanding, das Fermogen sick aus*
%udehnen*

(125) weak and emaciated, schwach und ausgemergelt.

(126) was also at hand, war auch nahe,

(127) in total possession, imvolligem Besitz,
(ia8) to recover it, um es wteder zuerhahen.

Q q

298 ANALYSIS OP THE /

The two remaining ones (129), I confined m
the same cage, without any nourishment what-
ever (130).

As soon as they were inclosed together, Aey
placed themselves opposite to each other wiA
mutual looks (131) of steadiness ; their moiflihs
Open^ and expelling their breath with gr^at energy.
They remained in this situation for a considerable
time ; though it was easy to discover, from their
looks, that they were very much enraged, and that
they occasioned mutual fear and apprehension.

One entire day passed i-n this attitude (1312}
of reciprocal menace, and it was only towards the
evening that one of them slowlyclimbed(13S) to' the
top of the cage ; the other remained at the bottom;
but though thus separated, they constantly kept
their eyes fixed (134) on each other ; their moirths
remained open, and they expelled their breath T;Hth
great rapidity.

On the following morning, I found them in
the same attitude and place as on the preceding
evening (135); but there had been a battle be-
tween

^m^i'mmmmmm^mmm ■ ■ p i ■■ u m i i i i ■ n ^ ■ ■ i i

(129) the two remaining ones, die zwsiubrig gebliebenen*

(130) without any nourishment whatever, ohne einige
Nahrung^

(131) with mutual looks, mit wechseheitigen B lichen.

(132) passed in this attitude, verflesz iji d'leser itellung.

(133) climbed, kletterte.

(134) fixed, geheftet.

{13s) *s on the preceding evening, ah am vorigen
Abend,

GERMAN LANGUAGE* 299

tween them during the night, the effects of which
were easy to be perceived ; for, I saw on their
skins various wounds, and the vestiges of bi-
ting (136).

The whole day passed in a sort of immobi-
lity (137) between them; however they constant-
ly looked at each other, and reciprocally expel-
led their breath with great force,

Puring the subsequent night, I watched them,
and by applying my taper (138), I saw my two ca-
meleons grappled together, with their talons, and
biting each other's sides with great vengeance,

I did not separate the combatants, but the
appearence of the light, no doubt, excited greater
fear (139) in them than they had before experi-
enced anger : they mutually ceased the attack ; and
the strongest, who had commenced the combat with
the other at the top of the cage, now descended to
the bottom. His antagonist had been sadly treated ;
his body was covered with wounds ; his flesh was
almost torn off, and he appeared in a state of
extreme lassitude (140),

Q q 2 This

(136) and the vestiges of biting, und die MerkmaU von
Bis^en.

(137) in a sort of immobility, in einer Art von Unie*
weglichkeit.

(138) my taper, mein Nachtlicht.

(139) excited greater fear, erregte groszerc Furcht.

(140) lassitude, dicErmudungx

■\

300 ANALYSIS OF THE

This warfare (141) was continued for nine
successive days, at the end of which time, the one
which had regularly been vanquished, at length
fell, and I found him dead in the bottom of the
cage. The conqueror had now taken refuge in the
top of the cage. He lived seventeen days longer,
without eating, and perished from inanition and
extreme leanness, though perhaps the wounds
which he received considerably hastened his
end (142).

The eye-ball of the cameleon not only projects
much farther, from the head than that of any other
animal, but its extensive surface appears to be
conically formed, and terminates in a point. Its
eyes are covered with a membrane, which serves
it instead of an eye-lid (143).
, This men^brane is like a case perforated by
a longitudinal hole of about half a line (144) in
breadth in its widest part j it is by means of this
orifice that the animal is enabled to see (145), and
exposes to view a brown coloured pupil, bor-
dered by *a small circle of gold, extremely bright
and shining. This case is gifted with the faculty
of following all the motions of the eye, in which

respect

*i lAii

(141) this warfare, dieser Krieg.

(142) hastened its end, beschleunigte sein Ende.

(143) which serves it instead of an eye-lid, das ibman*
statt eines Augenliedes dienet.

(144) of about half a line, obngefdhx eimhalbe l*inie»

(145) is enabled to see, ist fdhig zu sehen.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 301

respect it differs totally from the eye-lids of any other
animal (146). But what is still more singular, and
which I believe is to be found in no other animal
of the creation (147), is the faculty which the ca- ^
meleon possesses of moving its eyes in every pos-
sible direction ; and this motion is conducted to-
tally independent of each other (148).

The cameleon moves one of its eves, while the
other remains motionless ; with one eye he looks
before him, while with the other he will look
behind : the one ii sometimes directed tpwards'
the heavens, and the other is bent towards- tHe
earth. /

These opposfte motions (149) are performed
cither, at once, 6r alternately, with astonishing
rapidity. They are carried to such a degree, that
at one time the pupil passes even under the pro-
jection which serves for the eye-brow, and then
suddenly buries itself in the corner of the orbit,
by which means the animal readily and at once
discovers the objects which are placed behind him,
and those immediately in his front, without moving

his

(146) totally from the eyelids of any other animal, gan%*
Itch von den Augenliedern aller anderer Thiere,

(147) of the creation, in der Schopfung.

(148; independent of each other, unabh'dngig^ eins vom

andern.

( 149) these opposite motioas> diese gegenseitige Bewe^
gungcn.

302 ANALYSIS op THJL,

his head ( 1 50) in the least degree, which is strongly
con^ned to his shoulders.

These rapid evolutions enable him to see at
once in every direction, and incessantly to observe
whatever passes around him.

The object of this perfect conformation is
doubtless the personal security (151) of the came-
kon, and the success of his pursuit of small in-
sects and flies, with which he is nourished .; he pro-
jects his glutinous tongue, and leaves it pendant-
on the side, where he perceives the prey which he
wishes to entrap.

I have now said sufficient to prove (152), that
the cameleon is in many respects a very extra-
ordinary and curious animal, and that it possesses
many peculiarities which are well deserving the
attention of naturalists*

(150) without jnoviDg his head, oAne seinen Kopf xu

hewegen. %

(151} the personal security, die persohnliche SichirhiU^
(152) sufficient to prove, genug zubiwasm.

OF

dERMAN LANGUAGE. 303

OF GERMAN IDIOMSJ

All languages have peculiarities, which can*
not be comprized under any distinct part of speech
whatsoever, because they deviate from every com-
mon rule ; these are called idioms.

It is not, however, my intention on the pre-
sent occasion to give a voluminous account of them;
but shall content myself with pointing out the
principal ones, generally used in common life, by
way of illustration : ' but for the reader*s further
perusal of the same subject, I would recommend
to him a work of great utility, viz. Deutsche Re-
densarterti Kc. German idioms, &c. Leipzig, 1800-

Von Sinnen kommen.
£& hat keine Noth.

To lose one^s senses.
There is nothing to-fear.

£s ist keln gutes Haar an I He is a good-for*»otbing

ihm« 1 fellow.

Man

* It will be absolutely impossible to give ^hat may be
termed an apt translation of each of the preceding idtomatic
modes of speech; hence the reader must excuse the necessitj
which exists ot adhermg to a parapbrastical method, and
more particulai:1y as many of them would be altogether un«
mtelligible and even offensive to an English ear. Yet, as
they occur very frequently in common life, and espectalljr ia
dramatic pieces, it will be highly beneficial to be possessed of
the above selecftion.

S04

ANALYSIS OF THE

Man kann ihm nichts an-
habcn.

»

Das ist abgedroschen
Stroh.

Einem das Leben abspre-
chen.

Aufbeiden Achselntragen.

Einen iiber die Achseln
ansehen.

Dakommt er angestochen.

Einem einen Schandfleck
anhangen.

Uebel bei einem ange-
schrieben seyn.

In einen sauren Apfel bei-
szen*

Einen mit ungebrannter
Ascbe abreiben.

Einem eins autbinden.
Den Kopf aufsetzen.

Grosze Augen machen,
Einen zu Paaren treiben.

Zum Kreutze kriechen.
Hart darnieder liegen.

Es geht allies drimter und
druber. .

Einem den Daumen auf
das Augehalten.

Einen aus dem Wege rau-
tnen.

Mit

Th t \s a keen man ; one
cannot over-reach him.

These are trite stories.
To condemn one.

To flatter two parties.

To take no notice of a
person.

There he comes strolling.

To slander or calumniate
one's reputation.

To be badly recommended
by a person.

To perform something
against one's inclination.

To rub him down with aD
oaken towel.

To deal in poetical prose.

To be headstrong, or ob*
stinate.

How he will stare ! (when
he sees him.)

To compel him to perform
his duty.

To cringe.

To be dangerously ill.
'Tis all at sixes and sev^.

To keep a strict eye upon
one.
To get rid of a person by

breaking a vein.

To

GEftMAH LAK6I7AGE.

503

Mit Jemanden unter der
Decke stecken.

£r ist mir ein Dorn im
Auge.

£r hat Einfalle t^ic cm
alt Haus.

Ein Madchen zu Falle
bringen.

Eineni den Brodkorbho-'
her hangen.

Sich bucklich lachen«

Einem den Beutel fegen.

Sieistem altesFell.

Einem das Fell uber die
Ohren ziehen.

Das sind faule Fiscbc.
Sie ist schon flicke.

Da steht Galgen und Rad
drauf.

Geli an Galgen.

Er laszt fiinfegerade seyn.

Jedes Wort auf die Gold-
wage legen.
Ins Grab beiszen.

Ooldene Berge verspre-

chen«
Jemanden auf dem Halse

liegen.

UcberHals und Kopf.
. « Er

To have an understandbg
with another.

He is an eye-sore.

He has crazy ideis.

To seduce a maid — to get
her with child.

To retrench the subsistence
of any person.

To laugh imilhoderately.

To cheat a person out of
his money^

She is an old virago.

To flay one alive, by pay-
ing more than we ought to
do.

That's a frivolous excuse.

She is aheady marriage^
able.

That is the wav to the
gallows.

Go and be hanged.

He accommodates himself
to every thing.
To mind ones p*s and q't«

To be a grave man.

To promise golden moun-
tains.

To be incumbent upon
somebody.

Over head and heelau

R r He

Das kann man mit£[atid^n
gFcifen.

Das hac H'ande uadFil^.

Hans in alien Gasscn.

Da liegt der Haase im
PfefFer.

Ueber die Schnur hauen.

Man wesiz nicht ob es ge-
hauen oder gestochen isf.
Er ist. eine ehrliche Haut.

Einen durch die Hechel
Ziehen.

Kl^ren Wein cinschenkep.

Einen aufziehen.

Wo will das endljch hin-
aus ?

Das ist mir zu hoch.

Die Prau hat die Hosen ai^.

Die Katze im Sacke kau-
fen.

ft

Kind und Kegel.

Mintereine Sacbekommen.

Ins Gj^sc^hret] I(9mipen.

VpiT^ I^9pf bis auf die
Fiissc.

Ein lustigje^r I^.opf.

Jemand vor den K9pf
stoszen*

He U tbc og^ q( the Ul-
lage.

That is q^i iJipiLr ^s dpy
light.

That IS ^ chef d'oeuvrp.

Jack every where.
That is the main point.

To exceed the boundaries*

One knows not what to
make (or think of it).
He is a good fellow.

To slander a person.

To tell the truth.
To mock a person.

Wha,t wHl at length be-
come of it ?

That's beyond my under-
standing.

The grey mare is the bet-
ter horse.

To buy a pig in a poke«

All the family.

To discover a thing.

To get ^ bad na;p^. :

Fro^n^he^d to foot^ 9rfi^
top to die bottom.
A g^y feljo^y.

To give offence to 9P^
one.

Ef ist Ati kb^fhan^cr.
Eifikdk dM It6rb geben.

* Et SfAt fl6H im Lichtc.
Sich aus dem Staube ma-

Einen miirbe machen.

He a i U^bU

AfefaSal of radnagc, (from*
a lady)

He stancis in his o^^light.

To take to flight.

Ei(ttm iidh Nas6 drSien.

Pkck^t tuA fort.

Er hat das Pulver nicht
eniindtn.

Einetn das , Wasser nicht
reichen.

Etwas aus dem Sinne
schlagen*

Nichts gutes im Schilde
fiihreiu

Sich um nichts scheren.

Einem zu schaflFen ma-
chcn.

Sich nichts sagen oder ein-
reden lassen.

Etwas mlt dem Riicken
anseben miissent

Die' Sache gehet nicht
fichtig zu.

Nicht auf seiner Redebe-
stehen. >

Etwas rechts lernen.

Wenn mir recht ist

In

To mortify, or humiliate
one.

To play a trick to some
person.

Begone.

He will never set the
Thames on fire.

There's* flo compatison
between them.

,To think no more of a
thing.

To haVe bad designs.

To care for nothing.

To give a person much
trouble. ,

Not to lisCen to good ad-
vice.

To be compelled to aban-
don a thing.

There is some deception
in this business.

To vary in one's speech.

To apply rigorously to any
thing.
If I am not mistaken.
Kxz To

SOS

ANALYSIS OF THB

In alle Sattel gerecht seyn.
Sich durchs Land fechten.

In jemandes Brode stehen*

Ehestandy Webestand.

Sich friihe aufmachen.

Sicb mit etvr^fi breit ma-
chen.

Sich auf etwas viel ein-p
bilden.

Einem in den Ohren lie-
gen.

£inem]den Rang ablaufen.

Dienstlos seyn.

Icb mocbte nicht in seiner
Haut sleeken.

£r wird nicht anders,

Sich in ein Amt dringen.

£r ist ein Geitzhals..

Diese Frau hat Haare auf
der Zunge.

Das ist die rechte Hohe.

Kinder und Narren sagen
oft die Wahrheit.

Nach dem Takte der
Trommel tanzen.

{)ndc gut, alUs gut.

To be fit for.cvcry thing.

To go a begging thruugh
the country.

To be in some one's ser-
vice.

Marriage has its pleasures
and its pain.

To rise early«

To boast of somediing*

To be very proud of any
thing.

To be always plaguing a
person.

To be beforehand with
another.

To be without employ-
ment, or out of service.

I wish' not to be in his place
or situation.

He will never improve.

To intrude oneself into an
employment.
He is a micer.

This woman does qot want
for tongue.

That's the main point.

Children and fools ofcea
speak the truth.

To run the gauntlet.

All's well diat ends well.

GSRMAK LAITOUAGE. S09

9S5S5

Al

PART II.

OF GERMAN ORTHOGRAPHY,

OR,

THE METHOD OF WRITING WITH CORRECTNESS^

GENERAL PRINCIPLES.

The foundation of German orthography is this ;
Write as you speak, according to the best pro-
nunciation y — pay due regard to the deriva-
tion ; — the general custom ; and to analogy,
** when the former are insufficient.

It is incredible how many laughable misconr
••ructions and ambiguities are introduced in Ger-
man orthography. No language existing is sub-
ject to so many variations as this. Every author
follows his own caprice, and thinks he is at liberty
to form a system for himself. But though this
freedom is of little consequence to the native lite-
rati ; yet, at the same time, such a variation in
the true spelling proves a great discouragement to
foreign students.

The greater part of these errors might be ef-
fectually prevented by the institution of a national

aca-

310 ANALYSIS OF tn

academy, which should pronounce all composU
lions incorrect and uncbusieali thst AM fRit §trit^
adhere to the orthography established by the pro-
fessors, appointed to inspect the various publica-
tions. During the twelve years I have been employed
an teaching my native larigiiage Iri this coilntry, I
have found it impossible to carry into effect any
system equal to that which I have recommended ;
well kowing what numerous difficulties would te
the consequence, should I attempt to establish a
standard. For that reason, the best method I
could adopt was to make a point of gradually ac-
quainting my schahrs with the vatiaftons of the
German orthography. The length of my expe-
rferice, as tutor, hds eti^hted me to lay teffore the
sittfdefnf such rales', as wifl mtike him caf)a:!)1e, not
dtfly of feadfttg and v;rr(ing, but afeo of dtstWer-
ithg eia'sily the deviations in spelling, of any G^ffrian
publication that may fall info his hands, for that
purpose it will be highly advantageous tahirti, be-
fore- he proi^eeds ftfrthct; to ma:ke himself thorough*
jtcquaifited with the subsequent principles, which
I fi^e laid down as a general standard for" G$N
man- orthogftiphy*.

I. Ok-

. V . .. 1 «T -t.^.

* I haJW G!^\y X6 obsor^t, thiat iri rAy \s\iw of thb prdMft
work, I have .purposely avoided pureaing anj^ papticalflt sys^
tem of ortllography j and even when I have deviated froA
those rules^ which I have laid down as a general standard,
I liave acted for tlie benefit of the Vtadent, in order that
tath, variatibnS' rtlghf bctonAe moro perceptible; ^hicTi ifK)uM
Ql^^ieJ^ise considerably embarrass him.

GERMAN LAKOUA6E. 311

Rule I. Every foreign name and worcj, if
once adopted or naturalised in German, and uni-
versally intelligible, ought to be written with Ger- .
man characters, ex. gr. Antiquitateny antiquities j
marschieren, to march, &q.

Rule. IL Foreign names ^nd word§ of mo-
dern languages, if not naturalized, ought to^ bQ
written according to their own language ; as.
Journal^ journal ; CavallieVy chevalier ; Cato, Cato ;
Cicero, Cicero, &c. Those of dead languages are
written according to their own nature.

Ji^ule III. Words borrowed from a foreign
language, if pronounced and declined after the
German manner, must be written according to
the German pronunciation established by custom ;
as, PailastypdiisLis; JE'ngelyZngel; Zepter^ sceptre;
Pifbely people ; Zettcly a note ; Oehl, oil, &c, and
not Palasty Aengely Scepter y Popely ShedUty Ocly &c.
Those words which the Germans have borrowed
from the Greek, and where the latter have a ky the
saaae letter is adopted by the former; as, Kate-
chisniuSy catechism ; KadmuSy Cadmus ; Sopho^
kles^ Sophocles : but those from the Latin, which
have a c in their original language, ought to be
written the same ; as, CerberuSy Cerberus ; Cen^r
tauevy Centaur ; CypevUy Cypria ; ThucidideSy Thu-
Qidydes.

livi^ IV. Xlie ^xjended' / is denoted m a^l

cases

312 ANALYSIS OF THS

cases by le ; as, dieses^ this ; dieneh, to serve ; tte»
ber, fever ; Ltebe, love, &c. ; except in diphthongs
at the end of words, where y is substituted in-
stead of it.

The exceptions to this rule are as follow : viz.
diVy to thee ; miVy to me ; wiVy we y wider y againsf ;
and some foreign words ; as, Bisam^ cibet ; Biber,
a bieber ; Bibely bible ; Fiber ^ a faser or nerve ; Ka-
miUy chimney ; Tiger y a tiger ; Rubin, a ruby ; Ti-
fely title, &c.

Rule V. Foreign words, which are not natu-
ralized in the German language, and begin withc^,
or gy ought not to be written with schy as many
writers have done ; but thus : Chagririy chagrin.;
Chaise y coach"; Charlalariy mountebank; Genie^
genius ; Chimdrey chimera. The following, however,
have become na'turalized, and are written with sch;
instead of cA; sls, Maschine, machine; Schalottey a
kind of onion ; SchaluppCy a shalop ; Marschallf
a marshal ; kutscheuy to ride in a coach ; Marsch,
a march ; marschiereriy to march ; TuschCy a kind
of black colour.

Bide VI, The letters th and /, in writing de-
pend merely upon custom, as both do not in the
least differ in their pronunciation from each other.
In doubtful . cases we rather ought to prefer t
.than th.

Rule VII, The fe, after a vowel or a diph-
thong, ought never to be exchanged for the double
%z, nor for the single one ; as, BlitZy lightening ;

Schatz,

CSRMAN LANeiJApE* Sl3

) *

JSchaiz, treasurjs, &c. whereas,after a consorait we
Vrrite thus : ganz^ entire ; schmelzeuy to melt j
Warzffy a warts ; £r», brass, &c. ' • • , •

AN ALPHABETICAL LIST,

(>f such WordSi as are difficult to distinguish in
their Pronunciation from each other ; their
pecidiar Orthography and Meanir^ xihli/ being
decisive.

A a.

{ein Aaly — an eel.
eine A hi, — an awl.
alli^ — all, from which are derived fj/^cTj
nlle^ alles.

rdas Aas^ — - cirrion,

/ ein ASy — an ace (iri cards);

\ferj aszy — • (he) aite.

{

{

die Aehrey — an ear of Corn:

— Ehrcy — honour:

di^ AesickCy — ashes..

— EschCy — an ash tree.

die Ahneny -^ ancestors.
ahneny —^ to conjecture^
- ahndeny — to'revcn|;6.

aicheny — to stamp a measUre*
die Eichen, — oak-trees.
eigeny — proper.

der Anger y — pasture ground.
— • A?iker, — an anchor.

•^ ^

^ >I4 ANALYS» oy Tire

Bb.

f rfflr^ iflfflrf (Geld) — ready money, cash.
\die Bahrty — a bier.

{
{

{

das Bady — a bath.
ferj baty — (he) begged.

die Bahny — the path.

der Banriy — a ban, or an excommimicatioff.

{

der Bandy — the binding of a bool^, a volume,
das Bafidy — a ligament, bond, union. ^

fder Bauer y — a boor.
\das Baue7'y — a bird-cage.

f belleuy — to bark,
\di€ Bdlleny -^ the balls.

beschwereriy — to molest.
beschicoreny — to conjure.

f bezvehrty — armed.
\ beivUhrty — approved.

bezeigeuy •— to render.
b'ezetigeny — to confirm.

f biSy — until.

\der BisZy — a bit, morsel.

das Buchy — a book.

der Bugy — the bow, bending

{der Buckely — a stump, back.
\die Buckely — a stud, knob.

{der Bulky — a bull.

\die Bulky — a decree, published by the ?ope;

{der Biindy — a lea^gue.
das Bundy — a sheaf.
• kunty — of various colours.

l>d.

{

{

\

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

Si5

Dd.

Xder Tag, —

- the roof of a
the day.

house.

\

f dauen,
\ thauen.

— • to digest.
— to thaw.

/

(das — the
\dasz — that

(article)^

>

{
{

dingen, •-- to hire.
dungen, — to dung.

der Diinkely — the conccitedness*

— Dinkel, — spelt,

E e,

die Egge, — a harrow,

— Ekke, — a comer.

die Elster, — a river in Germany,

— Agister, -^ a bird.

{die Ente, — - a duck.
das Ende, — the end.

Xder Erbe, — the heir.
Xdas Erbe, -^ the inheriUncft

Ff.

{
{

{

die Ferse, -^ the heel.
— • Verse, — verses.

(das Festj, — a feast.
\ vest, — fast.

feiern, — to fire,
feuern^ -*— to celebrate

{

SferJM. —'(he) fell.

viel, — much.

s s 2 flach^n.

{

316 ANALYSIS OP THE

fldchscn, — flaxen^ made of flax.
die Flechscjty -r- the perves,

^der Fluch, — the course.
1 — ^^I'^gy — to'soar.

^der Forst, — a forest.
Xftrjforst, — *(he) inquires.

Sdie Frist, — a respite,
\(er)friszty ~ (he) devours,

J fihry (du) — conduct (thoil
1 i;/(?r, ^ four.

Sdie Gans, — a goose.
t ganzy — entire.

' JT g^K ^ begone.
t jdh, — steep.

der Geisely — ^ an hostage,
die Geisely — a scouro:e.

{da$ Geldy — money.

\ gelty — is it not so ?

f gelehrty —: learned.
\ geleerty — emptied.

^das- Geleite, — the conduct.
1— Geleihte, — ^ borrowed.

^der GescliQszy — the tax, impost.
\das Geschpsz, — a niissile weapon.

<die Gift, — the gift.
\da$ Gift, — poisop.

{

{
i

gtauben, — to believe.'
klauben, — to plcki

gleideriy — to slip,
kleiden^ — to <Jres^.

t/

OEHmAN. LAKCUAOS. 317

idefGra?n, — sorrow^
\ — • Kraiiiy — the shop.

. Hh.

^der Harzy — the Hcrciniin forests
\da$ Harz^ — rosin.

^det Heydcy -^ the pagkn.
\die HtidCy — * a heath*

her^ — here.
das Iletr^ — an army,

Sder Huthy — a heat.
\die IliUy — a guard.

{

li.

{

^die Jachty — • a yacht.

Jagd, — the hunt> chace,

Wer) ist^ ' — (he) is.
\(er) isztf^^ (he) eats.

Kk.

Sder Kaper^ — a privateer.

\die Kapery — the caper, a vegetable,

kdlteVy — much colder.
die Kelter.y — a wlnf press,

rder Kiefety — the jaw-

J die Kiefety — a sort of needle wood.

\der Kiifery — a tub -maker.

^der Kreis^ — a circle.
|— ^ GreiSy — a grej

{kriegeui to make war.
kriechen, to creep.
die Griecherty the Gtoeks*

LI

{

mm *

SIS

ANALYSIS OF THK

(die Last,

\ laszty (cs)

f hncheriy —
\die LeichCy —

leideuy —
leiten, —

{

fder Leiby —
.t— Laiby'-

(der Letter,
\die Leiter,

{

lOSy

das LooSy

(die Magdy

Machty

(dasMaaly —
|_ Mahly -

f vialeriy
\ mahletiy

Xei

THatiy
ein Manny

^^dte Mandely

'{

das Mandely

fder M angel y
\die M angel y

{

der Mardery
die Marter,

LI.

— a burden.

— leave (it).

to spawn.
a fimeral.

to suffer.

to conduct^ guide,

the belly,
a loaf.

— the guide.
-« a ladder.

loose,
the lot.

M m,

— a maid.

— power.

a marque,
a banquet.

— to grind.

— to paint.

• one, they.

— a man.

— the almond.

— a number of fifteen.

— the want.

— a mangle.

— a badger.

— the texture*

di^

G£RMAN LAN6TTA0E» ^l§

{

die Markf the boundaiy.
das Mark, — marrow.
der Markty — market.

der Marschy -^ the march*
die Mctrschy — a marshy fen.

{der Mast, — the mast of a vessel.
die Mast, fhiit of the oak and beacb^ for
feeding hogs thereon.

f mehr, — more.
\das Meer, — the sea.

(der Mensch, — a human being,
\das Mensckj — a wench.

{
{
{

Cder Mohr, — a black man, also a sort of silk.
\das Mohr, — the fen, bog.

der Messer, — a measurer.
das Messer, — a knife.

die Metze, — a measure.
— Mdtxe, — a nickname.

der Mist, — dung.

ferj misztj — (he) measures.

{

{
{

.1

Nn.

die Nisse, — eggs of vermin.
— Nusse, — nuts.

Oo.

der Ort, — a place.

das Ort, — a certain coin> or measure.

der Ohm, — the uncle.

das Ohm, ^ a certain measure ^ Wine> beer,&c.

S29

AKALVSIS of' THS

{

f rf<fr Rath, ~
\das Bad, —

der Rcchen, —
— liegen, —

flfer Rhciny —
- — Rain, -^

( — Rhede, —
, f rfer Reisz, •—

rder Roggcri, -
( — Rocken, -

the councih
a wheel,

- a rake. ^ .

• therairi.

pure. #
the river Rhine. •
an upcultivated path between twd
fields,

• a speech.

• a road for ships,

' rice.
a sprig.

- rye.

- the roe of a fish;

- a distaC

S s.

{

sum,

srken,

to sow.
to see.

\ — Scfioos^

~ the impogti
~ the lap.

tde?' Schachty — a shaft in mines.
\das Scfmc/iynel, '— the game of chess*

rder Schild, — the shield,
J (er) schilt, — (he) scolds,
\fsiej schieU, -^ (she) squints,

(dcr SchJachfer, — abutchei*.
\ schkchter, — still worse.

{der Scgeriy — the blessing.
\ sagiri, — to saw.

di9

{

— Ktam,

\da^ Harzy

(def Heydcy
'\di€ IleidCy

her, •
das Ileery-

Sder Huthy -
\die Hut^ •

{

{
{

die Jachty
— • Jagdy

(er) isi^
(er) iszt^

LEHMAN* LAKCXTAOt.

- sorrow^

— the shop.

, H h.

the Hercmiati forest.
• rosin.

^ the pagkii,
^ a heath*

here,
an army.

a heat,
a guard.

a yacht.

the hunt> chace,

317

(he) is.
(he) eats.

KL

\der Kapefi — a privateer.

\die Kaper, — the caperi a vegetable*

kalteTy — much colder.
die KelteTy — a wing press.

Kiefer^ — the jaw*

— a 8ort of needle wood.

— a tub maker.

{

rder
J die
\der

Kiefer^
KUfer^

Kreisi
GreiSy

— a circle.

— a greybeard •

kriegeui to make war.
kriechen, to cr^ep.
Gricchen, the Greeks*

LI.

{4ie Weise, <^ the manner.
-> IFour, — a female orphan.
Weisse, *- t^c whiteness.

die Waide, — pasture
WtUe, -- • willow.

ai^fer, — against.
wkdtTt — again.

(
{.

Widder, •— a rani^ male Aeep.

«

Zz.

{

jBfl/i^, — * supple.
ll^ ZShe, — the toe.

tfHi ZihreTh *- the tears,
i Mehren, «— to dispense.

zeigen, — to show. '^
ibr Zeichen^ — a sigOt naik^ hint.

4tik Xkge, — a goat.

^—i Zieckf^ -^ a cover upon a lied,

€der Zott^ — the toll.
\dtts ZoU, — an inch.

I

{die Zunahme, — - the crescent.
tkr Zunahmcy — the birth name.

dcr Zzverg, — ja dwarf.
xwerg^ — contrary*.

{

n. Of

* For s more ample instroction of the foiegotfi^ I i€«
commend the following osefbl wdrk :

G6tz£« NiiizUches W'&rUrbuob soldm W^t/rter^ die in dtr^
Jbusfrachefatt gleichen Tom, abet titu vgruUe^tm Bidtuimng

OBtMAH (AtrOUAGE.

$^

II. Of the Division of Syh^abi^bI*

1 • Compound words are thus divided, as they
are compounded with ; as, da*malSf thence ; nun*
mehvy at present ; Erb-recht^ the right of inherit
tage; ffaus^rath, household-furniture. The pre-
fixed syllables of derivatives remain in the division
also together s as, ver-achten, to despise ; bcnsehen^
to view J ge-rinnen, to ciirl -, zerjlieszen, to melt j
ejit-erben, to disinherit ; em'^pfindiny to experience a
sensation i em-pfehlen, to recommend ; in the twa
latter instances, the p 5er\"es to strengthen the/.

2. The affixed syllables of derivatives ai^.
divided more according to the pronunciation thaa'^
to the division* When therefore a consonant standa
between two vowels, U must be contracted with
the fbllfiiwing syllable ; as, Ue-be, love ; lie-ben^.
to love ; mei-nem Brurikr, to taj brother; mci^ncm
Va-^ter, to my £ithen

3. If there are two consoi^nts, in that case
otm is joined with the preening and the other
with the following syllable ; as, Getiib^y,avo\r;
falrlen^ to fall ; kin-nen, to know ; SiHdrte, cities j
Sfg-nen, to bless s Tad-^ler, ,a censuret s tt^fer, valii

Tt a anti

Mte

kahin und qflverwechs^H werden. Leifixig 1794.-^— Useftil Oic^
tioqary of such wprds^ which> in the pronunciation^ have aU
most an e^u^I toM, but havie a different significatioo, 9^4 pH^f a
are exchanged te see ttiet&erj» jL^^iciE, i;^Sf<<

^

^Attfttt ^ T^

{die Weise,
— Waiset
— Weisse,

die Weudct
— Weuk,

{

wider,
Tvieder,
der Widder,

{die

r

Idas

Ok

{

ziihe, —
Z£ke, -

Zdhrerh
xehren,

zeigen,
Zeichen,

der
das

dk
der

Sder

ZoU, -
ZoU,--

Zunahme,
Zunahme,

Zwerg, —
^f^ergy —

Ww.

-* the manner.
• a female orphan.

— the whiteness.

— pasture
a yi9\Siom*

— against.

— again.

— aram^ maledbfep..

Z z.

supple,
the toe.

— the tears.

— to dispense.

— to show. '*

— a sigOt naik^ hint.

— a goat.

— a cov^r upon a Ited*

the toll,
an inch.

r- the crescent.
— die birth name.

ji dwarf,
contrary*.

II.Of

* For s more ample instroctioD of the foregoiii|r, I i€«
eommeod the following osefbl W6rk :

GoTZ£« Nutxliches WdrUrbucb soUier W'Mer^ die in dtr-
Attssfrachefast gleichen Ton, aber rim viruhieflim Miutmng,-

• > »

U. Of the Division of Syuabi^bI.

1 • Compound words are thus divided, as they
are compounded with ; as, da*malsy thence ; nun^
mehr, at present ; Erthrecht^ the right of inherit
tage; ffaus^ratk, household-furniture. The pre-
fixed syllables of derivatives remain in the division
also together ; as, ver-achten, to despise ; bcnsehen^
to view ; ge-rinnen, to curl ; zerjlieszen, to melt s
ent-erben, to disinherit ; em^^nden, to experience a
sensation ; em-pfehlen, to recommend ; in the twa
latter instances, the p 5er\-es to strengthen the/.

2. The affixed syllables of derivatives ai^.
divided more according to the pronunciation thaa'

, to the division* When therefore a consonant stands
between two vowels, it nuist be contracted with
the foUpmng syllable ; as, Uthbe, love ; lifi-betht.
to love ; mei-nem Brurder, (o taj brother; mei^ncm
Vaster, to my fethen •

3. If there are two consongnts, ip that case
otm is joined with the preening and the other
with the following syllable ; as, Gelub^,,avoYr;
falrlen^ to fall; kin-nen, to know; StUd-iCy cities ^
Sfg-nen, to bless ; Tad-ler, ,a censuret ; tt^-fer, vali^

Tta ^nti

■Mfci

kahin und qfl verwechs^H werden. Lei/txig 1794.--— Useftil Oio
tioqary of such wprds^ which> in the pronunciation^ have aU
Most an equal tone, but have a different significatioo, 9Q4 qIIsa
are exchanged te sue aaethcr^ tMj^k, I79ik

d8»

4>AttMI tff TItf

{

'ik Weise, -
■— WaisCf -
— JVeissc, •

rfitf Waide, •

wider,
Tvieder,
jder Widdcr,

{die

r

4nK

{

zahcy —
ZSke, -

Zahrerh
xehren,

zeigen,
Zekhen^

Xiege, -

lib*

jder

ZoU, -

Zunahme,
Zunahme,

Zwerg, —
zwergy —

» the manner.

— a female orphan.

— the whiteness.

— pasture
a ViiOow*

-— against.

— again.

— a ram^ male Aeep..

Zz.

supple,
the toe.

— the tears.

— to dispense.

— to show. '^

— a sigOt naik^ hint.

— a goat.

— a cover upon a lied,

the toll,
an inch.

r- flie crescent.
— the birth name.

ji dwarf,
contrary*.

atm

n. Of

* For s more ample instroctioD of the fofegoifi|r, I xc
eommeod the following osefbl w6rk :

GoTZ£» Niitzliches W'arUrbucb soUnr W^rttTf die in Ar*
Aussfraclufast gleichcn Ton, ahcr Anc vnuhidtm Shdiuimng

OBtMAH ItAtrOUAGE. ^^

II. Of the Division of Syh^abi^bI,

1 • Compound words are thus divided, as they
are compounded with ; as, da'-malsy thence ; nun^
mehry at present ; Erb-rccht^ the right of inheri^i
tage; ffausmrath, household-furniture. The pre-
fijced syllables of derivatives remain in the division
also together ; as, ver-achten, to despise ; bcnsehen^
to view s ge-rinnen, to ciirl ; zerjiieszen, to melt j
ent-erben, to disinherit ; em^^nden, to experience a
sensation ; em-pfehleriy to recommend ; in the two
latter instances, the p 5er\-es to strengthen the/.

2. The affixed syllables of derivatives am
divided more according to the pronunciation thaa
to the division* When therefore a consonant stands
between two vowels, it must be contracted with
the fbllpwing syllable ; as, lieAm^ love ; lie-ben^,
to love ; mei-nem Brurder, to wj brother; vw-mpm
Va-ter, to my fethen •

3. If there are two consoi^nts, 19 that case
otm is joined with the preening and the other
with the following syllable ; as, Gelub^, . a vow ;

fal-len, to fall ; kin-nen, to know ; Siad-te, cities ;
Sfg-nen, to bless s Tad-ler, ,a censuret s tap-fety vali^-

Tt2 anti

irt«fti

haben und qft verwechs^h werden. Lei^xtg 1 794.— -Useful Dio
tioi^uy of such wdrds^ which> in the pronunciation^ have aU
tnost an eijual tone, but hav^ a different sigiiificatioo, 9Q4 pIU A
are exchanged te sue ttiet&er^ jL(»^2»ck, IJ^^

334 AKALYSIS OP THfi

ant } trop^feh, to drip ; Schdt-ze, treasures ; Wes-pe^
a wasp, &c.

4. The ck and st are better left with the first
syllable ; as, wack-er^ lively j kost-en^ to cost. The
st may be divided 5 as, kos-ten.

5. Compound signs of a simple sou^d remain
fdv^rays together, like cA, pA, sch, sz, and th ; as,
Spra-che, language ; Pro^phet, a prophet ; sie dra-
schen, they

6. Words borrowed from a foreign language,
are divided in German according as they are pro-
nounced s as, E'Van-gC'li-um, gospel j Pra^so-iky
prosody, &c.

IIL Orthography of compound Words,

All that can and ought to be written on
compound words, we have treated upon in the
etymology. In doubtful cases, we rather sepa^
rate the word with a hyphen. Therefore every
compound, word must be written as one word ; as
AbendstundeUy evening, or leisure hours ; sehnsuchts^
vally full of desire ; but in many cases they are
written with the sign of junction (-) for the sake
of clearness; as, ^ . .

1 • When a German word is compounded with
^ foreign one ; as Konsistorial-Rathy coimsellor of
spiritual law ; Privat-Stunde, private hour, &c.

2. When an appellative liame is compounded
y ith a proper one ; as, Neu-Stettin s N?\y-Stattin j
^/^£^a7^(2^/^^Mr^, 01d-Brandei]^bufg, Sec.

Ex*.

GERMAN LANGUAGE* :325

Except, Hochdeutsch^ High German ; Nieder^
deutschy Low Dutch ; Plattdeutchy Fkmish.

3. When two foreign words are compounded
together, which in their own language cannot suffer -
any composition ; as, Justitz-Kollegiumy court of
justice; Proviant^KommissariuSy commissary of pro-
visions, &c. and this rule is the same with words,
compounded with three or . more.

IV. Of Perspicuity and Accuracy in

WRITING.

The following rules and observations for as-
sisting students to write with perspicuity and accu-
racy, ought to be carefully studied.

Perspicuity is the fundamental quality of
style ; a quality so essential in every kind of writ-
ing, that for the want of it nothing can atone*
It is not to be considered as merely a negative
excellence, or simply a freedom from defect. It has
higher merit : it is a degree of positive beauty*
We are delighted with an author, and consider him
as deserving praise, who frees us from all fatigue
of searching for his meaning: who carries us through
his subject without any embarrassment or confusion;
and whose style flows always like a limpid stream^
" through which we see to the very bottom^

These qualities of stile require the following;
properties :

1 . Purity. Which consists in the use of such
words, and such constructions, as belong to the

idiom

S26 AKALT818 OP ^fRB

idiom of the lanj^uage which wc $pt$!k 5 -in op-
position to words, and phrases that are taken from
other languages, or that are ungranunatical, ob-
soletC) new-coined, or used without proper M-
' thority .

The introduction of foreign and learned words,
unless where necessity requires them, should never
be admitted; the German language is, of all
others, the only one which does not stand in need
of uny foreign assistance.

2. Propriety. Which is the selection of sueh
words as the best usage has appropriated to those
ideas, which we intend to es^press by them*; in
opposition to low expressions, tnd to words and
phrases which would be less insignificant of tb^
ideas that we mean to convey. Style may be poit,
i. e. strictly German according to the rules,- never-
theless, it may be deficient in propriety ; for the
wcM-ds may be il| phosen, not adapted to the sub*
ject, nor fully expressive of the author*s sense,
We should avpid therefore all equivocal or ambigwuf
words and expressions^ which are unintelligible and
not consistent with the former,

3^ Precisian. Which signifies retrenchihg sfl-
perfiuities, and pruning the expression, so as to ex*
hibit neither more nor less than an exact cq0f
of the person*s idea who uses it.

As for the other requisites of a perfect sen^
tence, which are clearness^ unity ^ strength^ an4
fgtires of speech y. I do not intend to lay dawA

GERMAN LANGVAC5- S(27 ,

xples to any authc^ ; as the latter subjects have
been already fully investigated, and explained by
the &ther of the German language Klop9tq(:k^ m
hk fiwnous work Deutsche geUkrte BepubUck. —
And, of late, by the celebrated professor 4de-
lung, in his various learned works and treatises.
ojj the German language.

. V. Op Signs common in writing, or

Punctuation.

The fiigios used in iht German language to
divide <Mr indicate the meaning of passages, are
nearly tbe same as the English and other modem.
languages 3 I ^aU therefore only mention their
technical terms, and leave the application to the
student.

The signs are :

1. Das Fragezeichen, the sign of interrogation (f)-

2. Das AtiSnffungszeichen, the $ign of exclama-

tion (I)

3. Der ScUusxpunkty the point, or period (.)

4. Das Kobmj ov dsr Doppelpunkty the two points,

or colon (:)

5. Das Semicolon,, or der Strichpunkt, the spro-,

colon (;)

6f, Das Komma, the comma (,)

J..

The other signs which pcciy: in German com-
position are the following :

1, Das Anfmhrta^sxeichen, the mafk of qnota-
tion ("), which is app'fied to denote the words
of an author. 2. Das^

828 AWALYSIS Of^ THfc

2. Das^ Thfihingszeicheny the hyphen (=), which

serves to divide a word.
3* Das Bindezatheny the junction (= or -), which

serves to denote compound words^ as in the

before-mentioned cases.

4. Die ParenthesCy the parenthesis^ ( ) ^^ [ !•

5. Das Zeichen einer abgebrochenenBede, the sign

of an abrupted speech (" ")

6. J)e7' Gedankenstrichy a sign, when the interlo-

cution is changed ( '—).

7. Die Punkte, the points ( ),.when the author

suppresses a name^ or any other subject.'-
$. Der Hinterstrichy or Jpostri^iy the apostrp^
('), which is to indicate an expunged es as>
kaum hatC er diesx gesagt, scarce had he told
this, &c. ;

Observation. [I have still to observe, in a few words, iwo
circamstances, vi%, that of German Tj^ography and Calxgraphy.

The Gernjans use three sorts of characters, two of .which
may be properly called German, and the third Roman or Latin.
The latter is that which is common to the English and most
other nations. One of the two German characters is em-
ployed exclusively in printing, the other in writing. - Tlaiose for
printing resemble the Black Letter of this country (vidrthe^
alphabet, page 5.}* Those appropriated to hand-writing are
merely used by the natives.

Of late, the Germans have began to introduce the Roman
characters instead of those of the Black Letter ; yet ^bls me-
thod is not universal^ though it will become so in time. As
for the German original hand«writing, the inhabitants^ when,
they correspond with foreign nations, make use of the Boman
or Latin characters*

ON

9

G&RMAN LA^G^AGt* 22^

ON GERMAN PROSODY :

THE LAWS OF VERSIFICATION.

As ther.e are many students who are fond of
reading ancient or modem poetical compositfon ;
and as the perusal of this lively and forcible mode
ot exhibiting nature and sentiment^ m^y be an
instructive employment of • a moderate portion of
our time, by comparing tjie analogy of both lan-
guages ', I thought it therefore necessary to give the
reader some idea of that part of Grammar which
explains the principles df versification ; that, in
reading German poetry, he may be the better able
to judge of its correctness and analogy, and relish
the beauties of both languages *.

The Oef man language is adapted to every kind
of versification, cither ancient or modern, and is
composed of lambicks and Trochees of different

length;

* It ought to be observed, that I do not mean to ar-
rogate to myself so much consequence as to suppose, on a strict
periisal and attention to this publication, that I shall make
the student a poet ^ I only intend to exhibit to htm a key or
eloe, by whidi he may easily and correctly refid and compare
Gernian .poetry. Jt hay been invariably my plan to introduce
the works of Burger, Gissner^ or Gillerty first, which are not
only easy, but entertaining. For the studieint*s further progrsiss,'
he wi4l find numerous authOi's in the annexed catalogue, under
the head of German poets,

U U

350 ANALYSIS Qii' Tfl*

length ; as well as Dactylcs^ which are lesfs made
use of, being mixed with the two former.

The rhyme, which constitutes and determines
two or more lines, is not essential to the German
versifltation. But there are two kinds of rhyme^
viz. the masculine and ih^ feminine.

The rhymes are masculine, when the syllables
which determine the verses arc long-, ^nd Jemi\
ninesy when short.

From the variety of the bng or short sylla-
bles is produced in every language a certain degree
of harmony ; which may properly be called the
cadence of verse : and as we unite the long or short
syllables in different situations, we form the feet,
or different Metres which compose the verse,

OBSERVATIONS.

1. The smallest kind of fe.et consists of two
syllables, which when long is called a Spondee-, as,
Vortrag, Delivery.

2. The feet, composed of two short syllables,
is called phyrrhicy or ardeiit ; it is very rapid and
easy.

3. The medium between these feet contains
the Trochee and Iambic, which are composed of
two syllables ; one of which is long the other short.
The Trochee begins with the long and finishes with
the short ; as, Vat^r, father ; hoffin, to hope ; /&•
Vin, to praise, &c. which may be more clearly seen
in the following verses of our famous poet Burgert
the author of Eleonora.

Mor*

GERMAN LAKGUAGE. 3^1

I

Mdrgen*Uebey tver die Ltebil

Schon empfdnds
Morgin^LAehe^ wir die Llebc

Nle gekannt.

Of all the feet of three syllables, which the
Greeks and Romans made use of in their lan-
guages, there are but three extant among the
Germans, viz. '

1. The Daciyky of which the first syllable is
longy and the two following short ; ^Sy goitliiche,
godly; hlmm^sche, heavenly; mrnschliche, rmn]y;
thJerische^ beastly, &c. -

2. Amphibrach^ of which the first is shorty the
second long^ and the third shoy^t. Many of th(?
German words form this metre ; as, Geddnken^
thought ; G(lt}ebtii beloved j geneigtey bended, &c*

3. AnapestCi- which is composed of two short
syllables, followed by a tong one ; as, Maj^stat,
majesty ; Ungimiin, uncommon ; unirhort, unheard
of, &c.

SPECIMENS OF GERMAN POETRY.

DER RAUBGRAF.

Es liegt nicht weit von hier ein land,
Da reist' ich einst hindurch ; \
Am Weg' auf hohem Felsen stand,
Vor alters, eine Burg.
Die alten Rudera da von
Wies mir der Schwager Postilion.

x; u 2 Mein

8S2 AKALTSIS OP THS

Mein Herr^ begann der Schwager Mate,
Mit heimlichem Gesicht,
War' mir bechert dort jener SchatZf
FUhr' ich den Herm wohl nicht.
Mein Seel ! den Kqnig fragt' ich gleich ;
Wie theuej". Heir gein Konigreich ?

Wohl nianchem wasseite der Mund,
Doch mancher ward geprellt.
Denn, Hcrr, Gott sey bei uns ! ein Hund
Bewacht das schone Geld....
Ein schwarzef Hundy die Zahne blosz,
Mit Feueraugen tellergrosz !

Nur immer alle sieben Jahr*
Laszt sich ein Flammchen sehn,
,Dann mag ein Bopk, kohlschwar? voq Haar^
Die Hebung wohl bestehn,
Um zwolf Uhr in Walpiirgis Nacht,
Wird der dem Unhold dargcbracht,

Doch merl^' ein^ nur des Bpsen IJ^ \
Wo noch zum Ungliick
Am Bock ein weiszes Harchcn ist,
Alsdanp : Ade, (jenick !
Den Kniff hat mancher nicht bedacht;
Und sich um Leib und Seel* gebracht.

Fiir meinen Part, mit groszen Herm^
Und Meister Urian,
Aesz' ich woh| kpine K-itschen gem.
Man lauft verdammt oft an.
Sie werfen einem, wie man spricht,
Gern Stiel ijnd Stein > ins Angesitht.

Drum

GERMAN IrAKGUAGE* 333

Drum rath ich immer «v lieber Krist^
X^asz dich init keinem ein !
Wann der Kontract geschlossen Ist,
Bricht man dir Hals und Bein.
Trotz alien Klauseln^ glaube du>
Macht jcder dir ein X iwc U.

Goldmacherei und Lotterie,
Nach reichen Weibern frein,
Und Schatze graben^ segnet nie^
Wird manchen noch gereun.
Mein Spriichlein heiszt : auf Gott vertraujs,
Arbeite brav, und leb* genau 1

Ein alter Graf, fubr Schwager MaU
Nach seiner Weise fort,,
Vergrub zu Olims Zeit den Schatz
In seinem Keller dort.
Der Graf, mein Herr, hiesz Graf von Rips,
Ein Kraut, wie Kasebier und Lips«

Der streifte durch das ganze Land^
Mit Wagen, Rosz und Mann,
Und wo er wa$ zu Kapern fand.
Pa macht' er frisch sich dran.
Wips ! hatt' ers weg, wips ! gie.ng er durch,
Und schleppt' es heim auf seine Burg.

XJiid wenn ererst zu Loche sasz.
So schlug mein Graf von Rips, —
'iDenn hier that ihm kein Teufel was,— «^
Gar honisch seinen Schnips*
Sein allyerfluchtes Felsennest
War wie der Konigstein so fest.

So

S34 ^ ANALYSIS OF THE

So iibt' cr nun gar lang* und oft
Viel Bubenstuckv:hen aus,
Und fid den Nacbbarn unverhofft
In Hof und Stall und Haus.
Allein, der Krug geht, wie man spricht.
So lang zu Wasser, bb er bricht. '

Das Ding verdrosz den Magistral
Im nachsten Stadtchen sehr.
Drum rieth er langst auf klugen Rath
Bedachtlich bin und her,

Und rieth, und rieth— *doch weisz man wdil!-f
Die Ilerren riethen sich halb toll.

Da nun begab sichs, dasz einsmahlS)
Ob vielcm Teufelsspasz,
Ein Lumpcnhexchen auf den Hals
In Kett' und Banden sasz.
Schon wetzte Meister Urian
Auf diesen Bra ten seinen Zahn.

Diesz Hexchen sprach : Hort I'laszt mich frei,
So scbaff' ich ihn herein.
Wohl ! sprach ein edler Rath, es sey !
Und gab ihr oben drein
Ein eisen Privilegiumt
Zu hexen frank und frei herum.

Ein narrscber Handel ! unsereins
That' nichts auf solchen Kauf.
Doch Satans Reich ist selten eins,
Und reibt sich selber auf.
Eiir dieszmal spielt die Liigenbrut
Ihr Scuckchen ehrlich und auch gut.

'Sic

GERMAN LANGUAGE* ' 8S5

Sle kroch als Krqt' aufs Rauberschlosz,
Mit losem leisen Tritt,
Verwandelte sich in das Rosz,
Das Rips gewohnlich rift ;
Und als dejr Schloszhahn krahte friih,
Bestieg der Graf gesatfelt sie.

Sie aber trug, trotz Gert' und Sporn,
So sehr er hieb und trat,
Ihn iiber Stock und Stein und Dorn,
Gerades Wegs zur Stadt.
Friih, als das Thor ward aufgethan,
Sic;b da! kam unser Hexlein an,

Mit Kratzfusz und mit Reverenz
Lacht honisch alle Welt :
Willkommen hier, Ihr' Excellenz !
Quartier ist schon bestellt !
Du hast uns lange satt geknuft ;
Man wird dich wieder knuflPen, Schuft !

Dem Schnapphahn ward, wie sichs g^ebiihrt.
Bald dey Procesz gemacht,
Und drauf. als man ibn condemnirt
Ein Kafich ausgedacht.
Da ward mein Rips hineingesperrt
Und wie ein Murmelthier genarrt.

Und, als ihn hungern that, da schnitt
'Der Knips mit Hollenquaal, , ^

Ypftoi eignen Leib' ihm Glied fiir Glied,
Und briet es ihm zum Mahl.
Als jeglich Glied verzehret war,
. Briet er ihm seinen Magen gar. /

So

^36 ANALYSIS OF THS

So schmauszt^ er uch denn selber au^
Bis auf den letzten Stumpf,
Und endigte den Lebenslauf,
Den Nachbam zum Triumph*
Der Eisenbauer ^orinn er lag,
Wird aufbe%Yahrt bis dicscn Tag.

^ GRAF WALTER,*

Graf Walter rief am Marstallsthor ;
«« Knapp, schwamm und kamm mein Ross T'
Da trat ihn an die schonste Maid,
Die je ein Graf genosz.

*^ Gott griisze dich, Graf Walter schon f,
Sieh her sieh meinen Schurz !
Mein goldner Gurt war sonst so lang
Nun ist er mir zu kurz.

Mein Leib tragt deiner Liebe Frucht.
Sie pocht, sie will nicht ruhn.
Mein seidnes Rockchen, sonst so weit,
Zu eng' ist mir es nun."—

" O Maid, gehort mir, wie du sagst,
Gehort das Kindlein mein.
So soil ajl all mein rothes Gold
Dafiir dein eigen seyn.

-•»»-

* Graf Walter^ Counr Water A tale, according to tbff
0I4 Englishi which may be compared with the German.

GERMAKf LAKGUAGE. /S37

\ *

O Maid, gehortinir, wie du schworst,
Gehort das Kindlein mein.
So soil mein Land und Leut' und Burg
Dein und des Kindleins seyn." —

" O Graf, was ist fur Lieb' und Trcu'
All all dein rolhes Gol(^ ?
All all dein Land und Leut*, und Burg
Ist mir ein schnoder Sold.

Ein Liebesblick aus deinem Aug',
So himmelblau und hold.
Gilt mir, und war' es noch so viel,
Piir all dein rothes Cjold.

Ein Liebeskusz von deinemi Mund,
So purpurroth und siisz.
Gilt mir fttr Land und Leut' und Burg,
Und wars ein Paradies. "—

" O Maid, friih morgen trab' ich weit
Zm Gast nach Weiszenstein,
Und mit mir musz die schonste Maid,
Wohl auf, wohl ab am Rhein," —

, ** Trabst du zu Gast hach Weiszenstein,
So weit schon morgen friih y
So lasz, o Graf, mich mit dir gehn,
Es ist mir kleine Miih' !

Bin ich schon nicht die schonste M^id,
Wohl auf, wohl ab am Rhein j •
So kleid' ich mich in Bubentracht,
Dein Leibbursch dortzu seyn." — '

'' O Maid, willst du mein Leibbursch $eyn,
Und heiszen Er statt Sie ;

^3t ANALYSIS OP tH£

So kiirz* dein seidnes Rocklein dk
Halb zollbreit ubertn Knie.

So kiirz' dein goldnes Harlein dif
Halb zollbreit uberm Aug' !
Dann magst dU wohl mein Letbbursch seyn,
Denn also ist.es Brauch." —

Beiher lief sie den ganzen Tag,
Beiher im Sonnenstrahl ;
t)och sprach er nie so hold ein Wort :
Nun, Liebchen, reit' einmahl !

Sie lief durch Heid- und Pfriemenkraut,
Lief barfusz neben an ;
Doch sprach er nie so hold ein Wort :
O Liebchen, schuh' dich an ! —

" Gemach, gemach, du trauter Graf !
Was jagst du so geschwind ?
Ach, meinen armen armen Leib
Zersprengt mir sonst dein Kind,'*—

" Ho, Maid, siehst du das Wasser dort.
Dam Briick' und Steg gebricht ?"- —
" O Gott, Graf Walter, schone mein !
Denn schwimmen kann ich nicht ?" —

Er kam zum Strand, er setzt^ hinein,
Hinein bis an das Kinn.—
*' Nun steh mir Gott im Himmel bei !
Sonst ist dein Kind dahin." —

Sie rudert wohl mit Arm und Bein^
Halt hoch empor Ihr Kinn.
Graf Walter pochte hoch das Herz ;
Doch folgt' er seiqem Sinn.

tlpd

€ERMAN LANGtTAGE^. '' $39

Und als er uberm Wasser war*

Rief er sie an sein Knie:

^* Komxn her, o Maid, und sieh, was dort.

Was fern dort funkelt, sieh ! " ,

>

Siehst du wobl funkein dort «in Schlos^
Im Abend strahl wie Gold ?
Zwolfschone Jungfern spielen dort
Die schonste ist mir bold-

Siehst du wobl funkein dort das Scblosz,
Aus weiszem Stein erbaut ?
.Zwolf schone Jungfraun tanzen dort.
Die Schonst' ist meine Braut/* —

*• Wobl funkein seh icb dort ein Scblosz,
Im Abendstrahl wie Gold-
Gott seghe, Gott behute di<?h,
Sammt deinem Liebcben bold !

Wobl funkein seb' icb dort d*sis Scblosz,
Aus weiszem Stein erbaut.
<jott segne, Gott behute diqb,
Sammt deiner scbonen Braut" ! —

Sie kamen wobl zum blanken Scblosz,
Wie Gold im Abendstrabl,
^um Scblosz erbaut aus weiszem Stein,
Mit stattlicbem Portal.

Sie sab*n wobl die zwolf Jungfraun scbon ;
Sie spielten lustig Ball.
Die zwolfmabl schoner war, als sie,
JZog still ibr Hosz zu StalL

Sie sab'n wobl die zwplf Jun^raun scbpn i

Sic tanzten froh urns Scblosz,

."- ■ •

?x§ Die

I

I

240 jkSAi.m3

Zo% fCzQ xsr Wesd^ ihr Rosz.

^ H^wtkh tin I^fibbopdi t Ncxny m schos
War nxe em Ldbbonch ! Nic !

Ha, sduocr ak ein LnbbondL je
Dts hdcfasten Hcrrn gtfBttff. I
VuT dasz son Leib, za Tcril and rand^
So bocb den Gurtcl tragt !

Mir daodit, wie meincr Mutter Kind
JJcV icfa ifan zaft und reio.
Dorft' jch, so fiumt' ich wohl zu Nacfat
Gcmsu:h ond Bett ihm ein." —

** Dem Borschchen, rief Heir Waller stol^
Das lief durch Koth und Moor^
Ziemt nicht der Heninn Sclafgemacb,
Ihr Bett nicht von Drapd'or.

Ein Biirschchen, das den ganzen Tag
Durch Koth lief und durch Moor^
Speist wohl sein Nachtbrod von der Faust,
Und sinkt am Herd aufs Ohr/'r-^

Nach Ves^rmahl und Gratias
Ging jedermann zu( Ruh\
Da rief Graf Walter : « Hier, mein Bursch (
Was Ich dir sag', das thu' !

Hinab, geh' f[\xgs hinab zur Stadt>
Geh* alle Gassen durch !
Die schonste Maid, die du ersiehst
Bcscheide fiugs zur Burg !

Pic

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 341 .

Die schonste Maid, die du ersiehst.
All sauberlich und nett.
Von Fusz zu Haupt, von Haupt zu Fusz,
Die wirb mir fiir mein Bett !" —

Und flugs ging sie hinab zur Stadt,
Ging alle Gassen durch.
Die schonste Maid, die sie ersah,
Beschied sie flags zur Burg.

Die schonste Maid, die sie ersah, . ^

AU sauberlich und nett.
Von Fusz zu Haupt, von Haupt zu Fusz,
Die warb sie ihm furs Bett,—

" Nun lasz, o Graf, am Bettfusz nur
Mich ruhn bis an den Tag J • ^

Im ganzen Schlosz ist sonst kein'Platz,*
Wbselbst ich rasten mag."—

Auf seinen Wink am Bettfusz sank
Die schonste Maid dahin, . *

Und ruhte bis zum Morgengrau
Mit stillem frommen Sinn. —

^« Halloh ! Halloh ! Es tonet bald.
Des Hirten Dorfschalmei.
Auf, fauler Leibbursch ! Gib dem Rosz
Gib Haber ihm und, Heu !

Bursch, goldnen Haber gib dem Rosz,
Und frisches griines Heu !
Damit es rasch und Wohlgemuth
Mich heimzutragen sey/^—

Sie sank wohl an die Kripp' im Stall ;
Jhr Leib war ihr so schwer.

Sic

342 ANALYSIS OF THE

Sie kriimmte sich auf rauhem Stroh
Und wimmcrt', o wie sehr !

Da fiihr die alte Grafinn auf,
Erweckt vom Klageschall,
** Auf, auf, Sohn Walter, auf und sieh t
Was achzt in deinem Stall ?

In deinem Stalle haust ein Geist,
Und stohnt in Nacht und Wind,
Esstohnet, als gebare dort
Ein Weiblein jetzt ihr Kind/*—

Hui sprang Graf Walter auf und grifF
ZumHacken an derWand,
Und warf um seihen weiszen Leib
Das seidne Nachtgewand.

Und als er vor die Stallthiir tratt,
Lauscht' et gar still davor.
Das Ach und Weh der schtinsten Maid
Schlug klaglich an sein Ohr.

Sie sang ; '* Susu, luUull mein Kind !
Mich jammert deine Noth.
Susu, luUuU, susu, lieb lieb I
O weine dich nicht tod !

Sammt deinem Vater schreibe Gott
Dich in sein Segensbuch !
Werd' ihm und dir ein Purpurkleid,
Und mir ein Leichentuch !"—

" O nun, o nun, siisz siisze Maid,
Siisz siisze Maid halt ein !
Mein Busen ist ja nicht von Eis
Und nicht von Marmelstein.

GERMAN LANGUAGE. 343

O nun^ o pun^ susz 3usze Maid
Siisz siisze Maid, halt ein 1
Es soil ja Tauf* und Hochzeit nun
In einer Stunde seyn,"

DER KAISER UND DER ABT.*

Ich will euch erz'ahlen cin Mahrchen, gar schnurfig :
Es war 'mahl ein Kaiser ; der Kaiser war kurrig ;
Auch war 'raahl ein Abt, cin gar stattlicher Herr ;
Nur Schade ! sein Sch'afer war kliigcr als cr.

Dem Kaiser wards saucr in Hitz' und in Kalte :
Oft schlief or bepanzert im Kriegesgezelte ;
Oft hat er kaum Wasscr zu Schwarzbrod und Wurstj
Und ofter noch lltt* cr gar Hunger und Durst.

Das Pf afflein das wuszte sich besser zu hegen,
Und weldlich am Tisch und im Bette zu pflegen.
Wie Vollmond glanzte sein feistcs Gesicht.
Drei Manner umspannten den Schmerbauch ihm nicht*

Drob suchte der Kaiser am Pfafflein oft Hader*
Einst ritt' er, mit reisigem Kriegesgcschwader,
In brennender Hitze des Sommers vorbei.
Das Pfafflein spazierte vor seiner Abtei.

" Ha, dachte der Kaiser, zur gliicklichen Stunde !"
Und giiiszte das Pfafflein mil honischcm Munde :
** Knecht Gottes, wie gehts dir ? Mir daucht wohl ganz reclit,
Das Beten und Fasten bckomme nicht schlecht.

boch

- * ■ ■■ ' , ■--■■-.

* Dtr Kaiser , und der Alt, the Emperor and the Abbot.
According to the ancient English, which mdy be compared
with the German«

34+ ANAtYSlS OF Tit

* %

Do'h ilauchi mir daoebetiy euch plage viel Weile,
Ihr dankt mirs wohl, wenn'idi euch Arbeit crtfaeile,
Man riihiiiety ihr waret der pfiffigste Mann,
Ihr hortet das Graschen fast wachsen» sagt maa.

So geb* ich denn euem zwei tiichtigen BackcA
Zur Kurzweil drei artige Nusse zu knacken.
Drei Monden von nan an bestiram* !ch zur Zeit,
Dann will ich auf diese drei Fragen Bescheid.

Zum Ersten : Wann hoch ich im fiirstlichen Rathe.
Zu Throne mich zeige im Kaiser-Ornate,
Dann sollt ihr mir sagen, ein treuer Wardein,
Wie viel ich wobl werth bis zum Heller mag sejrn ?

Zum Zweiten soUt ihr mir berechnen und sagen :
Wie bald ich zu Rosse die Welt -mag umjagen i
Und keine Minute zu wenig und viel"? ^

ich v/cisri.y der Bescheid darauf ist euch nur Spiel.

Zum Dritten noch solUt du, o Prcis der PraUten,
Aufs H'archen mir meine Gedanken errathen.
Die will ich dann treulich bekennen : allein
£s soil auch kein Titelchen wahres dran seyn.

Und konnt ihr mir diese drei Fragen nidit IoscDi
So seyd ihr die langste Zeit Abt hicr gcwesen.
So lasz* ich euch fiihren zu Esel durchs Land,
Verkehrt, state des Zaumes den Schwanz in der Hand."—

. Drauf'trabte der Kaiser mit Lachen von hinnen.
Das Pfafflein zerrisz und zersplisz sich mit Sinnen*
Kein armer Verbrecher fiihlt mchr Schwulitat,
Der vol hochnotpcinlichem Halsgericht st«ht.

Er schickte nach ein, zwei, drei, vier, UnverstSten,
Ec fragte bei ein, zwei, drei, vier, Facuhaten^
Er zahke Gebiihren und Sportcln vollauf :
Doch loste kein Doctor die Fragen ihn) auf.

ScbncB

V

GERMAN LANOXTAGE, 345

Schnell wuchsen, bei hcrzlichena Zagen und Pochen,
Die Stunden zu Tagen, die Tage zu Wochen,
Die Wochcn * zu Mondcn ; schon kam der TenninJ
Ihm wards vor den Augen bald gelb und bald griin.

Nun sucht' er, ein bleicher hohlwangiger Werthcr>
In WaJern und Fcldern die einsamsten Ocrter.
Da traf ihn auf sclten betrctener Bahn,
Hans Bendix, sein Sch'afer, am Fclsenweg an.

** Herr Abt, sprach Hans BendiX) was mogt* ihr cuch

gramen ?

Ihr schwindet ja wahrlich dabin, wie ein Schcmenk

Maria und Joseph ! wie hotzelt ihr ein 1

Mein Sixchcn ! Esmuszeuch was angethan seyn/' —

'^ Ach, guter Hans Bendix^ so musz sichs wohl schicken.
Der Xaiser will gern mir am Zeuge was flicken^
Und hat mir drei Niiss* auf die Zahne gepackt.
Die schwerlich Beelzebub sclber wohl knackt."

Zum Ersten : Wann hoch er, im furstlichen Rathe
Zm Throne sich zeiget, im Kaiser^Ornatc,
Dann soil ich ihm sagen, ein treucr Wardeiri,
Wie viel cr wohl wcrth bis zum Heller mag seyn ?

Zum Zweiten soil ich ihm berechncn und sagen :
Wie bald er zu Rosze die Welt mag umjagen ?
Um keine Minute zu wenig und viel !
£r meint der Bescheid darauf ware nur Spiel.

Zum Dritten, ich armster von allsn Pralalen,
Soil Ich ihm gar seine Gedanken etrathen ;
Die "will er mir treulich bekennen : allein
£s soil auch kein Titelchea Wahrcs dran s^yfl.

Und kann ich ihm diese drei Dinge nicht losen,
So bin ich die langste Zeit Abt bier gewesen ;
So laszt er mich fiihren zu Esel durchs Land,
"Verkehrr, statt des Zaumes den Schwanz in der Hand.'* —

Y y ^ Niclu«.

846 ANALYSIS OF THE

'^ Nichts weitcr ? erwiedert Hans Bemlix mit Lacbeii,
Hcrr, gebt cixcti zufr eden ! das will ich schon machen.
Nur borgt mir eur Kappcben^ cur Kreutzchen und Kleid;
So wjll ich schon geben den recbten Bescheid.

Vcrsteh' ith glcich nichts von Latcinischcn Brocken,
So vreisz ich den Hund doch vom Ofeu zu locken.
Was ihr cucb, Gelehrte, fiir Greld nicht erwerbt.
Das hab' ich von meiner Frau Mutter geerbt."

Da sprang, wje eiii Bocklein, der Abt vor Behagen.
Mit Kiippchen und Kreutzchen^ mit Mantel und KrageD>
Ward stattikh Hans Bendix zum Abte geschmiickt^
Und hurtig zum Kaiser nach Hofe geschickt.

Hier thronteder Kaiser im fiirstlichen Batbe^
Hoch prangt' er, mit Zepter und Kron' im Ornate : |

** Nun sagt mir, Hcrr Abt, alsein treuer Wardein,

Wie viel ich jetzt wcrth bis zum Heller mag seyn ?" \

i

*^ Fiir drerszig Reichsgulden wardChristusverschachcrt^
Drum gab' ich, so sehr ihr auch pocket imd prachert,
Fiir euch keineti Deut mehr als zwanzig und neun.
Den einen miiszt ihr doch wohl minder werth seyn/' —

" Hum, sagte der Kaiser, der Grund laszt sich horcor
Und mag den durchlauchtigen Stolz wohl bekehren.
Nie hatt' ich bci meiner hochfwrstlichen Ehr' 1
Geglaubet, dasz sospottwohlfeilickw'ar.'*

*^ ^un abersollst du mir bcrechaea und sagen :
Wie bald ich zu Rosse die Welt mag umjagen ?
Um keine Minute zu wenig und viel !
1st dir der Bescheid darauf auch nur ein Spiel ?"— *

*• Herr, wenn mit der Sonn' ihr friih sattelr und rei^^
Und stets sie ki einerlei Tempo beglcitet.
So setz' ich mein Kreutz und mein Kappchen daran^^
la zweymal zyvolf Siuodcn iit alles gethan/'— ^

6^

GERMAN AUTHORS. 35^

14. Poetry.

Blumauer, Burger, Gellert, Gessncr, Geistenbcrg,
Glcim, Gothe, Hagedorn, Hallcr, Herder, Holty, Jacpbi,
Kastner, KIcist, Klnpstock, Lessing, Pfetfcl, Ramler,
Schubart, Stollberg, Uz, Wieland.

15. Drama.

Brandes, Eschenburg, Gothe, Ifland, Junger, Klop-
stock, Kotzebue, Langbein, Lessing, Meisner, Scliiller,
Schroder, Weise, Wieland.

16, Mncillixneous Work%.
Abbt, Archenholz, Bodmcr, Canzlcr, Claudius, Cran5&>
Dalberg, Ebejt, Eberhai^d, Engel, Eschenburg, Gcrsten-
berg, Gedike, Gothe, Harles, Heyne, Herder, Hiibncr,
Hcynatz, Klopstock, Kliigel, Kniggc, Lavater, Lessing„
Meisner, Nicolai, Rabener, Ramler, Wieland, Weis-
haupt, Winkehiiann, The Hanovrian Magazine.

17. Writers on the German Language.
Adelung, Campe, Gottsched, Klopstock, Ludwlg,
Meiner, Moriz, Schwan,

18. Novels.
Gothe, Hermes, Knigge, Langbein, Lessing, Meisner,
Nicolai, Salzmann, Schiller, Wieland.

19, Jntiquities^ Mythology.
Biisching, Cramer, Eschenburg, Meusel, Sulzer.

20. Politics.

Archenholz, Herzberg, Schlozcr, Voss, Winkopp,

21. Travels^

Bruckmann, Gmelin,. Hirschfeld, Meiner, Morit»,
Nicolai, Stollberg, Sulzer, Zollner.

22. Military Publications.
Bohm, Friedrich IL king of Prussia, Egger, K'jcvcn-
hiillcr, Schwerin, (count), Tempelhof, Zanthier.

23. Frtemasonry. ^
Lessing^ Nigolai, Scmler, l^tarke, Wcishaupt.

34S ANALYSIS OP TaEG£RMAK LANGITAGE.

*^ Ha bravo ! du tragst, wie ich merke GeseQe,
Das Hen&i wie den Kopf, auf der ricbtigen Stelle.
Drum sey der Pardon ibin in Gnaden gew*abrt»
Und obenein dir ein Panis-Brief bescbert :*'

** Wir ^assendem Abt von St. Gallen entbieten ;
Hans Bendix soil ihm niche die Schafe mebr huthen«
Der Abt soil sein pflegen, nach iinserm Gebot»
Umsonsti bis an seinen sanfbeligen To4.*'-^

THK £NZ)U

ftiotid by Cox, Son, and Baylis, No, 75, Gam tocm Stiee^

CATALOGUE

OF

CELEBRATED GERMAN AUTHORS,

MEN OF LEARNING AND GENIUS.

I. Divinity^ Polemics, Criticism,
Bahrdt, Bawngarten, Bengel, Buddeus, JBuxdorf, Cra-
mer, Coccejus, Crusius, Dieterich, Doderlein, Eichhorn,
Ernesti, Froriep, Grlesbach, Hermes, Hess, Heilmann^
Hezel, Hirt, Hufnagel, Jerusalem, Knapp, Koppe, Kypke,
Lavater, Less, Lessing, Liideke, Michalis, Mosheim,
Niemeyer, ^feiffer, Rambach, Reincccius, Reiske, Rese-
witz, K osenmiiller, Sack, Salzmann, Sander, Schlegel,
Schrokh, Schiitz, Semler, Siiberschlag, Spalding, Stein-
bart, Starke, Teller, Velthusen, Walch, Wettstcin, Zer-
rcncr, Zolllkofer, ZoUncr.

2. Reformation.

Hu88(Joh.), Luther (Mart), Melanchton, Zwinglins.
3. Ecclesiastical History,

Baumgartei), Fiisly, Hammerddrfer, Lindemacin, Mos-
hcim, Semler, Spittler, Walch.

4. Moral Philosophy,
Abbt (Thomas), Basedow, Baumgarten, Campe,
Claudius, Eberhard, Engel, Feder, Gellert, Herder, Jacob), .
Iselin, Kant, Moses A/lendelson, Plattner, Puffendof^
Reimarus, Sulzer, Zimmermann.

5. Law of Nature, Jurisprudence.
Achenwall, Balduin, Bohmer, Canzler, Claproth, Cocr
cejus, GroQmann, Hagemeister, Kfetneccius, Herzberg;, Lau-
terbacbyXeyser, Loskant, IVJeister, Moser, Musaus, MUnch*